JP2021153869A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase playability in a high base state more than before.SOLUTION: When execution of a special game is completed, a low base state can be shifted to a high base state. In addition, when s total number of variation display times of a first special symbol and variation display times of a second special symbol in the low base state reaches a specific number of times, as well, the low base state can be shifted to the high base state. When the variation display in which the total number of variation display times of the first special symbol and the variation display times of the second display times in the low base state reaches the specific number of times, the low base state can be shifted to the high base state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 54

Description

Regarding pachinko gaming machines.

In the conventional pachinko gaming machine, after the end of the special game, the machine shifts to a high base state, which is a time-saving state, and the high base state is maintained until a predetermined number of winning / failing lottery is performed. Further, by providing a plurality of periods of the high base state (the number of times of winning / failing lottery in which the high base state can be continued), the playability of the high base state is enhanced (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-296598

However, in a pachinko gaming machine such as Patent Document 1, further improvement in playability in a high base state is required.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the playability in a high base state more than before.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
The first start winning opening where the game ball can enter, and
The second start winning opening where the game ball can enter, and
A big winning opening that can be open and closed,
A variable member that is attached to the first start winning opening and can take an open state and a closed state,
The first special symbol display unit that can display the first special symbol,
The second special symbol display unit that can display the second special symbol,
An ordinary symbol display unit that can display ordinary symbols, and
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production,
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
It is configured so that the first random number can be obtained based on the ball entering the first start winning opening.
When the first random number is acquired, the first random number is configured to be memorable as the first hold.
The winning / failing lottery is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol can be determined based on the result of the winning / failing lottery.
Based on the determined variation pattern of the first special symbol, the first special symbol can be stopped and displayed after the first special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit.
It is configured so that the second random number can be obtained based on the ball entering the second start winning opening.
When the second random number is acquired, the second random number is configured to be memorable as the second hold.
The winning / failing lottery is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol can be determined based on the result of the winning / failing lottery.
Based on the determined variation pattern of the second special symbol, the second special symbol can be stopped and displayed after the second special symbol is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display unit.
After the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the first random number is winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the second random number is winning and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. , It is configured to be able to perform special games that can put the big prize opening in an advantageous state for the player.
By displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner on the normal symbol display unit and then stopping and displaying it in a predetermined mode, it is possible to execute an auxiliary game in which the variable member can be in an advantageous state for the player.
As a gaming state related to the ease of entering the first starting winning opening, there is a low base state and a high base state in which the ease of entering the first starting winning opening is higher than the low base state, and a predetermined transition It is configured to be able to shift to a high base state by satisfying the conditions.
When the execution of the special game is completed, it is possible to shift from the low base state to the high base state, and the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display number of the second special symbol in the low base state is Even if it reaches a certain number of times, it is configured to be able to shift from the low base state to the high base state.
By starting the fluctuation display in which the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display number of the second special symbol in the low base state reaches a specific number, it is possible to shift from the low base state to the high base state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being.

It should be noted that any combination of the components according to the above invention, and the components and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, and the like. However, the configurations according to the embodiments and modifications described in the embodiments for carrying out the invention are also effective as aspects of the present invention.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the playability in a high base state more than before.

It is a front view of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the front direction in the state where the frame member of the pachinko gaming machine is opened. It is a perspective view in the rear direction in the state where the frame member of the pachinko gaming machine is opened. It is a perspective view which shows the game board attached to the pachinko machine which is a premise. It is a functional block diagram of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine which is assumed. It is a figure which shows the power-on processing of the main control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the game stop state setting process during the power-on process. It is a figure which shows the interrupt processing of the main control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the winning or failing lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the winning symbol lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern lottery table in the low base state of the pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern lottery table in the high base state of the pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the special variation pattern lottery table which is referred to for a limited period of a pachinko gaming machine which is assumed. It is a figure which shows the power-on processing of the production control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the interrupt processing of the production control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure showing the game effect of the symbol variation display (during the stop display of the decorative symbol) during the normal game (low probability / low base) of the pachinko gaming machine that is the premise. It is the figure which showed the game production of the situation which the reach production with high expectation which becomes a big hit of the pachinko game machine which is a premise is performed. It is a figure which showed the game production of the state which the big hit game is executed in the presupposed pachinko game machine. It is a figure which showed the game production during operation of the electric chew support function which is in the specific game state (high probability or low probability / high base) of the presupposed pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine of this Example. It is a figure which shows the production example (hold charge production) of the specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (breakthrough zone battle production) of the specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (breakthrough zone battle victory production) of the specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (V prize promotion production) at the time of a small hit game in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (big hit type notification production) in the special game start demonstration in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example in the special game (the first big hit) in the case of shifting to a specific specific game (pseudo big hit) in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example in the specific game (pseudo jackpot) in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example in the special game (the second big hit) after the execution of the specific specific game (pseudo big hit) in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (the first half of the battle mode) in the specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (hold charge effect (battle mode)) of the effect which is displayed with the remaining hold up to 4 times from the final change in the specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (battle mode final battle production) of the production which is displayed with the remaining hold up to 4 times from the final fluctuation in the specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement relation of the winning apparatus, etc. in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Example. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine of the 2-1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the distribution ratio of the big hit (small hit) symbols in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1st embodiment. It is a figure which showed the production example of the pachinko game machine of the 2-1st embodiment in a long-time chance state. It is a figure which shows the production example of the ordinary electric accessory opening effect in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine of 2-2 Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the production during the chance time of the pachinko gaming machine of 2-2 Example. It is a figure which shows another example of the production during the chance time of the pachinko gaming machine of 2-2 Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the production during the super chance time of the pachinko gaming machine of 2-2 Example. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of Nos. 2-3 Example. It is a figure which shows the distribution ratio of the big hit (small hit) symbols in the pachinko gaming machine of Nos. 2-3 Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen for setting the automatic operation function of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen after setting the automatic operation function of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen for selecting the effect for which the automatic operation timing of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment is to be set. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen for setting the automatic operation timing of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement relation of the winning apparatus, etc. in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect screen (when the hold which concerns on the 1st special symbol exists at the time of the 699th rotation) concerning the generation of the "relief function" of the pachinko gaming machine of 4th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect screen (when there is no hold which concerns on the 1st special symbol at the time of the 699th rotation) about the occurrence of the "relief function" of the pachinko gaming machine of 4th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern about the special symbol lottery of the pachinko gaming machine of 4th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the right / wrong, the symbol, and the variation pattern about the normal symbol lottery of the pachinko gaming machine of 4th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement relation of the winning apparatus, etc. in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine of 5th Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect screen (when the variation of the 500th rotation is the variation of the 1st special symbol) concerning the occurrence of the "relief function" of the pachinko gaming machine of the 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect screen (when the variation of the 500th rotation is the variation of the 2nd special symbol) concerning the generation of the "relief function" of the pachinko gaming machine of the 5th embodiment.

(Prerequisite technology)
Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “prerequisite technology”) as a premise of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As typical examples of pachinko gaming machines related to the prerequisite technology, the pachinko gaming machines are shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, and the gaming board provided in the pachinko gaming machine is shown in FIG. 4. First, refer to these figures. The mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. In the following description, for convenience, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 2 will be referred to as front-back direction, left-right direction, and up-down direction, respectively.

[Machine configuration of pachinko game machines]
First, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine P will be described. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine P is configured in an outer rectangular shape, and is configured in a square shape on the front surface of the opening of the outer frame P1 fixed in the gaming facility in a size matching the opening of the outer frame P1. The front frames P2 are attached to each other so that they can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached by the upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10 and lower hinge portion 20) arranged on the front left edge portions of each other.

A game board P5 and a glass frame P3 are detachably set on the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 has a rectangular shape, and is assembled and held on the front surface side of the front frame P2 so as to be openable / closable and detachable by using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10 and lower hinge portion 20). The game board P5 is detachably set on the front side of the front frame P2, and the game area P501 provided on the front side of the game board P5 is visible to the player through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3 which is closed and held. Has been done. Further, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are formed according to the rotation direction by inserting a key into the keyway of the locking portion P30 provided on the front right edge of the pachinko gaming machine P and rotating it in either the left-right direction. , The outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 are unlocked, or the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked. As a specific example, when the key is inserted into the keyway of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the right, the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 are unlocked, and the key is inserted into the keyway of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the left. Then, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked.

At the lower part of the glass frame P3, upper and lower ball plates P340 (upper ball plate P341 and lower ball plate P342) for storing game balls are provided. Further, the glass frame P3 is provided with an effect lamp P350 that emits light according to the development status of the game and a speaker P370 capable of outputting sounds such as sound effects according to the development status of the game. An effect operation unit P380 for performing a predetermined effect operation is attached to the lower center of the glass frame P3, and the effect operation unit P380 possessed by this pachinko gaming machine, which is shown as a prerequisite technology, is a push input type button P381 and a tilt operation. It is equipped with a lever P382 of the type, and the button P381 enables the player to operate at all times, while the lever P382 is one of the movable objects (frame movable accessory P360) provided in the glass frame, and the operating means itself. Operation input is possible when is displaced upward (input permission state) (a plurality of operations are possible with the effect operation means of 1).

At the lower right of the front frame P2, a handle P204 for performing a firing operation of the game ball and adjusting the firing intensity is provided. A launching device unit P240 is further provided in the lower part of the front frame P2, and although not shown, a ball feeding mechanism P241 that sends out game balls stored in the upper ball plate P341 one by one, is sent from this ball feeding mechanism. A launching device P242 having a launching mechanism (a hammer driven by a rotary solenoid) for launching a game ball toward the game area P501, a launching control board P243 for synchronously controlling the operation of the ball feeding mechanism P241 and the launching device P242, etc. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board P5 (game board unit) is configured based on a base material formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a transparent synthetic resin or wood. Note that FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine P including the game board P5 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the game board unit P5. FIG. 4 illustrates a state in which the production accessory P560 (also referred to as “movable production device”, “effect movable body”, “effect movable character”, etc.) provided in the game board unit is operating. On the front surface of the game board P5, an arc-shaped outer rail P502 arranged from the lower left to the upper right part, and a circle arranged from the vicinity of the lower center of the game board to the inside of the outer rail P502 from the lower left to the upper left part. It is provided with an arc-shaped inner rail P503 and a rail decoration P504 arranged between the end of the outer rail P502 in the upper right portion and the lower part of the board surface and formed in a curved shape that opens to the left, and the outer rail P502. A substantially circular game area P501 is formed inside the inner rail P503 and the rail decoration P504. The game area P501 includes a left side area P501L (left-handed area), which is a left side area of the center accessory P540, and a right side area of the center accessory, with reference to the center accessory P540 arranged in the substantially center. It has a right side region P501R (right-handed region). Further, the outer rail and the inner rail form a guide passage for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the game area P501, along with a large number of game nails P510 and windmills P511 (not shown), a first start winning opening P711 (first starting opening), a second starting winning opening P721 (second starting opening), a general winning opening P731, Various ball-entry devices (referred to as "winning devices" when prize balls are generated) such as a normal-figure operating port P741 (general-figure operating gate device) and a large winning opening P751 (attacker) are arranged. It should be noted that the number of large winning openings may be one, or may be configured to have a plurality of large winning openings. Further, in the present specification, due to the configuration of the ball entry device, a game ball is discharged after entering the ball entry device, and a game ball further flows down the game area P501 after entering the ball entry device (gate type). On the other hand, the fact that a game ball is detected by an internal detection switch is called "entry" or "winning (especially one in which a prize ball is generated)", and flows down to the downstream game area like a gate-type entrance. In particular, there are cases where the items to be described are described separately from "passing". Further, the ball entry device may be referred to as a ball entry slot, and the winning device may be referred to as a winning slot.

Further, in the lower right of the game area P501, there is a main control display device P50 whose lighting is controlled by a main control board described later, such as a first special symbol display device P51, a second special symbol display device P52, and a normal symbol display device P53. Are arranged intensively. A center accessory P540 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501, and the screen of the effect display device P80 is visibly provided through the opening of the center accessory P540. On the upper part of the center accessory P540 or the like, an effect accessory P560 (movable accessory device) that performs an effect operation according to the development status of the game is provided. At the lower end of the game area P501, an out port P790 through which a game ball that has flowed down without entering the winning opening of various ball entry devices can pass is provided. The game ball that has entered the winning opening of various winning devices or the game ball that has flowed into the out opening P790 flows down to the rear surface side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed by penetrating the game board P5 back and forth. Then, it is collected in the collection flow path (gamed ball passage) at the lower part of the front frame P2 and passes through the out ball sensor P792 (launched ball number sensor) provided at the lower part of the front frame for detecting the total number of launched game balls. After that, it is discharged to the outside of the game machine.

The first start winning device P710 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. The first start winning device P710 is provided with a first starting winning opening P711 in which a game ball can be entered. The entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening P711 is an opportunity to acquire a random number (also referred to as a first random number, the details of which will be described later) used in the lottery related to the first special symbol, and the first start. Based on the entry of the game ball into the winning opening P711, the lottery related to the first special symbol is executed after the timing immediately after the entry or the holding period has elapsed.

The second start winning device P720 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. The second start winning device P720 is in a state where it is easy to enter the second start winning opening P721 where a game ball can enter and the second starting winning opening P721 when a normal symbol lottery described later is won. An ordinary electric accessory P770 (also referred to as a variable member), which is a movable body to be switched, is provided. The entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening P721 is an opportunity to acquire a random number (also referred to as a second random number, which will be described in detail later) used for the lottery related to the second special symbol, and the second start. Based on the entry of the game ball into the winning opening P721, the lottery related to the second special symbol is executed after the timing immediately after the entry or the holding period has elapsed. The second start winning device P721 is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening P721 or is easily entered by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 (also referred to as an auxiliary game), and the game ball is second started. It changes to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the winning opening P721. That is, the second start winning device P720 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening unless it is displaced to the open state, and a predetermined opportunity described later (an opportunity to win a normal symbol lottery). When the ball is opened at, the ease of entering the game ball increases. In addition, various aspects of the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770 are known, and the structure may not change the ease of entering the ball by opening the movable body P771, so that it is in the "open state" and "closed state". "Is described as" easy entry state (easy entry mode) "and" difficult entry state (difficult entry mode) ", respectively.

The general winning device P730 has a left general winning device P730L arranged in the left-handed area P501L and a right-side general winning device P730R arranged in the right-handed area P501R. In the pachinko gaming machine P in the present premise technology, the left general winning device P730L is configured with three general winning openings P731La to P731Lc as one unit, while the right general winning device P730R is a large winning device P750 described later. It is configured as part. The entry of a game ball into the general winning opening P731 is an opportunity for the prize ball to be paid out in the same manner as other winning devices. It should be noted that the number and position of the general winning openings P731 of the pachinko gaming machine, which are the premise, are merely examples, and may be configured so as to be arranged only in the right-handed region P501R.

The normal figure operation gate device P740 (normal figure operation port) is provided as a start ball entry port corresponding to a normal symbol game. The normal drawing operating gate device P740 is provided with an operating gate P741 through which a game ball can pass, and the entering game ball is configured to be able to flow further downstream of the game area of the game board. The passage of the game ball through the operating gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting winning device P720, that is, whether or not to operate the normal electric accessory P770. .. As a modified example, it is also possible to configure the general winning opening P731 to have a function that triggers a normal symbol lottery. In this case, in addition to the function of executing the normal symbol lottery, a prize ball It is also possible to provide a function for generating the above as a winning device of 1 (Prize drawing operation winning opening).

The large prize device P750 is configured to have a large prize opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) that opens and closes when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is a big hit or a small hit. It is sometimes called an "attacker (device)" or the like. The large winning device P750 is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the large winning opening P751 or is easy to enter (for example, a state in which a special electric accessory is activated P755) and a game ball cannot enter the large winning opening P751. Alternatively, the ball changes to a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball (for example, the special electric accessory P755 is inactive). In the big hit game, a plurality of round games (unit games) accompanied by an opening / closing operation of the big winning opening P751 are performed. Even when the special electric accessory P755 is in operation, the movable body P756 constituting the large winning opening P751 becomes a closed mode in which it is difficult to enter the ball due to a series of operation patterns (also referred to as "open pattern"). Has.

Further, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the large winning device P750 is referred to as a specific area P760 (called "V zone" or "V area"" through which the game ball can pass, and depending on the function, the "probability fluctuation function is activated". Areas ”,“ continuation areas ”, etc.) may be provided. The functions related to this "specific area" include (a) activating the probability fluctuation function (described later) after the big hit game triggered by passing through the specific area during the big hit game, and (b) passing through the specific area during the small hit game. Activating the accessory continuous operation device (flag for continuously operating the special electric accessory) and granting the right to execute the jackpot game, (c) Specified in a specific round during the jackpot game Examples include deterministic or non-execution of subsequent rounds based on whether or not the region has been passed. An opening / closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided in the "specific region", and the flow path can be distributed by the action of the opening / closing member P761. It may be configured to pass through the specific region P760 or other non-specific regions. Further, during the big hit game or the small hit game, the passage of the game ball in the specific area P761 may have a valid period and an invalid period.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the big prize device P750 is provided in the right side region P501R (right-handed region) in the gaming region P501. Therefore, in the big hit game or the small hit game, when the game ball is launched toward the game area P501, the ball is easily hit into the big winning opening P751 by hitting the right area P501R, so-called right-handed hit. It has become.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, will be described. On the back side of the front frame, a back set unit P4 having a front-rear communication window for attaching the game board unit P5 is attached to the center. A storage tank P401 for storing a large number of game balls supplied from the game facility side, a gutter member P402 for flowing down the game balls from the storage tank P401, and a game ball guided by the gutter member are paid to the back set unit P4. The prize ball payout unit P410, the back passage member P403, and the like, which allow the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit P410 to flow down to the upper ball plate P341 or the lower ball plate P342, are provided. Further, on the game ball flow path from the storage tank P401 to the ball plate P340, a ball pulling mechanism (ball pulling operation lever P405, a valve member that forms a flow path for removing the game ball from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever). P406) is provided.

On the back side of the game board P5, there is a main control board P40 (also referred to as a main game unit) that comprehensively controls the game progress of the pachinko game machine P, and general effects that match the game progress that accompanies the control of the main control board P40. The effect control board P41 (also referred to as a sub-game unit) that controls the above, the image control board P42 (also referred to as an image control unit) that controls the image display according to the game development, and the like are attached. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present premise technology, the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42 are assembled with the effect display device P80 (also referred to as a liquid crystal display device or the effect display unit) to display the effect display unit. It is configured. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set unit P4, there is a payout control board P43 (also referred to as a payout control unit) that controls the payout of game balls, and various control boards and electric / electronic devices that receive power from the game facility side. A power supply board P44 (not shown, also referred to as a power supply unit or a power supply unit) that supplies power to the components is attached. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing seal structure at a predetermined position on the back surface of the game board P5 or the back surface of the back set unit P4. It is arranged in each. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable) so that the pachinko gaming machine P can proceed with the game and execute the production. ..

[Functional block]
FIG. 5 shows a functional block of a pachinko gaming machine as a premise.

The pachinko gaming machine includes a power supply board P44 that generates a power source to be used in the game machine based on an AC power supply supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control board P40 (main control CPU) that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. ), The payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) as a frame control device for controlling the payout of prize balls and the launch of game balls, and the effect control board P41 for controlling the effect operation and processing. It is composed of various forms. The arrows shown in the figure indicate the relationship between transmission and reception in the upper direction by a solid line arrow and the relationship between electrical connections by a broken line arrow for each function.

By operating the power switch P47 provided on the board, the power supply board P44 can be attached to the main control board P40, the effect control board P41, the payout control board P43, and various gaming devices electrically connected to them. On the other hand, the power required for operation is generated and supplied. Although the details will be described later, since the power-on operation of the power switch P47 is a switch operation that triggers the start of processing of information related to the setting of the gaming machine, the power switch is covered with an open / close cover to prevent unauthorized operation. It is protected in a state of being.

The main control board P40 includes a first starting winning opening P711 (special drawing 1 starting opening switch P712), a second starting winning opening P721 (special drawing 2 starting opening switch P722), a large winning opening P751 (special drawing 2 starting opening switch P752), Detection switches related to the progress of various games such as the normal drawing operation port P741 (general drawing operation port switch P742), other detection switches general winning opening P731 (left side general winning opening, right side general winning opening), and out opening P790. It is connected to switches and sensors used for managing various games and monitoring fraud, such as a setting key switch P49, a vibration detection sensor P72, and a magnet sensor P73. The main control board receives information related to the occurrence of various gaming states from these switches, determines the control content related to the progress of the game, and is composed of solenoids and the like, and is large at the time of a big hit or a small hit. The special electric accessory driving means P70 driven to expand the winning opening P751 and the ordinary electric accessory P770 driven to make the ordinary electric accessory P770 easy to enter when the ordinary symbol lottery is won. Information related to the driving mode is output to the gaming device such as the driving means P71.

Sensors and the like connected to the main control board P40 are connected to terminals called input ports on the main control board to notify the main control board P40 of the occurrence of various gaming states based on sensor detection as information, and special electric power is provided. The accessory driving means P70, the ordinary electric accessory driving means P71, and other launching permission signals for the launching device P242 are received from terminals called output ports to control each device and device.

Further, the main control board P40 includes special symbol display devices P51 and P52 (also referred to as a first special symbol display unit and a second special symbol display unit) that display variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and a big hit or a small hit. The main control display device P50 that displays various displays such as the round indicator light P54 that notifies the type of hit (number of rounds) and the state indicator light P55 that notifies the game status, and the performance of the gaming machine (for example, the base value during normal game). That is, it is connected to a performance display device P59 or the like that displays the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of shots. Regarding the "base value", there are various other accounting methods such as data that excludes winnings such as the starting winning opening P711, etc., but if necessary in the present invention, a separate explanation will be given and it is assumed. Details are omitted in the explanation of the pachinko machine.

In addition to the above, the main control board P40 is configured to be electrically connectable to a device outside the gaming machine by means of an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, or the like, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. Further, the main control board P40 is also electrically connected to the effect control board P41 and the payout control board P43, which are other control boards in the game machine.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device P410 based on the prize ball payout transmitted from the main control board P40, a signal indicating the control state of the main control board, and the like, and the handle P204 by the player. Controls the launch of the game ball by the launcher unit P240 in response to the operation of. The payout device P410 has a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412 as an example, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one by rotating the payout motor P411. The launching device (launching device unit) P240 moves the game balls staying in the ball plate P340 (upper ball plate P341) one by one to a launchable position by the ball feed unit P241, and then turns the hammer into a game ball. It is configured to fire a game ball by hitting it. The payout control board P43 is provided with a ram clear switch P48 mainly used for initializing the gaming machine and canceling an error generated during the game, and is used for connecting the payout control board P43 and the main control board P40. The operation information of the ram clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via the harness or connector used.

The effect control board P41 includes an effect display device P80, a drive source and a position detection sensor (for example, a drive motor, an initial position detection sensor, and an effect position detection sensor) of the effect movable accessory P560, and a speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker). 141), effect operation unit P380 (for example, effect button P381 which is effect operation means P81, effect lever P382, cross key P383, etc.), effect lamp P82 ("decorative lamp", "board lamp (P550)", "frame lamp (P350)". It is also electrically connected to each other and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. Further, the effect control board P42 and the effect display device P80 are connected via an image control board P42 (VDP) that controls the display of the effect display device P80 (for example, a device that displays an image such as a liquid crystal display device). It may be something to do. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine, which is the premise of the present invention, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the effect control board P41, but the speaker P83 is provided by separately providing a voice control board equipped with an IC or the like for voice control. It may be configured to control.

Data transmission / reception between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41 is performed in one direction so as to be one direction from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the effect control board P41 to the configuration included in the main control board P40. , I can't request data transmission. Therefore, the effect control board P41 cannot refer to the information generated by the main control board P40 unless the information is transmitted. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of the present invention, data is transmitted and received in both directions between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, as in the case of between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41, the data may be transmitted and received in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic game progress]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the pachinko gaming machine P as the prerequisite technology configured as described above will be described for each game state. The "game state" is roughly classified into a "normal game state" and a "special game state" in which it is easier to acquire a game ball as compared with the normal game state. The "normal game state" is a state in which the player aims to acquire the right to shift to the "special game state", and even in the normal game state, the game state in which the player has a different degree of advantage in acquiring the right to shift to the special game state. A plurality of normal game states are provided, and among a plurality of normal game states, it is more advantageous for the player than a state in which the player can easily acquire the right to shift to the special game state (normal game state (low probability / low base state)). State) is expressed as "specific game state". The "special game state" corresponds to the so-called "big hit game" and "small hit game", and the special electric accessory driving means P70 is driven by the main control board P40, and the big winning opening P751 is opened to acquire the game ball. Means a state in which is easy.

[Normal game state (low probability / low base state)]
First, the game method and the progress of the game in the normal game state will be described. The normal gaming state described here is a description of the "normal gaming state (low probability / low base state)" (see FIG. 6) excluding the specific gaming state, and is generally in a situation where the player starts the game. The game state will be described, and the game method in the specific game state, the progress of the game, and the meanings of the terms “low (high) probability” and “low (high) base” will be described later.

As a method of gaming in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the player first operates the handle P204 to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area P501 provided on the gaming board P5. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the player fires the amount of operation of the handle P204 toward the left region P501L (left-handed region) of the gaming region. Operate as if to play a game.

When the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L of the game area by the player, the launched game ball flows down the game area P501, and the game nail P510 (also referred to as “obstacle nail” or “navel”) (also referred to as “obstacle nail” or “navel”) (not shown) or , While displacing the flow direction by the windmill P511, to the first starting winning opening P711 or the general winning opening P731L of the left general winning device, which is arranged at a position substantially below the center in the game area P501 of the game board called "navel" or the like. Either the ball is entered (winning) or the ball is not entered in any of the winning openings, and the ball is entered into the out opening P790 as a gamed game ball. When a ball is entered into the first starting winning opening P711 or the general winning opening P731, the main control board P40 causes the payout control board P43 to make the prize balls of the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening (control command). ) Is output, and the player acquires a new game ball by paying out the prize ball.

Here, a special figure 1 start port switch P712 is arranged inside the first start winning opening P711, and as a game state (game result) that can occur when a player fires a game ball into the left side area P501L in the game area. , When the ball is entered into the first starting winning opening P711, the game ball detection information of the special drawing 1 starting opening switch P712 is input to the main control board P40.

When the main control board P40 receives the input of the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start port switch P712, the main control board P40 pays out the game balls of a predetermined number of prize balls and draws a lottery related to the control of the first special symbol. Get a random number value to do. The random number value is acquired by acquiring the random number value generated by the random number generation circuit on the electric circuit based on the detection of the game ball (hard latch), or by the control device of the main control board P40 by processing on the software. When the detection information of the game ball is confirmed, a method such as executing a process of acquiring a random number value from the previous random number generation circuit or acquiring a random number value updated by software (soft latch) is available. Yes, it may be used properly according to the random number value to be acquired, or it may be used in combination. In addition, when the ball is entered into the general prize opening, the random number related to the special symbol is not acquired, and only the prize ball is paid out.

The lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is a "special symbol lottery", and the "special symbol lottery" includes a "win / fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "variable pattern lottery". The "win / fail lottery" is a process of determining whether the lottery result using the acquired random number value is "big hit" or "missing" (depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the lottery result includes "small hit". ). The "winning symbol lottery" (sometimes simply referred to as "symbol lottery") is a process of determining the display pattern of the stop display symbol indicating the winning / failing lottery result in the special symbol display device P51 (P52) in the main control display device P50. Yes, for one lottery result (big hit, small hit), one symbol can be determined from a plurality of stop display symbols, and "big hit", "small hit" according to the stop display symbol determined here. It is possible to make the execution mode of the special game in the above different. The "variable pattern lottery" is a process of determining at what timing the stop display symbol indicating the result of the winning / failing lottery is displayed on the special symbol display device P51 (P52), and the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device P51 (P52). It determines the time (referred to as "variable display time" or "variable pattern") during which the variable display indicating that the lottery has been executed is performed. It is common to use different random numbers for the "win / fail lottery", "winning symbol lottery", and "variable pattern lottery", and "win / fail lottery random numbers", "symbol random numbers", and "variable patterns", respectively. It is called a "random number". The lottery related to the control of the second special symbol performed based on the detection of the game ball of the special figure 2 start port switch P722 is also the same “special symbol lottery”. A description of the "special symbol lottery" will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the game method in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), the player fires a game ball into the left area P501L of the game area. Then, a game ball is inserted into the first start winning opening P711, a lottery related to the first special symbol (special symbol lottery) is executed, and a special symbol indicating "big hit" ("small hit") is shown on the special symbol display device. By displaying the stop display symbol of, a game aiming at acquiring the right to execute a special game is performed.

It should be noted that, as described above, in the process in which the player receives the special symbol lottery, the special symbol is variablely displayed according to the time determined by the variable pattern lottery. If there is a new ball in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening P711, second starting winning opening P721) during the variable display period of this special symbol, a predetermined number of special symbol lottery is executed. It has a hold function that temporarily stores the random value corresponding to the right. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, it is possible to hold up to four special symbol lottery as a hold function corresponding to the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting winning opening P711. The hold function can be set for each special symbol, and in the pachinko gaming machine P of this prerequisite technology, in addition to the hold of the first special symbol, the hold function of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is also held up to four times. It is possible to reserve the random value used for the special symbol lottery.

As described above, in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), the player fires the game ball into the left side area P501L of the game area to execute the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol. Then, in the special symbol lottery, when the special symbol display device displays that the lottery result of the special gaming state such as "big hit" or "small hit" has been won and the right to shift to the special gaming state has been acquired. , The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine P shifts to the special gaming state.

[Special game state]
Subsequently, the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state will be described. There are "big hit (game)" and "small hit (game)" in the special game state, and the special electric accessory P755 operates in both cases, that is, the special electric accessory driving means P70 is operated from the main control board P40. A drive signal is output to the player, and the big winning opening P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. The difference is that the "big hit" continuously operates the special electric accessory P755 a plurality of times. The major difference is that the "small hit" is completed by the operation of the special electric accessory once, while it is based on the operation of the operating device. As another difference, in the operation of the special electric accessory (big hit) based on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, it is possible to make the operation mode of the special electric accessory P755 more advantageous to the player. Specifically, the total opening time of the large winning opening P751 in the operating state (big hit) of the accessory continuous operation device is allowed up to 30 seconds, while the total opening of the large winning opening P751 in the small hit. There is a point that the time is limited to 1.8 seconds. In the following description of the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state, a jackpot will be used as an example.

The game progress of the special game in the pachinko game machine P, which is the prerequisite technology, is called "special game start demo" (in the case of a big hit, "big hit start demo", "role continuous operation start demo", etc., in chronological order. In the case of a hit, there is a production period called "small hit start demo") to notify the player that various special games have been acquired, and one time called "round (game)" (also called "unit game"). The operation period of the special electric accessory P755 and the "special game end demo" (referred to as "big hit end demo" and "combination operation end demo" in the case of a big hit, and "small hit end demo" in the case of a small hit. ), Which is mainly composed of a game result (number of acquired game balls, etc.) during a special game and a period for notifying the type of the normal game state (including the specific game state) of the transition destination.

Next, the method of the game during each of the above-mentioned special games will be described. First, during the "special game start demo" period, in the pachinko game machine P of the prerequisite technology, the large winning opening P751 is arranged in the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and the normal game state (low probability / low). Even if the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L, which is the same as the base state), it is almost impossible to expect the large winning opening P751 to enter the ball. In addition, the display device P80, the speaker (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370), and the effect lamp produce a right-handed notification effect that urges the player to launch the game ball into the right-hand area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. It is executed using P82. The player adjusts the operation amount of the handle P204 to increase the firing intensity of the game ball according to the right-handed notification effect, and changes the firing position so that the game ball flows down to the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. (Perform right-handed).

In the "round (game)" period, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the prerequisite technology, the large winning opening P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball by the drive signal output from the main control board P40 to the special electric accessory driving means P70. A production that congratulates the player on having a big hit (small hit) according to the execution period of the special game due to difficulty in entering the ball, or a normal game state that shifts after the special game is completed is more advantageous for the player. Perform an effect such as an effect that suggests whether or not the game will be in a gaming state. The player launches the game ball into the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area in order to enter the game ball into the large winning opening P751 and obtain a large number of game balls.

During one "round (game)" period, the opening pattern (operation mode of the special electric accessory) of the big winning opening determined based on the type of big hit (small hit) is completed (opening time elapses). Alternatively, the game ends when a predetermined "specified number" (sometimes expressed as "count", "C", etc.) of game balls enters. Then, according to the type of the special game state (big hit, small hit type) being executed, when all the round games to be executed are completed, the state shifts to the "special game end demo" state.

Subsequently, during the "special game end demo" period, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite technology, has the number of game balls acquired during the period of this special game state and multiple times continuously performed during the specific game period described later. The effect of notifying the cumulative number of acquired game balls acquired in the special game state (acquired without shifting to the normal game state (low probability / low base state)), or the normal game that shifts after the special game state. Notification of the type of state and notification related to the game method in the game state of the transition destination (such as the above-mentioned right-handed notification effect) are executed. The player operates the steering wheel in preparation for the game according to the type of the normal game state of the transition destination from the effect being executed.

In many pachinko gaming machines P that are premised,, with some exceptions, when a jackpot game as a special gaming state is executed, a special gaming state for a player called a "specific gaming state" as a normal gaming state. It is a game that allows you to enjoy the so-called "renso", in which the right to shift to is easily acquired, and the specific game state and the special game state are continuously repeated.

[Specific game state]
Subsequently, the "specific game state" will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the specific gaming state is roughly divided into three specific gaming states. Then, there are a "probability state" and a "base state" as elements that separate these types, and a specific game state is configured by combining them.

(Probability state)
The "probability state" is a probability fluctuation function based on the operating state of the "probability fluctuation function" (also referred to as "probability change"), which is a function of changing the probability that the lottery result will be a "big hit" in the winning or losing lottery in the special symbol lottery. When the winning / failing lottery in the special symbol lottery becomes a "big hit" with a higher probability than when is operating and not operating, it is expressed as "high probability (state)"("probability change state", "probability fluctuation state"). (There is also), and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not operating is expressed as "low probability (state)". The "high probability (state)" is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state) in that the probability of winning a big hit for one special symbol lottery is high.

(Base state)
The "base state" is a state related to the "base", that is, the "ratio of game balls (expected value) obtained as a prize ball when a predetermined number of game balls are fired", and is generally an ordinary electric accessory. The state in which the operation of P770 is easier (advantageous) than the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state) is called "high base (state)" (also referred to as "electric chew support (electric support) state"). .. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, even if the "electric chew support function" is not activated, the recommended launch position of the gaming ball is switched, so that "a prize ball is obtained when a predetermined number of gaming balls are launched." If the "ratio of game balls to be played" increases, it may be expressed as "high base state". "High base (state)" is special while suppressing the consumption of game balls by increasing the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (easily paid out) in the period until the special game state is acquired. It is a gaming state that is advantageous for the player in that it is possible to aim for the acquisition of the gaming state.

The "electric chew support function" is a state in which the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is easier than in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), but mainly includes a combination of three functions (at least one). ). The three functions that make up the "electric chew support function" are "ordinary symbol probability change", "ordinary symbol time reduction", and "opening extension (of ordinary electric accessory)". "Ordinary symbol probability change" refers to a state in which there is a high probability that an ordinary electric accessory will be operated in the "ordinary symbol lottery". The "ordinary symbol time reduction" shortens the time from executing the ordinary symbol lottery to displaying the result of the ordinary symbol lottery on the ordinary symbol display means P53 (also referred to as the ordinary symbol display unit) in the main control display device P50. Refers to the state of "Opening extension of ordinary electric accessory" means that the game ball can easily enter the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 for the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery. It refers to changing to operate, and as an example, it corresponds to extending and lengthening the total time for making an ordinary electric accessory in a state where it is easy to enter the ball.

In the "ordinary symbol lottery", the above-mentioned special symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, whereas the ordinary symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770, and the lottery. The execution trigger is different in that the game ball enters the normal drawing operation gate device P740, but it is almost the same in that the hit / fail, the symbol, and the fluctuation pattern are determined by lottery and that the holding function is provided. When expressing the winning / failing, the symbol, and the lottery of the fluctuation pattern related to the ordinary symbol lottery, "Public drawing" (or "Public drawing" (or "Floating pattern lottery"" It is expressed by adding "ordinary pattern") to the beginning.

"Probability state" and "base state" have been described as elements for distinguishing the types of "specific game state", but "time saving state" ("variation time shortening state"" is another element that constitutes the specific game state. , The "variation time reduction function" is activated). In general, the "time saving state" refers to a state in which the fluctuation display time (variation pattern) per special symbol is shortened and the number of executions of the special symbol lottery per unit time is increased, which is more for the player. It is in an advantageous state in that many special symbol lottery can be received per unit time. The "time saving state" (variable time shortening state) is often controlled at the same time as the above-mentioned "high probability state" and "electric chew support state", and it is rare that a specific gaming state is configured by itself.

[Specific game state 1: Low probability / high base state]
Returning to the explanation relating to the "specific game state", first, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is performed by the game state transition shown in (1), (8), and (12) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state, and (b) to elapse the predetermined number of games (* (8). ) Only) and so on. Although not shown, there is a case where the specific game state 1 shifts to the specific game state 1 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (2), (7), and (11) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (2), (7), and (11) include (c) acquiring a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 1. (d). It is mentioned that the predetermined number of games has passed (* (2) only). The "number of games" refers to, for example, the "number of times the special symbol lottery is executed".

After shifting to the specific gaming state 1 (low probability / high base state), both the above-mentioned "electric chew support function" and "variation time shortening function" are activated in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the gaming board P5 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the normal drawing operation gate device P740 and the second start winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory are placed in the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. The mouth P721 is arranged, and the player can easily receive the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery by performing "right-handed" to launch the game ball into the right-hand area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. Further, the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is controlled to the above-mentioned "time saving state" in the specific gaming state 1 (low probability / high base state).

Explaining the progress of the game in more detail, when the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is reached, the player fires a game ball into the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and the general drawing The first procedure is to enter (pass) the ball into the actuating gate device P740, and by entering (passing) the ball into the actuating gate device P740, the main control board P40 receives a normal symbol lottery. Since the normal symbol lottery in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is won with a high probability (about 1/1) due to the operation of the normal figure probability change function, one game ball is sent to the normal figure operation gate device P740. When the ball enters (passes), the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 occurs once. When the ordinary electric accessory P770 is activated, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is premised on, has the second start winning opening P721, which triggers the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol, in an easy-to-enter state, and the player continues to play the second. As a procedure, a game ball is launched toward the second starting winning opening P721. When a game ball enters the second start winning opening P721, detection information is input to the main control board P40, a special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the right to execute the special game (big hit, small hit). The lottery related to the acquisition of is executed.

The specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In the case of acquiring a small hit game, it is often assumed that the specific game state does not end, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the acquisition of a small hit game (or the acquisition of multiple small hit games, a specific type of game) It may be designed to end by (acquisition of a small hit game). When the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) ends depending on the number of games played, the state shifts to the normal game state (low probability / low base state).

[Specific game state 2: High probability / High base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is performed by the game state transition shown in (3), (7), and (9) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state. Although not shown, there is a case where the specific game state 2 is changed to the specific game state 2 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (4), (8), and (10) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (4), (8), and (10) include (a) acquiring a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 2, (c). It is mentioned that the predetermined number of games has passed.

After shifting to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state), in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the "probability fluctuation function" was further activated for the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state). It differs in that it has a "high probability (state)". The progress of the game and the method of the game in the specific game state 2 are the same as those in the specific game state 1, and the difference is that the player can win the big hit earlier than the high probability of winning the big hit in the special symbol lottery. do.

The specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In general, the specific game state 2 does not end in the case of acquiring a small hit game. When the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) ends depending on the number of games, the normal game state (low probability / low base state), the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state), and the specific game state Shift to 3 (high probability / low base state).

[Specific game state 3: High probability / low base state]
Subsequently, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is performed by the game state transition shown in (5), (10), and (11) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state, and (b) to elapse the predetermined number of games (* (10). ) Only) and so on. Although not shown, there is a case where the specific game state 3 shifts to the specific game state 3 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (6), (9), and (12) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (6), (9), and (12) include (c) acquiring a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 3, (d). It is mentioned that the predetermined number of games has passed (* (6) only).

When shifting to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated and becomes the "high probability (state)", and the specific game state 1 and the specific game Unlike the state 2, the "electric chew support function" and the "variation time shortening function" are not operating. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the gaming board P5 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the normal drawing operation gate device P740 and the second start winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory are placed in the right side area P501 (right-handed area) of the game area. Although the mouth P721 is arranged, it is assumed that in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), the player performs "right-handed" to shoot a game ball into the right-hand area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. However, the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is low, and there is no advantage in hitting right.

Therefore, the player advances the game by "left-handed" in which the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area, and since it is in a high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is high. The game method and game progress are the same as in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), except that the jackpot game can be acquired at an early stage because it is high.

The specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In general, the specific game state 3 does not end in the case of acquiring a small hit game. When the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) ends depending on the number of games played, the state shifts to the normal game state (low probability / low base state).

Note that the specific gaming state 3 (high probability / low base state) is different from the board layout configuration of FIG. 6 described as the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, and the normal electric accessory P770 is located in the right side region P501R (right-handed region). Arrangement of winning devices on the game board, such as arranging a third start winning opening of a type that does not have, and activating the "time saving state" so that many special symbol lottery can be received in a short time. In addition, depending on the control of the time saving state, "right-handed" may be the recommended gaming state.

As described above, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the game progresses according to a plurality of gaming states, but it is not always necessary to provide all the gaming states described above. Therefore, among the game machine specifications composed of a combination of a plurality of gaming states, the game machine specifications (sometimes referred to as "specs") that can be adopted by the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P are illustrated below.

Regarding typical game machine specifications (“specs”), examples of the types of game machine specifications related to the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery are “(until next time) probability change” and “ST (number of times cut probability change)”. , "V probability change (also called" ball probability "," attack round system ")", "latent probability change" can be adopted. The difference in the specifications of the gaming machine due to the difference in the probability fluctuation function may be expressed as "this gaming machine is a" XX machine (example: ST machine) "". Further, in a gaming machine that does not have a probability fluctuation function, by passing through a specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 during a small hit game, the accessory continuous operating device is subsequently activated (that is, the game shifts to the big hit game). There is also a game machine specification called "small hit V".

[Probability change (until next time)]
First of all, "probability change (until next time)" will be explained. "Probability change until next time" is generally defined as "specific game state 2 (specific game state 2), which is the most advantageous game state among the above-mentioned specific game states among a plurality of specific game states provided in the pachinko gaming machine P. The game machine specifications for "pachinko game machines" that will continue until the next big hit game right is acquired (high probability / high base state) are shown. In other words, the "probability change until next time" gaming machine is configured so that the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) continues until the right to the next big hit game is acquired, and it does not end depending on the number of symbol fluctuations. Has been done.

Depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). Also, in the "pachinko gaming machine that continues until the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) acquires the right to the next big hit game", the probability fluctuation function continues until the next big hit. Although it is sometimes called "probability change until the next time", the base state is "low base state", and the same game as the normal game state (low probability / low base state) may be required for the electric chew support function. In this way, since it is a probability change until the next time when the electric chew support function is not operating, it is expressed separately as "latent probability change".

[ST (Probability change of number of times)]
Next, "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" will be described. "ST" is an abbreviation for "Special Time", and generally, "specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) performs a predetermined number of special symbol lottery (predetermined number of times). The game machine specifications for "Pachinko game machines that will continue until the right of the jackpot game is acquired" are shown.

Depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). In addition, as in the case of "probability change until next time", the game state is set to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) until a predetermined number of special symbol lottery is performed or the right to the jackpot game is acquired. It is also possible to configure the case to be controlled so as to have a state called "latent probability change (latent ST)".

In addition, even if it is "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)", the period in which the game state is controlled by ST is set to "until the lottery of the special symbol lottery is performed 10,000 times". If it is a gaming machine specification that can be said to guarantee a big hit until the next time, it may be expressed as "probability change until the next time".

As mentioned above, "probability change until next time" and "ST (probability change by number of times)" distinguish "probability change state" as a gaming machine specification in that the end of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is different. Is. On the other hand, as described below, regarding whether or not the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is activated in a specific game state, that is, the start of execution of the probability fluctuation function, as in the "V probability change (" ball probability "" attack round system ")". In some cases, the game machine specifications (“specs”) are expressed by requiring special conditions.

[V probability change]
Next, a gaming machine specification called "V probability variation" will be described. The "V probability change" is referred to as a "specific area P750"("Vzone","Varea", etc.) provided in the large winning opening P751 during a jackpot game before the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state. When the passage of a gaming ball (“V winning”) is detected under predetermined conditions (such as during the execution of a specific jackpot round), the probability fluctuation function is activated after the jackpot game. The gaming machine specifications of the pachinko gaming machine that controls the transition to the specific gaming state (specific gaming state 1 or specific gaming state 3) are shown. Regarding the "specific region" used for the "V probability variation", it may be particularly referred to as a "probability fluctuation function operating region".

As described above, "V probability variation" is a gaming machine specification indicating that whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated depends on the game result during the jackpot game (depending on whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific area P760). There is a "V probability change (V-loop)" depending on whether the activated probability fluctuation function ends with the same control as the "probability change until the next time" or the same control as the "ST". An expression indicating a gaming machine specification different from "" and "V-ST" is used.

In the pachinko gaming machine P that adopts "V probability variation" as the game machine specification, if the V prize is not won during the big hit game, the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the big hit game, and the normal game state or the specific game It is controlled to state 1 (low probability / high base state). In addition, it is possible to switch whether or not the game state in which the probability variation function operates after the big hit game is switched between the case where the V prize is won and the case where the V prize is not won, and at the same time, the operation mode of the electric chew support function can be changed. As an example, in the "V probability change (V-loop)" machine, if V is won, the probability fluctuation function and the electric chew support function will continue until the next big hit, and if V is not won, the probability fluctuation function will be activated. However, the electric chew support function is also limited to 100 times of special symbol lottery.

[Small hit V]
Next, a gaming machine specification (spec) called "small hit V" will be described as a gaming machine specification that can provide a gaming state advantageous to the player regarding the acquisition of a big hit without having a probability fluctuation function.

The "small hit V" is a "specific area" provided inside the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game (during the operation of the special electric accessory) that is executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit. When passing through "P760" (sometimes referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.), a gaming machine specification that activates a continuous accessory actuating device following a small hit game, that is, starts a big hit game. be. In other words, by passing the specific area P760 during the small hit, the big hit game can be obtained without obtaining the result of the big hit as a result of the special symbol lottery.

"Small hit V" is a special electric accessory that is not operating as a result of the special symbol lottery. It is a specification that activates the accessory continuous operation device when passing through the specific area P760 during operation (while the large winning opening P751 is open), and while it may be expressed as "Type 1 small hit V", the conventional pachinko game Since it has a playability close to that of the so-called "type 2 pachinko" gaming machine, it may be expressed as "type 1 and type 2 mixer".

Generally, a pachinko machine that adopts "small hit V" as a game machine specification does not have a probability change function (probability change function), and the degree of advantage is changed depending on the presence or absence of an electric chew support function. That is, it becomes a change trigger of a special symbol (for example, winning a small hit at 1/2) that makes it easy to win a small hit at the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, which makes it easy to win when the electric chew support function is activated. By configuring it with a starting winning opening, it is easy to win a small hit under the situation where the electric chew support function is operating, and it is possible to aim for a big hit with a V winning during a small hit game. By doing so, it is a game playability that increases the possibility of obtaining a big hit by a small hit, instead of increasing the random value range that becomes a big hit as in the probability variation function.

[Other game machine specifications (specs)]
The game machine specifications described above are typical, and some other characteristic game machine specifications are known. Therefore, they will be briefly described below.

(limiter)
The "limiter" is a case in which a specific game state in which the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function is activated is repeatedly performed with the execution of the jackpot game in between (so-called "ream villa" state), and is predetermined. When the number of repetitions (number of consecutive villas) is reached, even if the jackpot game that the probability fluctuation function and the electric chew support function should originally operate is executed, the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function It is a function that limits the operation. As a limiter function, the function that limits the "probability fluctuation function" based on the number of consecutive times is called the "probability change limiter", and the function that limits the "electric chew support function" based on the number of consecutive times is called the "time saving limiter (electric sapoli limiter)". Call. A gaming machine having a limiter function is called a "limiter machine".

(Fall)
"Fall" is a gaming machine that executes a "fall lottery" that determines whether or not to terminate the probability fluctuation function each time a special symbol lottery is performed during the period when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is operating. The specifications are shown. In a situation where the electric chew support function is operating together with the probability fluctuation function, if the fall lottery is won, the operation of the electric chew support function ends at the end of the probability fluctuation function, or only the probability fluctuation function ends. The operation of the electric chew support function may continue.

It should be noted that a plurality of the above-mentioned gaming machine specifications can be combined. For example, when "ST" and "falling" are combined, when the specific gaming state 2 (high probability / high base state) is set, ( Specific game state 2 (high) when either 1) winning the fall lottery, (2) performing a predetermined number of special symbol lottery, or (3) acquiring the right to the jackpot game is satisfied. Probability / high base state) will end (shift to another gaming state).

Next, the control of the main control board P40 that controls the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, will be described. The pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise to be described in the present embodiment, will be described on the premise of the pachinko gaming machine that adopts "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" as the above-mentioned gaming machine specifications (specs). .. In the description of the embodiment, the notation of "P-s OO" indicating the processing step in the figure will be described as "step OO" in the text.

[Power-on processing of main control board (main loop processing of main control board)]
The main control board P40 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, first executes the power-on processing (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned on. Here, the details of the power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

When the power-on process is started on the main control board P40 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, initial settings related to the operation of the CPU, which is an arithmetic unit provided on the main control board P40, are performed (step 1002). The initial setting is to appropriately set the setting necessary for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU initial setting is completed, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power off information confirmation / checksum process (step 1006) are subsequently executed, and the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is received in response to these processing contents. ) Is performed.

More specifically, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is a "set value" for changing the degree of advantage of the special symbol lottery of the pachinko gaming machine P (particularly, the operation probability of the accessory continuous operation device, that is, the jackpot probability). The flag of whether or not it is in the state of performing "setting change processing" that can change "", and the flag of whether or not it is in the state of performing "setting confirmation processing" for confirming the "setting value" This is a process for generating information for determining whether or not to establish (whether or not to turn on) in the game stop state setting process that is performed later. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the detection status of the frame opening switch P131 (a switch that detects that the front frame is open to the outer frame) and the detection status of whether the ram clear switch P48 is operated by the player. , Data including data indicating the detection status of whether the setting key switch P49 is being rotated is generated as 1-byte data.

In the subsequent power-off information confirmation / checksum processing (step 1006), when the power was turned off last time, the pachinko gaming machine P normally turned off the power, and the control data related to the game state when the power-off occurred was normally performed. It is a process of confirming whether the data is normally saved and stored in the storage area of the CPU of the main control board P40. If the data is not normal, the game is played in the game stop state setting process (step 1008) described later as an error. It is a process to set (turn on) a flag to stop.

In the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), after the process in the power-on process is completed and the process shifts to the main loop process to start the game, a flag is set to prevent the player from actually playing the game. Based on the processing results of the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power off information confirmation / checksum process (step 1006), the "setting change state", "setting confirmation state", and "unrecoverable" This is a process of setting a flag to shift to one of the "error states", which is a game progress disallowed state. The details of the "game stop state setting process" are shown in FIG. 8, and the description will be given based on the description in FIG.

In the game stop state setting process, it is first determined whether or not the frame is open based on the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) (step 1100). If the front frame P2 of the pachinko gaming machine P is open to the outer frame P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), the specific bit of the 1-byte data is "1". Therefore, the processing of the following step 1102 is omitted. On the other hand, if the frame is not open when the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, it is assumed that some of the essential operations for executing the setting change process are not satisfied, and the input port confirmation process (step 1004) generated 1 The operation information of the setting key switch is calculated from the byte data so as to be off data. Although not shown, in both cases where YES is set in step 1102 and NO is set, the bit in the 1-byte data whose frame is open is also calculated to be off data.

In the following step 1104, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is information that can be determined as "there is a setting change operation". In the premise pachinko gaming machine P, the situations where it is judged that "there is a setting change operation" are (1) the frame release switch P131 is on (the frame is open when the power is turned on), and (2) the setting key switch P49 is on. It requires three states: (it is being rotated) and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. As described above, the information of the frame opening switch P131 is set to off in the 1-byte data, and it is determined in this step whether or not both (2) and (3) are satisfied. For example, when two specific bit data are "1", it is determined that there is a setting change operation (note that the active data indicating that the two switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1", and either of them is used. One data may be "0"). Then, when it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, that is, when it is determined to be YES in step 1104, the data indicating "setting change in progress" is stored as the game stop state flag, and the game stop state setting process is terminated ( Step 1106, step 1118). On the other hand, if NO is determined in step 1104, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1108. If the set value information stored in the ram (RAM = Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (when the operation is to return from the unrecoverable error state), it is set as the initial set value. The data corresponding to the set value "1" is set in the area for storing the set value (step 1118).

Next, in step 1108, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred. A game stop error is an error that requires ram clearing and setting (changing) processing of a set value when a situation occurs in which the game cannot proceed, such as a checksum abnormality (ram abnormality) or a setting value abnormality. Refers to. The determination in step 1108 determines whether or not to set the game stopped state based on the processing result of the power off information confirmation / checksum processing (step 1006) and the error information stored at the time of the previous power off processing. .. If it is determined that an error state should be set (if YES is determined in step 1108), the game stop state flag is set to "unrecoverable error state" and the game stop state setting process is terminated (step 1110, step 1118). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1112.

In the following step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 is operated. In the game stop state setting process, as a state when proceeding to the relevant step
(A) When the operation to shift to the setting confirmation state is being performed, in other words, in the judgment of "there is a setting change operation", (1) the frame opening switch P131 is on (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on). , (2) When the setting key switch P49 is on, is satisfied, and (3) The ram clear switch P48 is on, is not satisfied.
(B) When the ram clear operation for clearing the data is performed, in other words, (2) the setting key switch P49 is on is not satisfied, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. When satisfied
(C) When the power is turned on without any operation such as "setting change operation", "setting confirmation operation", or "ram clear operation" being performed.
It is one of the situations. Then, in these states, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) has (a) bit data indicating on / off of the setting key switch P49 is "1 (on data)", and (b) ram clear switch. The bit data indicating on / off of the operation detection state of P48 is "1 (on data)", and (c) the 1-byte data is all off data (for example, all bits "0").

Then, in step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated, and if there is a ram clear operation (when it is determined to be YES in step 1112), the pachinko gaming machine enters the game-enabled state after ram clearing. In order to make the transition, a process of clearing the game stop state flag is performed (step 1114). On the other hand, except in the situation where the ram clear operation is performed, the current 1-byte data is set as it is, and at this time, when the operation to shift the game stop state flag to the "setting confirmation state" is performed (in step 1112). (When determining NO), the bit data indicating the operation status of the setting key switch P49 is "1", and the 1-byte data indicating the game stop status flag is stored as data indicating "setting is being confirmed" (when it is determined to be NO). Step 1118). Further, when there is neither a ram clear operation nor a transition operation to the setting confirmation state, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is originally data indicating that there is no game stop as a game stop state flag. It is set as information without game stop.

If a value indicating some kind of stop state is stored for the game stop state flag set in the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), it is the main game allowed state in the power-on process (step 1000). In the interrupt process (step 2000), which is the main body of the game progress control executed after the transition to the loop (step 1028 to step 1036), the value indicating the stopped state is referred to, and the game progress described as "basic game progress". However, these controls will be described later in the description of interrupt processing.

Returning to the description of the power-on process of FIG. 7, the subsequent process will be described. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is completed, it is determined whether or not the ram clear operation has been performed (step 1010). The ram clear operation is that the ram clear switch P48 is operated when the power of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned on. This process is executed regardless of whether the setting key switch P49 is off or on. When it is determined in step 1010 that there is a ram clear operation, a predetermined storage area is initialized from the ram storage area of the main control board P40.

In the subsequent processes of steps 1014 to 1020, a process of setting an effect control command (effect command) for causing the effect control board P41 to recognize the state of the gaming machine is performed from the main control board P40 when the power is turned on. More specifically, in step 1014, a process of clearing the effect control command that had not been transmitted when the power was cut off last time (when the power was cut off) is performed from the storage area. Then, when the information regarding the current gaming state of the main control board P40 returned after the power is turned on in step 1016 is generated as an effect control command and it is determined in step 1018 that the game is not in the game stopped state, the generated return in step 1020 is performed. The effect control command indicating the game state is set in the area for storing the transmission data of the effect control command.

When the processing related to the setting of the effect control command at the time of turning on the power is completed, the necessary data (drive signal) for returning the large winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) and the ordinary electric accessory P770 to the state before the power failure occurred. ) Is output from the output port to the special electric accessory driving means P70 and the ordinary electric accessory driving means P71. (Step 1022)

Then, when the processing up to step 1022 in the power-on processing is completed, the CPU of the main control board P40 is subjected to a process of setting the generation interval of the interrupt processing time (step 1024). In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the interval for executing the interrupt processing (FIG. 9, step 2000) described later is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). When this process is completed, the process shifts to a circular process called a main loop in which the player can play, and the execution of the circular process in the main loop is repeated until a power failure occurs.

(Main loop)
As shown in FIG. 7, the processing of the main loop of the main control board is performed by first performing a process of prohibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing in step 1026, and enabling interrupt processing in step 1036 until the processing of the main loop is completed. (Up to) Restrict the execution of interrupt processing.

When interrupts are disabled, in the following step 1028, the occurrence of a runaway CPU of the main control board P40 called a watchdog timer (a situation in which processing loops and stops proceeding, etc.) is to be monitored. Clear (initialize) the area that stores the timekeeping information.

Then, in step 1030, it is determined whether the power supply is cut off (for example, whether the power supply cutoff signal sent from the power supply board P44 is input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40). If the power is cut off, the current gaming state is memorized, the power cutoff information and the checksum information are memorized, and the processing as the CPU of the main control board P40 is stopped (step 1032). ) Is executed. If the power is not cut off, the process proceeds to the next step.

In step 1034, a process of updating the random number used for the special symbol lottery and the random number value used for the normal symbol lottery is performed. Some of these random number values are updated in the interrupt process described later, and this is a process for preventing the random number update cycle from becoming constant due to the random number being updated only in the interrupt process. If there is a process that is executed irregularly in the interrupt process, it is possible to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant by adopting a method such as updating the random number value according to the process. Therefore, it is not essential to provide a random number update process in the main loop.

Step 1036 is the final process in the main loop, and performs a process for permitting interrupts. Immediately after that, the interrupt is returned to the interrupt disable in step 1026, which is the first process in the main loop. If the CPU of the main control board P40 has an input indicating the above-mentioned state), the interrupt processing described later will be executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Subsequently, interrupt processing (also referred to as “timer interrupt processing”) performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIG. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, most of the progress of the game is controlled by interrupt processing (step 2000), and the sub-module program provided that can be changed according to the gaming machine specifications (specs) is generally constant. It is configured to read and control in the order of. The processing related to these submodules will be briefly described below.

(Watchdog timer clear)
At the beginning of the interrupt process, a watchdog timer clear process is provided. This process is the same as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 7, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 described above. (Step 2002)

(Input port confirmation process)
In the input port confirmation process, by confirming the information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40, information that enables identification as to whether or not there is input information as information necessary for determination in the subsequent processing is provided. This is the process to generate. (Step 2004)

The information input to the input port includes input signals related to artificial operations such as an input signal indicating the operation status of the ram clear switch P48 and the setting key switch P49, and an input signal indicating the operation status (whether or not there is a touch) of the handle P204. , Special figure 1 Input signal indicating the game result by detecting the game ball such as the start port switch P712 and the big prize opening switch P752, the magnetic sensor P73, the door opening sensor P131, the vibration detection sensor P72, etc. are provided for fraud monitoring. There is an input signal that indicates the detection status of the sensor.

In the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times in 10 μs (microseconds), and the data that becomes the same data (same bit) in all reads is called the input data (“level data”) in this interrupt. ), Stored in the ram of the main control board P40. For the part of the data read three times that is not the same data in all readings, the data confirmed in the previous interrupt processing (interrupt processing 4 ms ago) will be adopted as level data, that is, the interrupt this time. If the data cannot be read normally in, the data stored in the previous interrupt will not be updated.

Then, when the input data (level data) in the interrupt this time is confirmed, a comparison operation with the input data in the previous interrupt is performed to generate "rising data" (data that identifies the bit whose input data has changed from off to on). The data that identifies the switch that was switched to the on input by the interrupt this time is stored.

(Random number update process)
Random number update processing is performed by software among various random numbers such as winning / failing random numbers, symbol random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers related to the special symbol lottery, and normal symbol lottery normal symbol winning / failing random numbers, normal symbol random numbers, and normal symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers. This is a process of updating a so-called soft random number, which is a random number value to be updated (step 2006). In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, the random numbers used for the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are those that are updated by the random number generation circuit at the update cycle on the circuit and those that are updated at the soft cycle. By combining them, it is configured to maintain the randomness of various random numbers at the time of random number acquisition.

In the random number update process, as described above, the soft random number is updated, but as an update method,
(A) A random number is updated by incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1), and when the upper limit (or lower limit) of the random number range is exceeded, the lower limit value (or upper limit value) is set.
(B) Subtract (or add) an arbitrary prime number to a random number, and add (or subtract) the value of the random number range +1 (or random number range -1) when the random number range is exceeded.
(C) Repeat incrementing (or decrement) from the random number set as the initial value, and when the update of one cycle is completed, set the separately updated "initial value random number" as a new initial value and perform the same update. Things that repeat (also called initial value update type random numbers),
Various update methods such as can be exemplified. The update method is not limited to the one illustrated in this embodiment, and any method may be adopted as long as the random number can be maintained.

(Setting control processing)
The setting control process is performed when the game stop flag set in the power-on process (see FIG. 7) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting is being changed" or "setting is being confirmed". (Step 2008)

In the setting control process, it is determined whether or not the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated for the data stored as the game stop flag during the power-on process is on-data, and it is not on-data, that is, the pachinko game machine. If the setting key is not turned on when the power is turned on, this process is exited.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated during the game stop flag is on-data, the current interrupt is used to determine whether to end "setting changing" and "setting checking". After referring to the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the process (generated by the input port confirmation process described above) and clearing the game stop flag when the setting key switch P49 is turned off to enable the game, An effect control command for returning (or starting) an effect is set on the effect control board according to whether the return is from the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state".

Further, in the power-on process (see FIG. 7), when the game stop flag is "setting is being changed", the role of the "setting change switch" in this interrupt timing is played during the period until the setting key switch P49 is turned off. Check the operating status of the ram clear switch P48 (switch operated to change the set value). When the game stop flag is "setting is being changed", when the rising data related to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated in this interrupt, the "setting value" is set to the next in the predetermined change order. Change the data so that it becomes the set value. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine P having set value data such that the setting is switched from 1 to 6 in order, each time there is rising data based on the operation of the setting change switch (ram clear switch P48), the setting is set in this setting control process. The process of increasing the value by "1" (when the set value before the operation is 6, it is changed to 1 as the next value) is performed.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, the operations in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are provided during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 9), so that the operations of the setting key switch and the setting change switch are monitored in the interrupt processing cycle. , A program for periodic monitoring during power-on processing (see FIG. 7) in which display data can be output to the display device by LED output processing, which will be described later, and interrupt processing has not been set separately. Can be omitted. It should be noted that, during the power-on process, it may be configured to monitor switches related to setting changes and setting confirmations, control display devices, and update set values.

(Game stop monitoring process)
In the game stop monitoring process, whether or not the game is stopped by reading the data of the game stop flag generated during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) executed by the CPU of the main control board when the pachinko gaming machine is turned on. It is a process to confirm whether or not. (Step 2010)

In the game stop monitoring process, when some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the read game stop flag data, for example, the game stop flag data is not 0 and one of the bits is "1". If it is, it is determined that the game is stopped (a state in which the game is stopped), and it is considered that the game is stopped, and a part of the processing during the interrupt processing (“timer subtraction processing (step 2014)” in FIG. 9 to “special electric motor” (Up to the accessory control process (step 2028)) ”is omitted.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as a state in which the game needs to be stopped, that is, a state in which the player cannot play the game, "setting is being changed", "setting is being confirmed", and "unrecoverable error" A state such as "occurring" can be exemplified.

(Timer subtraction processing)
The timer subtraction process is a process of updating the timer data used for managing the time related to the progress of the game (step 2014).

As an example of the timer data update process, management of the fluctuation display time set when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started, and the operating time of the special electric accessory P755 during the big hit game (opening time of the big winning opening P751). ), Timer data update processing triggered by the progress of the game, timekeeping processing for error determination such as detecting ball clogging, LED lighting pattern in the main control display device P50 such as the special symbol display devices P51 and P52. Examples thereof include a process for measuring the switching time for switching, a process for measuring the period for outputting information from the external information output terminal P77 or the like to an external device (hall computer, etc.), and the like.

The timer data updated by the timer update process is divided into the storage area (ram storage area) of the main control board P40 for each type of timer data such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer", and is continuous. Each is stored in the storage area.

In the timer update process, processes such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" are performed on the storage area that stores the types of individual timer data, and the time values of various timers are updated. I do. The timer update process performs a process of decrementing (-1) the timer data stored in the storage area. If the stored timer data is already "0", it is processed so that it becomes "0" even after processing (if it becomes a negative value, it is set to "0", or it is set to "0". If it is "0", do not decrement, etc.).

In the presupposed Pachinko game machine P, the cycle of one interrupt is 4 ms, so in the case of 1-byte timer data, only the management target that ends in a maximum of 255 updates (about 1 second) is controlled. It is possible, but if there is no game information that can be managed only within 1 second (if there is little), it is also possible to configure it with only 2-byte timer data and not have 1-byte timer update processing. Is. Further, when it is necessary to manage the time value that cannot be managed even by the 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data that can manage a longer time than a "3-byte timer".

(Validity period setting process)
The validity period setting process is a period for controlling the winning opening (mainly the winning opening related to the large winning opening P751 or the ordinary electric accessory P770) that can be changed to the easy-to-enter mode or the difficult-to-enter mode. In addition, the validity period is set in the validity extension period, and the invalid period is set for the other period (when the winning opening is in a difficult-to-enter mode and other than the validity extension period). (Step 2016)

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine, the winning of the large winning opening P751 as the large winning device and the second starting winning opening P721, which is the second starting winning device P720 equipped with the ordinary electric accessory P770, is set as the valid period. It becomes a process to do.

In addition, during the valid extension period, in order to treat the game ball entered at the timing immediately before the large winning opening P751 or the ordinary electric accessory P770 shifts to the difficult-to-enter mode as an effective winning, the large winning opening P750 (special electric accessory) Since it is treated as an effective period even after the control period for executing the opening control for the electric accessory such as P755) and the ordinary electric accessory P770 has elapsed, a fixed time set appropriately according to the structure of the electric accessory is set. It is a control period.

Further, depending on the game machine specifications, when the specific area P760 (V area) is provided, an effective extension period for the passage of the game ball with respect to the specific area P760 may be set. The validity period of a specific area is also set.

(Prize winning monitoring process)
The winning monitoring process determines whether or not the winning is valid based on the winning of the game ball for various winning openings (large winning opening P751, starting opening P711, P721, general winning opening P731) in the pachinko gaming machine, and the prize is awarded. This is a process of generating information that triggers the process of generating the right to draw a special symbol for a ball or a ball entering the starting port (occurrence of hold). (Step 2018)

The processing contents are as follows: (a) Detection of the presence or absence of winning for each winning opening in a predetermined order based on the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004) (b) The winning opening having a valid period In that case, it is judged whether or not the prize is won during the valid period, and when a valid prize is generated for each winning opening, (c) A directing control command indicating the winning information for each winning opening to be transmitted to the directing control board P41. Settings, (d) Update the counter value (called "winning counter") for storing the number of occurrences of operation triggers based on winning for each winning opening (in other words, among the actions based on the detection of various winning openings Updates the counter value that stores the number of unprocessed operations in).

In the winning monitoring process, not only the winning of various winning openings, but also the out-ball detection switch P792 provided for counting the out-balls, the operation opening switch P742 that triggers the ordinary symbol lottery, and the gaming machine. Depending on the specifications, it is also determined whether the game ball enters or passes through the specific area P760 (V area), and the operation of the game machine (for example, the operation of the game machine (for example, the occurrence of a prize ball or the trigger of a special symbol lottery) is also determined. In this process, the presence or absence of detection of the game ball required for the process of transmitting the information indicating that the operation port switch P742 and the specific area P760 have been passed to the effect control board P41 is performed.

(Operating port monitoring process)
The operation port monitoring process is a hold related to the normal symbol lottery (also referred to as a normal symbol hold) when the rising data of the normal symbol operation port switch P742 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). ) Is generated. (Step 2020)

More specifically, when the normal symbol operation port switch P742 is detected, the number of holds related to the normal symbol lottery is confirmed, and if the number of holds is less than the upper limit, a random number is stored as a new hold. Since it is possible, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the number of holds to increase the number of holds information by one, the random numbers for the normal figure hit / miss, the normal figure symbol random numbers, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern random numbers are random numbers. Obtain from the generation circuit, or obtain the current corresponding soft random number and store it as a hold.

(Normal symbol control processing)
The normal symbol control process performs a process related to the normal symbol lottery, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 (step 2022). These processes shift to different sub-module processes depending on which is the data indicating the control state of the normal symbol or the normal electric accessory, which is called the normal symbol status, and perform the control according to the state. The status of the normal symbol is "0: Waiting for the normal symbol", "1: Normal symbol is changing", "2: Normal symbol is stopped and displayed", "3: Normal electric accessory is operating", "4: Normal" There is a "Demonstration of the end of the electric accessory", and processing is performed according to each state.

<< Normal symbol change start monitoring control processing >>
The normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "0: waiting for the normal symbol".

In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the number of pending numbers related to the normal symbol lottery is "0". If it is "0", the right to change the normal symbol has not been generated, and the normal symbol control process is exited. On the other hand, if the number of holdings related to the normal symbol lottery is not "0", it means that the right to change the normal symbol has been generated, and it is judged that the condition for starting the change of the normal symbol is satisfied, and the change of the normal symbol is changed. Execute the process related to the start.

When it is determined that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the hold number information is decremented by -1 from the area for storing the hold number information related to the normal symbol lottery, and then the normal symbol hit / miss random number, the normal symbol symbol random number, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number are obtained. Call and perform a normal figure winning / failing lottery, a normal figure pattern lottery, and a normal figure fluctuation pattern lottery, store the lottery result in the storage area of the main control board, clear the random number information used this time, and store the storage area of the number of pending numbers. The process of shifting is performed so that the processes are processed in the memorized order, and the normal symbol status is updated to "1: Normal symbol is changing". Regarding the normal symbol lottery, different lottery tables are used depending on the operating status of the above-mentioned "base state" (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol), and it is easy to win in the high base state. , Ordinary symbols tend to have a short variation display time.

《Processing during normal symbol change》
The normal symbol changing process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "1: normal symbol changing".

In the normal symbol change processing, a timer that manages the change display of the normal symbol until the normal symbol change display time according to the normal symbol change pattern determined during the normal symbol change start monitoring control process elapses, that is, the normal symbol change display (normal). This is a process of causing the normal symbol display device P53 to execute the fluctuation display of the normal symbol until the symbol variation display timer) becomes 0 in the timer update process.

More specifically, when the normal symbol variation display timer is not 0, the normal symbol display switching counter whose maximum value is "5" is updated every time this process is executed, and the normal symbol display switching counter is set to "5". At the timing of "5", a process of storing information regarding the next light emission pattern is performed in a storage area for storing data for designating the light emission pattern of the LED constituting the normal symbol display device P53. The normal map display switching counter is reset to the initial value "0" at the timing when the maximum value "5" is reached. That is, in the variation display of the normal symbol, the lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 is switched at intervals of 5 interrupts (4 ms × 5 = 20 ms). The switching interval can be set as appropriate. For example, if the maximum value of the normal figure display switching counter is 25, the display pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 is switched at intervals of once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms). Be done.

When the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol ends, that is, when the normal symbol fluctuation display timer is "0", in this process, the display pattern of the normal symbol stop display symbol determined by the normal symbol lottery is the main control display device. Data for designating the LED lighting pattern indicating the stop display mode is stored in the storage area for storing the LED lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 so that the stop display is displayed on the normal symbol display device P53 on P50. Then, the symbol fixing time (time for displaying the stop display symbol) of the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol stop display timer, and the normal symbol status is updated to "2: Normal symbol stop display".

<< Processing during normal symbol stop display >>
The normal symbol stop display processing is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "2: Normal symbol stop display".

In the normal symbol stop display processing, it is confirmed whether the value of the normal symbol stop display timer for which the symbol fixed time is set at the end of the normal symbol change processing is "0", and at the timing when it becomes "0". Then, the process of setting for moving to the next game operation is performed.

When the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0" and the result of this normal symbol lottery is "hit", it depends on the winning symbol and the operating state of the base state (extension function of the normal electric accessory). , Call the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770, set the operation pattern, clear the winning counter related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, and set the normal symbol status to "3: Normal electric accessory is operating". Update to.

On the other hand, when the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0" and the result of this normal symbol lottery is "missing", the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: waiting for normal symbol". I do.

《Processing during normal electric accessory operation》
The normal electric accessory operating process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "3: Normal electric accessory operating".

In the process during operation of the normal electric accessory, the opening operation (change to the easy entry mode) and the closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory are performed based on the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 set in the process during the normal symbol stop display. While controlling (change to a difficult-to-enter mode), the establishment of the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory is monitored. The operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 ends when (a) a specified number of ordinary electric accessory prizes set as the end condition of the ordinary electric accessory occur, and (b) the operation of the preset operation pattern ends. This is the case (when the open operation period of the normal electric accessory has expired).

When the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory is satisfied, the extension period of a fixed time determined in advance corresponding to the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is clocked in the timer area for storing the effective extension period of the ordinary electric accessory. Set the time. Then, the time value related to the operation end demonstration of the ordinary electric accessory is set in the ordinary electric accessory operation end demo timer, and the ordinary symbol status is set to "4: During the ordinary electric accessory end demonstration".

《Demonstration process to end normal electric accessory operation》
The normal electric accessory operation end demo process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "4: Normal electric accessory end demo".

In the normal electric accessory operation end demo process, the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer set in the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer waits until it becomes "0", and the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer becomes "0". When it becomes, the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: waiting for normal symbol" is performed.

(Starting port monitoring process)
In the start port monitoring process, when the start-up data of the special figure 1 start port switch P712 and the special figure 2 start port switch P722 are generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), a special symbol lottery is performed. (The hold related to the lottery of the first special symbol is also called the first hold and the first special symbol hold, and the hold related to the lottery of the second special symbol is both the second hold and the second special symbol hold. Performs processing related to the occurrence of). (Step 2024)

More specifically, when the special figure 1 start port switch P712 and the special figure 2 start port switch P722 are detected, the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery is confirmed, and the number of holds does not reach the upper limit. Can store a random number as a new hold, so after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the hold number and increasing the hold number information by 1, the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern The random number is acquired from the random number generation circuit, or the current corresponding soft random number is acquired and stored as a hold.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, there are two types of special symbols, the first special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 1) and the second special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 2). Since the symbols are provided, the data of the number of holdings of the corresponding special symbols and the starting port switch are called for each of the starting ports provided on the game board P5, the number of holdings is added for each starting opening, and random numbers are acquired. Is processed.

Further, when the starting port to be processed is composed of the starting port (electric chew) related to the ordinary electric accessory, the starting port winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 is effective in the above-mentioned validity period setting process. After determining whether or not it was performed within the period, if it is within the valid period, the above-mentioned processing is performed.

When storing the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, the acquired random number information is used in advance using the advance notice judgment value table, and the fluctuation content when the fluctuation based on the various reserved random numbers is executed is in advance. Information that can be inferred is generated and notified to the effect control board P41 as an effect control command (referred to as "preliminary determination command", "preliminary determination information", and "look-ahead determination command"). The pre-judgment command is generated for each of the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, and when it is transmitted to the effect control board P41, it is used for the lottery related to the execution of the "look-ahead effect" described later on the effect control board P41. Will be done.

(Special symbol control processing)
The special symbol control process (step 2026) includes status information for managing a special symbol called special symbol status (also referred to as "special symbol status") and special electric accessory status (also referred to as "special electric game status"). Depending on the state information for managing the operating state of the special electric accessory called, any of the special symbol change start management (special symbol change start monitoring control process), special symbol change process, and special symbol stop symbol display process. Execute the process.

The special symbol status includes "0: Waiting for special symbol change", "1: Special symbol change", "2: Lost symbol stop display", "3: Big hit symbol stop display", "4: Small hit" It has a state of "design stop display", and the status of the special electric accessory includes "0: waiting for a hit", "1: the special electric accessory is operating", "2: the big winning opening is closed", and "3". : Big hit end demonstration is in progress ”,“ 4: Small hit special electric power is in operation ”,“ 5: Small hit is closed ”,“ 6: Small hit end demonstration is in progress ”. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, it may not have a small hit, and in that case, it does not have the status data related to the small hit. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

When there are a plurality of special symbols, the special symbol control process is performed based on a predetermined order (priority). In a predetermined order, the process of preferentially controlling the second special symbol is performed, and in a situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held, the change of the second special symbol comes first. The game machine specifications that are processed so that they are started (the second special symbol changes with priority) are called "second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control", and the pachinko gaming machine P is implemented as a premise. In the description of the form, the processing related to this type will be described by way of example.

In the special symbol control process, first, the second special symbol is controlled. When the control of the second special symbol is started, the information of the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the information of the special electric accessory status is first referred to. In the case of data indicating that the special electric accessory status is during a big hit game or a small hit game (when the special electric accessory status is other than "0: waiting for a hit"), the first special symbol is changing and the first If the special symbol status of the special symbol is other than "0: Waiting for special symbol change", the process is completed without performing the process.

When the control of the second special symbol is executed, the process of updating the timer value of the control related to the second special symbol is executed. The timer is updated by the process of decrementing (-1) the data in the storage area for storing the timer, and when the decremented result is a negative value, "0" is set. Then, when the timer update is completed, the submodule process described later is called and executed based on the special symbol status corresponding to the special symbol 2. Although the timer subtraction process is also performed during the interrupt process, the timer updated by the timer subtraction process does not include the timer data updated by the special symbol control process, and the special symbol control process does not include the timer data. It manages timer data for control related to special symbols.

<< Special symbol change start monitoring control processing >>
The special symbol change start monitoring control process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is "0: waiting for special symbol change".

In the special symbol change start monitoring control process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a hold of the special symbol being processed as a target, the process is completed if there is no hold, and the subsequent process is executed if there is a hold. Subsequent processing is a special symbol lottery performed when the fluctuation is started. In the special symbol lottery, first, the data stored as the set value is read out and inspected, and it is determined whether or not the set value information is appropriate. If the set value is appropriate, the lottery table is appropriately selected with reference to the data in the area storing each flag indicating the game state, etc., the winning / losing lottery, the symbol lottery, and the variable pattern lottery are executed, and the lottery result is obtained. After being stored in the storage area, the special symbol status is updated to "1: Special symbol changing". In addition, the content determined by the special symbol lottery is transmitted to the effect control board P41 as an effect control command (win / fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command), and the content of the variation effect executed according to the variation display of the special symbol. It is used as information for the determination process (lottery process) of. The details of the special symbol lottery will be described later.

《Processing during special symbol change》
The special symbol changing process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is “1: special symbol changing”.

In the special symbol change processing, the timer that manages the change display time of the special symbol is monitored until the change time of the special symbol determined by the change pattern lottery elapses, and every interrupt is performed until the remaining change time becomes "0". The special symbol display device (second special symbol display device P52 (when controlling special symbol 1)) is used to display the fluctuation display of the special symbol every 25 interrupts by the updated special symbol display switching timer (maximum value "24"). Performs the lighting display pattern switching process of the first special symbol display device P51)).

When the remaining variation display time of the special symbol becomes "0", it indicates that the variation display of the special symbol has been executed once for the external device (data counter, hall computer, etc.) connected to the pachinko gaming machine P. Information setting for outputting an external signal, stop display of a special symbol, processing for setting a fixed time for a fixed symbol, and stop display indicating a stop display symbol determined as a result of a win / fail lottery or a symbol lottery. The lighting pattern data for displaying the symbol on the special symbol display device P52 (P51) is set. Then, the special symbol status is set to one of "2: out-of-order symbol stop display", "3: big hit symbol stop display", and "4: small hit symbol stop display" according to the result of the winning / failing lottery.

《Processing while displaying special symbol off symbol stop》
The processing during display of the special symbol off symbol is a process of shifting when the special symbol status is "2: Out of design stop display".

In the special symbol off symbol stop display processing, it is confirmed whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixed time set in the special symbol changing processing is "0", and if it becomes "0", it is processed. The special symbol status of the special symbol is updated to "0: Waiting for special symbol change", and the number of remaining games in the game status (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time shortening function) related to the special symbol lottery is increased. It is updated and confirmed regarding the establishment of the end condition, and when the game state transition condition is satisfied, control (flag off, etc.) related to the transition of the game state is performed.

<< Processing during special symbol jackpot symbol stop display >>
The special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing is a process of shifting when the special symbol status is "3: jackpot symbol stop display".

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing, it is confirmed whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixed time set in the special symbol changing processing is "0", and if it becomes "0", it is processed. The special symbol status of the special symbol is updated to "0: Waiting for special symbol change", and the status of the special electric accessory is updated to "2: The big winning opening is closed". Further, in order to end the game state (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time shortening function) related to the special symbol lottery, a process of clearing the remaining number of times information storage area and the operation flag storage area is executed. Then, in order to execute the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol, the information of various storage areas used as data during the previous jackpot game is initialized from the jackpot symbol information, and the special electric accessory P755 is controlled during the jackpot game. Set the content data.

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing, a process of transmitting an effect control command for executing the effect of the jackpot game (big hit start demo effect) to the effect control board P41 is further executed. Further, in accordance with these processes, a right-handed indicator light P56 (a right-handed game in which a game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the game area), which is one of the components of the main control display device P50, is recommended. Lighting pattern data for lighting the LED) that is sometimes lit is also set.

<< Processing during special symbol small hit symbol stop display >>
The special symbol small hit symbol stop display processing is a process of shifting when the special symbol status is “4: Small hit symbol stop display being displayed”.

Similar to the special symbol big hit symbol stop display processing, the special symbol small hit symbol stop display processing is to set the data related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 and turn on the right-handed indicator light P56 at the end of the symbol fixing time. Perform the relevant setting process. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this prerequisite technology, when the small hit game is executed (small hit symbol stop display), unlike when the big hit symbol is stopped, the gaming state (high probability state or high probability state) related to the special symbol lottery There is no process to end the high base state), and the game state is determined based on the judgment result of whether or not the end condition is satisfied for each game state, as in the process of the process of processing the special symbol off symbol stop display. Control. In addition, the status of the special electric accessory will be updated to "5: Small hit closed" in accordance with these processes. Depending on the game machine specifications, as a modification, the specifications are designed to have a process of forcibly ending the game state (high probability state or high base state) when the small hit game is executed, as in the case of stopping the big hit symbol. It is also possible.

When any of the above sub-module processes is selectively executed, the process of the first special symbol is performed following the process of the second special symbol. Regarding the processing of the first special symbol, only the information to be referred to is different from the processing of the second special symbol (for example, regarding whether or not the fluctuation can be started, the special symbol status of the second special symbol is not the status of the special symbol of the first special symbol. The explanation is omitted because almost the same process is repeated only by (judging by referring to).

《Ordered entry control, parallel control》
Further, in the above-mentioned explanation of the special symbol control process, the description is based on the process related to the "second special symbol priority digestion control", but there are cases where a gaming machine specification different from that of the pachinko gaming machine, which is the premise of the present invention, is adopted. It is also possible to proceed with the special symbol control process by different processes. The typical ones will be briefly described below.

The "ball entry order digestion control" is a gaming machine specification in which the hold information corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is processed one by one in the order in which they are generated. While the fluctuation of one symbol is not performed, the fluctuation display of the other is not performed, and in a certain game state, both the reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol are generated. It is a specification that is often adopted when it is expected.

"Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is different from the above-mentioned "second special symbol priority digestion control" and "sequential digestion with ball entry", and at the same time, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. It is a type of gaming machine that can be used. Since two symbols can be digested at the same time, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol lottery per unit time. In addition, when the special electric accessory P755 operates with the stop display of the special symbol of 1 (when the big hit and the small hit are executed), the other symbol is forcibly removed and the symbol is stopped or the variable display is displayed. Specifications that suspend the subtraction of the remaining time are appropriately adopted. As an example, when one special symbol becomes a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss, and when one special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the other It is possible to adopt a specification that temporarily suspends the variable display of special symbols.

(Special electric accessory control process)
In the special electric accessory control process, the sub-module process related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 is executed according to the data content (value) of the special electric accessory status (sometimes referred to as the special electric game status), and the special electric accessory control process is performed. It is a process of managing the operation of an object (step 2028). In other words, when the big hit game or the small hit game is executed, each state in the big hit game and the small hit game state is controlled, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening P751 is controlled.

As mentioned above, the status of the special electric accessory includes "0: waiting for a hit", "1: the special electric accessory is operating", "2: the big winning opening is closed", and "3: the big hit end demonstration". , "4: Small hit special electric operation is in operation", "5: Small hit is closed", and "6: Small hit end demonstration is in progress".

Of these special electric accessory statuses, when the status is "0: waiting for hit", it means that the player's game has not yet acquired the right to execute the big hit game or the small hit game. , The special electric accessory control process ends without any process.

Then, when the status of the special electric accessory is other than "0: waiting for hit", one of the respective processes described later is executed according to the status.

《Processing during operation of special electric accessory》
The processing during operation of the special electric accessory is a process executed when the status of the special electric accessory is "1: the special electric accessory is operating" or "4: the small hit special electric is operating". This process is a process in which a so-called round game (unit game) is executed in the special game (a state in which the large winning opening P751 can be controlled to be opened).

In the process during operation of the special electric accessory, first, a process of determining whether or not the end condition of the round game (unit game) is satisfied is performed. The conditions for ending the round game are (a) a specified number of winnings (also called "count") according to the activated special electric accessory, or (b) the operation pattern of the special electric accessory to be executed. It is determined that the opening time (opening pattern) set as is completed when either of them is satisfied. If these conditions are not satisfied, the special electric accessory control process in the current interrupt process is terminated without performing the subsequent process. The operation pattern (opening pattern) of the special electric accessory P755 includes a pattern for opening and closing the large winning opening P751 multiple times, and when these patterns are executed, one round. While the timer used to determine (a) during the game is set to "0" multiple times, after confirming whether or not there is the next operation data during one round game, the condition (c) " When it is determined that there is no next operation pattern data in this unit game, it is determined that the above (a) is satisfied.

On the other hand, when either (a) or (b) of the above conditions for ending the round game is satisfied, the closing time of the large winning opening is stored in the closing time management timer of the special electric accessory as a subsequent process. , Increment the status of the special electric accessory to "2: The big prize opening is closed". Then, command data for notifying the end of the round game is set as an effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the process ends.

《Processing while closing the big prize opening》
The processing during closing of the large winning opening is a processing executed when the status of the special electric accessory is "2: closing of the large winning opening" or "5: closing of the small hit". This process is a process in which the special game is controlled in the "between rounds" between the so-called round games and the round games, and before the start of the first round at the start of the big hit game or the small hit game. When the state is controlled by the "big hit start demo (period)" and "small hit start demo (period)", or after the round game of the final round is completed, the process during the hit end demo described later is executed. This is the process related to the state in which the control is performed during the waiting period until the result is reached.

In the processing during closing of the large winning opening, first, it is determined whether or not the closing time of the large winning opening set in the processing during operation of the special electric accessory has elapsed, and the closing time management timer is not "0", that is, the closing time. If has not passed, the special electric accessory control process in the interrupt this time is terminated.

When the closing time of the big winning opening has passed, was the operation (round game) of the special electric accessory P755 that was completed first was the final round game in this hit game (big hit game, small hit game)? Judging whether or not, different processes are executed at the end of the final round game and at the end of the round game other than the final round (or at the time of the winning start demo). To determine whether or not it was the final round game, the cumulative number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 that was activated during this hit game is the maximum number of operations data of the special electric accessory P755 that was activated during this hit game. It is judged based on whether or not it exceeds, and the cumulative data of the number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is "0" at the time of the hit start demonstration.

In the process of closing the big winning opening, if it is judged that the final round game is over, the execution pattern of the winning end demo according to the type of hit (the type of special symbol that started the big hit or small hit). Read and set (mainly the hit end demo time data). Then, the special electric accessory status is incremented to "3: Big hit end demo in progress" or "6: Small hit end demo in progress", and an effect command for executing the end demo effect is set on the effect control board P41. Demonstration. Further, in order to set the valid extension period of the large winning opening P751, the time value data determined as the valid extension period is stored in the timer that manages the valid extension period of the large winning opening P751 and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined at the end of the game other than the final round game (or at the time of the winning start demonstration) in the processing during the closing of the large winning opening, the next round game is in what round as the effect control command for the effect control board P41. Information that makes it possible to identify the presence (N round start demo command * N is an integer) and the recommended firing position during the hit game (in the assumed pachinko machine, the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game board) Send information (right-handed command) to instruct.

Then, the status of the special electric accessory is decremented and updated to "1: Special electric accessory is operating" or "4: Small hit special electric is operating", and the number of winning balls to the large winning opening P751 during the round game Initialize the data in the data area for counting. Then, the time value related to the first opening (or closing immediately after the start of the round game) of the large winning opening P751 during the round game is set, and the operation pattern data of the large winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) in the round game is set. Then, the data in the storage area regarding the cumulative number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is incremented.

(Prize ball control processing)
The prize ball control process is a process for giving a game ball as a prize ball to the player in response to a prize of the game ball for the winning opening arranged on the game board P5. The processing content is configured to execute the following three submodule processing. (Step 2030)

《Payout data reception monitoring process》
The payout data reception monitoring process is a process of confirming the presence / absence of a control command related to the execution of the prize ball payout transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40, and receiving (memorizing) the transmitted command. .. The main control board P0 stores the information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). The register 1 is called a status register and stores information for determining whether or not there is information transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether or not the transmitted information is normally transmitted. Has been done. The other register is called a data register, and stores information on control contents related to payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43. If the status register is not abnormal, the data in the data register is stored as payout control information. Store in the area.

<< Disbursement command request processing >>
In the payout command request process, the winning counter data for each winning opening that stores the winning number data of various winning openings stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018) is confirmed, and the presence or absence of unpaid winnings is confirmed. The confirmation process is confirmed in a predetermined order for each winning opening, and when it is determined that the data of the winning counter is not "0" for one winning opening, the number of winning balls of the corresponding winning opening is determined. , Performs a process of transmitting a control command for executing the payout of the game ball to the payout control board P43. By this process, even if the winning counter data for the plurality of winning openings is not "0", the payout control command transmitted to the payout control board P43 with one interrupt is limited to one.

<< Payout command control processing >>
In the payout command control process, it is checked whether or not the payout control board P43 has normally received information on the number of payouts, and it is determined whether the command is normally received in this process or a communication error occurs due to some abnormality. It will be. Until the command reception status is confirmed in the payout command control process (whether the reception is completed normally or an error is determined), the next payout control command transmission in the payout command request process is the payout command request process. And is suspended by the flag data that is set to be on / off in the issue command control process.

(Abnormality detection processing)
The abnormality detection process is a process for confirming the presence or absence of an abnormality from the information of the sensor provided for fraud detection in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. (Step 2032)

More specifically, regarding the input of sensors such as the vibration sensor P72, the magnetic sensor P73, the radio wave detection sensor P74, and the frame opening sensor P131, an abnormality occurs based on the input information generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). This is the process of determining whether or not the situation is occurring. In addition to various sensors, harnesses for electrical connection have been removed, and short circuits on wiring are also included as detection targets.

Then, when abnormal data exists for any of the judgment information, a command for notifying the error information is set as an effect control command for the effect control board P41 after storing the error data by turning on the corresponding error flag. do.

(Sensor detection judgment processing)
In the sensor detection determination process, the period during which the sensor or switch is continuously detected is determined from the sensor or switch detection data (level data) generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), and the process is performed. This is the process of establishing the flag. (Step 2034)

In the sensor detection judgment process, when the level data of the detection data information of the target sensor or switch is on, the data for counting the continuous on input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, and various processes are executed. It is determined whether or not the start condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, the process corresponding to the switch to be monitored is executed. When the switch to be monitored is no longer on-data, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, when the winning opening detection switch provided in the winning opening continuously detects that the switch is in the ON state, it is determined that a ball clogging has occurred, and the error state is controlled to produce an effect. As a control command, a process of setting command information for causing an error notification to the effect control board P41, and a generation and output request of signal data for notifying an external device (hall computer or the like) of an error are performed.

The switches to be detected in this process include a touch sensor switch provided on the handle P204 and a switch for fraud detection, in order to determine whether the switch is due to human operation or electrical noise. It also targets sensors that require on-data input for a certain period of time.

(Game status display processing)
The game status display process is a process of generating lighting data for displaying information on the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although the name is display processing, the output of the display content to the main control display device P50 is performed not by this processing but by the LED output processing described later. (Step 2036)

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as an example, an error indicator light (status indicator light P55) indicating an error state, and a special symbol hold indicator light (special figure 1 hold indicator light) indicating the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery. P61, special figure 2 hold indicator light P62), normal symbol hold indicator light P63 that displays the number of holds related to the normal symbol lottery, etc. Lighting data (lighting pattern) is generated and used as data output by LED output processing. Store.

In the game status display process, when a blinking display is required for the LED indicator lamp whose lighting is controlled, the display switching counter for the corresponding LED is updated and the lighting pattern switching process is performed by comparing the counter value and the threshold value. Will be done. For example, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the number of holdings of the special symbol lottery can be held up to four, but the special symbol holding indicator light is configured by two LED indicators (special figure 1 holding indicator light P61). , Special figure 2 Hold indicator light P62 is equipped with two LEDs each), so if there are three or more holds, at least one LED will display a blinking display instead of a continuous lighting display. It is a specification to do.

(Output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process of setting to transmit a signal related to the game operation to the electric accessory which is an operation device on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, the payout control board P43, and the like. (Step 2038)

More specifically, when the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory or the special electric accessory is set during the normal symbol control process or the special electric accessory control process, the process during the output port output process causes the ordinary electric accessory. Signal data for opening (or closing) each electric accessory is output to the accessory driving means P71 and the special electric accessory driving means P72 (solenoid in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine).

Further, a control signal (launch permission signal) for permitting or prohibiting the launch of the game ball based on the handle operation of the player is generated and output to the payout control board P43 by the output port output process. The output content of the launch permission signal is set according to the communication status with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence status of an error requiring the game to be stopped.

(Direction control command transmission processing)
The effect control command transmission process is a process of outputting an effect control command to the effect control board P41, and in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the effect control command is sent to the effect control board P41 only in the effect control command transmission process. It is a specification to be transmitted (step 2040). Regarding the setting of the effect control command to be transmitted, it is set (set) in a predetermined storage area as an untransmitted effect control command during other processing.

The pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, uses a storage area called a ring buffer that circularly refers to a storage destination as an area for storing untransmitted effect control commands. In the storage area called the ring buffer, in the next processing called "write pointer" and "read pointer", which are updated by each process of writing (set) the effect control command and reading (transmitting) the effect control command. The specifications are such that the writing and reading of the effect control command are executed using the information for calculating the address of the storage area for writing the command and the address of the storage area for reading the command.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the structure of the effect control command is composed of two data, MODE data indicating the type of the command and EVENT data indicating the content of the command.

Returning to the explanation of the specific processing contents of the effect control command transmission processing, the explanation will be given. In the effect control command transmission process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the above-mentioned write pointer and read pointer information match, and if they match, it is determined that there is no effect control command to be transmitted, and the process ends. On the other hand, if the data of the write pointer and the read pointer do not match, it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, and the process proceeds to the next process.

When it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address of the storage area of the main control board P40 calculated from the data of the read pointer, and each is temporarily stored in the register in the CPU of the main control board P40. After storing and clearing the effect control command in the read destination ring buffer, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value used in the next processing.

As the effect control command, the MODE data and the EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 are sequentially transmitted to the effect control board P41. First, the MODE data is set in the effect command output port, which is an output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the strobe signal for causing the effect control board P41 to perform the reading operation is output. The main control board P40 subsequently outputs EVENT data, but after performing a process with a waiting time of 26 μs in order to secure a sufficient period for the effect control board P41 to receive the MODE data, the MODE data. As in the case of transmission, the EVENT data is set to the output port and the strobe signal is output. When the effect control board P41 confirms the strobe signal, it generates an effect control command reception interrupt and receives the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40.

(External information output processing)
In the external information output processing, information on the game status and security-related information such as the occurrence of an error are output as signals from the external information output terminal 77 to the external device (data counter or hall computer) connected to the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. This is the process to be performed (step 2042). The signal output from the external information output terminal 77 is output based on the data set in the output port of the main control board P40, and when a signal output trigger occurs, a pulse signal that is on potential for a certain period is transmitted. Some of them continue to output the on-potential until the condition that the signal output ends is satisfied.

In the external information output process, first, a signal related to the game state is generated. In order to make it possible to identify the type of specific gaming state as a signal related to the gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, has the operating state of the probability fluctuation function (probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (base state). With reference to the corresponding information and the information indicating that the special game is in progress (big hit or small hit), if the game is controlled to each game state, the external output data is transmitted so that the corresponding data is transmitted. Update. In addition to the ones exemplified here, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, an output signal is generated based on the information indicating the presence or absence of the fluctuation time shortening function and the information indicating that the case is a specific type of jackpot. There may be cases.

Further, as the output signal output by the external information output processing, not only the signal related to the game state but also the information based on the occurrence of the predetermined game result is output. For example, a signal (also referred to as a "fixed symbol signal") transmitted each time a special symbol variation display is executed and a stop display is displayed, or a start port switch (special figure 1 start port switch P712, special figure 2 start port switch). Every time a game ball is detected in various winning openings such as 722) and the large winning opening switch P752, or the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning balls in various winning openings reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). Every time, data is set in the external output data, and there is a signal transmitted to an external device. These signals are mainly composed of pulse signals, and one signal is transmitted as a pulse signal in which an on-potential of 128 ms continues. However, when a plurality of game results are continuously generated, one signal is transmitted. After the output of the pulse signal is completed, the off-potential output for a certain period is inserted, and then the pulse signal is output again.

Further, in the external signal output processing, the data in the storage area in which the error flag as a result of the confirmation in the above-mentioned abnormality detection processing (step 2032) is stored and the comparison data for confirming whether or not an error requiring security notification has occurred. When it is determined that it is necessary to output a security signal by calculating and comparing with, the output data set in the output port is updated so that the bit corresponding to the security signal of the external output data is turned on.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to a plurality of LEDs constituting the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light, and displaying the progress status and the game state of the game. (Step 2044)

The LEDs constituting the main control display device P50 are the first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), the second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), the first special symbol hold indicator light P61 (2 LEDs), and the second. Special symbol hold indicator P62 (2 LEDs), normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), normal symbol hold indicator P63 (2 LEDs), round indicator P54, status indicator P55, right-handed indicator (total) It has a total of 32 LED display units (8 LEDs).

The status indicator P55 collectively represents a plurality of indicator lights related to the game state, and in detail, a special figure probability change indicator light indicating whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated, and an operation of the normal symbol probability change function. It refers to indicator lights such as a normal figure probability change indicator light that indicates the presence / absence (whether or not the electric chew support function is activated) and an error indicator light that indicates an error status.

In the LED output processing, the lighting data of the display unit in the main control display device is set in the output port by one byte for each interrupt processing, and the main control display device P50 is lit, and is updated every interrupt processing. Based on the value of the digit counter, select the LED of the main control display device P50 to be lit by this interrupt, select the lighting pattern data according to the game situation, set it as display data, and control the lighting of each LED. It has become like.

That is, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the main control display device P50 is set to the main control display device P50 by a dynamic lighting method that outputs lighting data in order using at least four interrupt processes for 32 LEDs. I'm in control.

Further, in the LED output processing, in addition to the LED display that the player should visually recognize as the main control display device P50, the lighting control is performed only when the game stop flag is in the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, or the unrecoverable error state. It also controls the lighting of the LED display.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, when a flag indicating some game stop state is stored in the game stop flag, the setting of the lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted. During the setting change, setting confirmation, and unrecoverable error, all the LEDs constituting the main control display device are off. As a modification, when the game stop flag is set, the light emission display may be performed using a fixed lighting pattern set for each state. For example, the main control display device P50 may be displayed during the period when the setting is being changed. It may be configured so that all the LEDs constituting the above are turned on.

(Outside control processing)
The out-of-area control process is related to the test signal output process (process for outputting the signal used for the test of the pachinko gaming machine) for outputting the signal used for the test of the pachinko gaming machine and the display of the performance display device. It is composed of a process for controlling (step 2046). The meaning of "outside the area" indicates that the process is executed by the program of the storage area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program storage area specified in the rules of the pachinko gaming machine.

In the test signal output process, processing is performed in which information related to the game result and the game state for output from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko gaming machine P to an external test device is set in the output port. In the performance display processing, the game state is confirmed, the number of out balls, the ratio (base) of the number of out balls to the number of prize balls is calculated, updated as display data, and displayed on the performance display device P59. This is the process of outputting.

[Special design lottery]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14. The "special symbol lottery" is mainly composed of a "win / fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "variable pattern lottery".

(Win / Fail lottery)
The "win / fail lottery" is a lottery for determining whether or not the result of operating the special electric accessory P755 is based on the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed. More simply, as the result of the special symbol lottery. , "Big hit", "Small hit", or "Loss". Depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine P, there are some that do not have a "small hit" as a lottery result of the winning / losing lottery. In addition, when it is configured to have the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it has a "small hit" as a lottery result of the winning / failing lottery for one special symbol, and "small" as the lottery result of the other winning / failing lottery. It may be configured so as not to have a "hit".

The win / fail lottery uses a random number called a "win / fail random number" among the random numbers acquired and stored when the game ball enters the start opening (first start winning opening P711, second start winning opening P721, etc.). And draw lots. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the range of random numbers (random number range) that the winning / failing random number can take is 65536 from "0" to "65535", and is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When a winning / failing lottery is performed, the result of the winning / failing lottery is determined by comparing the value of this random number with the lottery table used for the winning / failing lottery according to the game state and the set value (referred to as the "winning / failing lottery table"). Perform processing.

FIG. 10 illustrates some lottery tables used for winning / failing lottery. FIG. 10A shows a winning / failing lottery table with a set value of “1” and a low probability state, and FIG. 10B shows a winning / failing lottery table with a set value of “1” and a high probability state. (C) and (D) of FIG. 10 show the winning / failing lottery tables in the low probability state and the high probability state when the set value is “6”, respectively.

For example, in the situation where the winning / failing lottery is executed using the winning / failing lottery table of FIG. Assuming that the numerical value is "1500", the flow of the winning / failing lottery will be described.

First, it is determined whether or not the result of the first winning / failing lottery belongs to the jackpot random number range (“0” to “327”). Specifically, the process of subtracting the random number range "328" of the jackpot to be determined is performed from the random number value "1500" of the hit / fail random number this time. At this time, since the subtraction result is "1172" and does not become a negative value, it is determined that the hit / fail random number this time does not belong to the random number value range of the jackpot.

As a subsequent process, the random number value "1172" after the calculation of the previous jackpot determination is compared with the outlier random number value range ("328" to "65370") as the determination area of the subsequent winning / failing lottery result of the winning / failing lottery table. .. More specifically, the random number value range "65043" that is out of the judgment target is subtracted from the primary data "1172" of the winning / failing random number. At this time, since the calculation result is a negative value, the information corresponding to the result of "missing" is stored as the winning / losing lottery result.

If a special symbol lottery is performed for the winning / failing random number "1500" this time in a high probability state, the lottery will be performed at the winning / failing lottery table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it belongs to the range ("0" to "1639"). At this time, since the result of the comparison operation (subtraction) between the winning / failing random number and the random number value range is a negative value, the winning / failing lottery result is determined to be a “big hit”.

The pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, adopts a method of determining the lottery result by sequentially comparing the data acquired as the random number value with the random number value range according to the lottery result of the lottery table. The same lottery method is adopted for the winning symbol lottery and the variable pattern lottery, which will be described later. The lottery method is not limited to the above example, and a method of directly determining whether or not the value matches the big hit random number value with the acquired random number value may be adopted, and the lottery method differs depending on the lottery content. May be adopted.

(Winning design lottery)
In the "winning symbol lottery", the control content related to the subsequent operation of the special electric accessory P755 and the lottery table of the variable pattern lottery described later (see FIGS. 12 to 14) are obtained in response to the winning / failing lottery result of the special symbol lottery described above. ) Is a process of determining the stop display symbol of the special symbol as a lottery result required for switching.

FIG. 11 shows a big hit symbol lottery table (see FIG. 11 (A)) used in the winning symbol lottery when the winning / failing lottery result is “big hit”, and when the winning / failing lottery result is “small hit”. , The small hit symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery (see FIG. 11 (B)), and the losing symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery when the winning / failing lottery result is "missing" (Fig. 11 (Fig. 11 (B)). C)) is shown.

The "symbol random number" used in the winning symbol lottery has a random number range of "1000" ("0" to "999"), and when expressed in 2-byte data, the upper 1 byte is "". The data is represented by "0" to "3" and the lower 1 byte is represented by "0" to "255".

Explaining the winning symbol lottery with a specific example, for example, when the winning / failing lottery result is a big hit, the first special when the symbol random number is "400" (upper byte is "1", lower byte is "144"). In the case of a winning symbol lottery for a symbol, the lottery table of the upper 1 byte "1" shown in FIG. 11 (A) is used, and the "5R (5 rounds) probability variation 2" corresponding to the lower bytes "128" to "191" is used. Is obtained as a lottery result, and in the variable display of the special symbol, the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is the first special symbol display device P51 (in the case of the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol display device). The stop display is displayed on P52).

Then, when the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device P51, the jackpot game corresponding to the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is executed. At this time, there are cases where "5R probability variation 2" is displayed as a stop display symbol on the first special symbol display device and cases where "5R probability variation 1" is displayed as a stop display symbol. The contents of the round game (opening pattern, opening time, etc. of the big winning opening P751) may be different based on the stop display symbol, and the control contents in the specific game state transitioned after the big hit game may be controlled to be different. It is possible. The allocation of control in these jackpot games and specific game states is appropriately determined in order to realize gameability according to the specifications (specs) of each pachinko gaming machine P, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, it is described that the symbols summarized for each type of jackpot are displayed by the lottery shown in FIG. 11 (A). For example, in the previous example, the lottery result " After determining the type of jackpot called "5R probability variation 2", the type of jackpot is determined so that the stop display symbol that will execute the jackpot of the corresponding type is determined by performing another lottery from multiple patterns. , The stop display symbol may be determined and the winning symbol lottery may be executed in two stages.

Further, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in FIG. 11 (A), in the case of determining the big hit symbol by the winning symbol lottery in the special symbol lottery for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , The types of hit symbols that can be determined are configured to be different. More specifically, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, there is an increasing possibility that "10R probability variation 5" or "10R probability variation 8" will be determined in the jackpot of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol It can be said that it is easier to win a big hit with a large number of rounds than a winning symbol lottery, and it is easy to win a big hit that shifts to a high probability / high base state as a specific game state.

FIG. 11B exemplifies a small hit symbol lottery table. The small hit symbol lottery table is a table that is referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol lottery is "small hit". Is similar to.

In the small hit symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 11 (B), most of them win the "small hit 1" symbol, and when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol is "small hit". "Small hit 2" can be determined in a part of. The small hit symbol may be of one type, or may be configured so that three or more types of symbols can be determined.

As an example of the purpose of providing a plurality of small hit symbols like the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the number of game balls that can be obtained by simply changing the opening mode of the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game. In order to distinguish between a small hit game in which it is easy to win a V in a specific area and a small hit game in which it is difficult to win a V in a pachinko gaming machine P that uses a small hit V as a game machine specification (spec). The purpose of the game is to differentiate the small hit symbols or to make the small hit symbols different in order to distinguish the types of specific games to be transferred after the big hit game after the V prize is executed.

FIG. 11C illustrates an out-of-design lottery table. The missed symbol lottery table is a table that is referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol lottery is "missing", and the lottery method is the jackpot symbol lottery described above for the first special symbol. It is the same as at the table, and the method is different for the second special symbol.

More specifically, FIG. 11C shows only the missing symbol lottery table for the first special symbol, and in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, it is the first special symbol as the missing symbol lottery table. Only in this case, the lottery process is performed, and either "Wrong 1" or "Wrong Answer 2" is determined as the stop display symbol.

The "Wrong Answer 2" symbol is a missed symbol that is won with a probability of about 6.4% when the first special symbol is missed, and if "Wrong Answer 2" is won, it is likely to reach in the variable pattern lottery. It is configured to facilitate the determination of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) with reference to a special lottery table (not shown). Therefore, the "wrong answer 2" may be referred to as a "reach missed symbol" or the like.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, does not have a lottery table for the second special symbol, and the symbol random number of 1 is determined regardless of the random number of the symbol. The table comparison process itself is omitted, and the missing symbol of 1 is stored. It should be noted that the lottery table that always wins one symbol may be used to win the out-of-order symbol.

(Variable pattern lottery)
The "variable pattern lottery" is a process of determining the variable display time until the stop display symbol, which is the lottery result of the special symbol, is stopped and displayed by the lottery. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol is used as the production time required to notify the effect of whether or not the effect display device P80 is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, what kind of big hit is. The fluctuation display time of is determined by using the fluctuation pattern table described later.

In FIG. 12, a gaming ball is launched into the left region P501L of the gaming board mainly in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base medium) and low base state (non-electric chew support state), that is, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. Represents the "low-base medium-variable pattern lottery table" in the recommended state.

The "ID" shown in FIG. 12 represents the information stored as a result of performing the variation pattern lottery, and the "variation pattern" is displayed on the effect display device P80 when the ID is won. A typical example of the mode of effect of fluctuation is shown. The "variable time" is a variable display time value of the special symbol in the result of the target variable pattern lottery (variable pattern ID), and represents the time from the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display.

“Temporary 1 fluctuation” to “Take 4 fluctuation” in FIG. 12 indicate the number of holdings in the situation where the execution condition of the special symbol lottery is satisfied, and the result of the winning / failing lottery is “missing”, and the target special symbol (here). Then, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is N, the fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of the “holding N fluctuation”. That is, the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol in the low base state is configured so that the variation pattern table used differs depending on the number of reservations. If a game ball enters the starting winning opening in a state where there is no hold, it is temporarily stored as a hold for processing, so a fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of "Holding 1 fluctuation". NS.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the variable pattern lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the number of holdings, and is configured to use a common lottery table regardless of the number of holdings. Although not shown, when "Wrong Answer 2 (Reach Out of Design)" is determined as a result of the symbol lottery, even in the fluctuation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of 1 does not depend on the number of holdings. It is configured to perform a variable pattern lottery using a pattern table (variable pattern table for Wrong Answer 2).

“10R probability variation”, “5R probability variation”, “10R normal”, and “5R normal” in FIG. 12 indicate a variation pattern table used for a variation pattern lottery at the time of a big hit in a low base state, and the result of the winning / failing lottery. Is a "big hit", indicating that the lottery is performed by appropriately selecting a variable pattern table according to which symbol the symbol lottery result is. In FIG. 12, since the second special symbol is not the main player of the game in the low base state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table is expressed so as to be determined in a form that does not depend on the jackpot symbol, but the jackpot of the second special symbol is also expressed. , There may be a plurality of patterns depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, a specific example of the fluctuation pattern lottery in the low base state will be described with reference to FIG. As a specific example, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern random number is "30000" and the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation is three (the number of reserved balls is two after the start of fluctuation). The situation in which the result of the winning / failing lottery and the winning symbol lottery are "missing 1" will be described.

First, since the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is "3", the fluctuation pattern table of "holding 3 fluctuation" is used. Similar to the lottery process in the winning / failing lottery described above, the lottery process compares (subtracts) the variable pattern random number and the random number value range corresponding to the variable pattern ID of each lottery result, and determines whether or not the random number belongs to the same range. do. By performing this process, the result of repeating the comparison operation between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random number value range at the timing of the normal fluctuation B of ID "2" becomes a negative value, and the same ID is determined as the fluctuation pattern lottery, which is special. After the fluctuation display of 7 seconds is performed as the fluctuation display of the symbol, the misaligned symbol 1 is displayed on the first special symbol display device P51.

Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state is symmetrical to that of the fluctuation pattern table in the low base state shown in FIG. It is configured to have a table and a table for each jackpot symbol at the time of jackpot. In addition, although it is configured in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 that many fluctuation patterns can be determined in common, this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, and is determined in the low base state and the high base state. It is possible to configure the variation patterns to have very few overlaps or no overlaps at all.

In addition, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state, the shortest fluctuation time of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is obtained as the lottery result of the "hold 3 fluctuation" and "hold 4 fluctuation" of the second special symbol at the time of loss. A 2-second variation (variation pattern ID "12") can be determined.

Further, as a feature point of the fluctuation pattern in the high base state, the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so that the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern ID "4" for 10 seconds is always determined. The reason why the first special symbol is composed of the fluctuation of 10 seconds is that the player profit is large when the jackpot is hit in the jackpot symbol lottery table shown in FIG. This is due to the fact that there are many jackpot symbols that shift to the probability fluctuation state as a specific game state), and by prioritizing and implementing a large number of variation displays corresponding to the second special symbol, a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. The purpose is to make it possible to acquire. Further, even when there is almost no difference in the degree of advantage of the jackpot game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is based on the adoption of the second special symbol priority digestion control. Avoiding variable display, it is easy to hold the hold established in the normal game state (low base state) until the end of the specific game state (high base state), which is an advantageous state, and the second in the high base state. It is also an object of avoiding the need for a large number of game balls to cause the hold of the first special symbol in a low base state with respect to the amount of game balls used to generate the hold of the special symbol.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a special table in a limited period, and represents a special variation pattern table referred to in a specific period. FIG. 14 comprehensively describes a special fluctuation pattern table for three periods as an example of a special fluctuation pattern table provided in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P.

More specifically, in FIG. 14, the period from the first fluctuation to the fourth fluctuation after the big hit (the so-called "holding ream" (reserved inner ream) in which four holdings existing at the time of the big hit become a big hit is called. It is easy to select the reach fluctuation of 55 seconds, which is referred to in the "holding villa table" (for IDs "51" and "71") referred to in the period) and the nth to mth fluctuations after the big hit. It is referred to by the high frequency reach table (for IDs "52", "53", "54", and "72") and the final variation display in the high base state, and the "result effect" described later is mainly executed. It is shown that the "result fluctuation table" (for IDs "55" and "73") to be used is provided in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P.

Such a special fluctuation pattern table referred to in a limited period is referred to as a "special fluctuation pattern table" or a "limited frequency (pattern table)".

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the reference period of the limited frequency pattern table can be referred to in a predetermined period after the big hit game (operation of the special electric accessory, in other words, operation of the accessory continuous operation device). doing. Regarding these reference periods, it is possible to make the presence or absence of reference different depending on the type of jackpot (big hit symbol), and in a specific period after the operation of the special electric accessory based on the small hit game, the reference period can be set. It can also be configured to be different. What kind of special fluctuation pattern table is referred to in what situation can be appropriately set for each pachinko gaming machine, and is not limited to the illustrated ones, and the details should be explained separately if necessary. And.

Next, the control of the effect control board P41 that controls the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, will be described. The operation control of the effect control board P41 has few restrictions on the type test of the gaming machine, and has a higher degree of freedom in design than the control of the main control board P40. Therefore, it will be described below. It is not limited to processing only, and the timing at which processing is performed can be changed as appropriate.

[Power-on processing of production control board-main loop processing]
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the power-on process (step 4000) is executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41. Here, the details of the power-on processing of the effect control board P41 will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process (step 4000) is started on the effect control board P41 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, the initial setting process related to the operation of the CPU, which is an arithmetic unit provided on the effect control board P41, is performed. (Step 4002). The initial setting process appropriately sets the settings necessary for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details are omitted. However, regarding the effect that was executed in the state where the power was cut off last time, the main control board P40 Since there is a time lag between the completion of the power-on process (FIG. 7) and the power-on process of the effect control board (FIG. 15), if the effect is restored to the effect before the power failure after the power is restored, the operation of the main control board P40 will occur. Since there is a risk of deviation, in the initial processing when the effect control board P41 is restored from power failure, the effect information and the like are often initialized so that the effect that was executed before the power failure is not executed (“effect”. Control board reset ", called" sub reset ").

(Main loop of production control board)
In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the process shifts to the main loop process after the initial setting process. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the time of the cycle (frame) for drawing the effect image on the image control board P42 connected to the effect display device P80 (image display device) is such that the effect image is drawn 30 times per second. Since the cycle is set to about 33 ms (30 FPS), the main loop processing loop is configured to be performed once in a cycle of 16 ms, which is about half of the cycle (steps 4002 to 4016).

In the main loop process of the effect control board P41, first, the watchdog timer for detecting the runaway of the CPU is cleared (step 4004).

Subsequently, a process of updating the effect control random number data (step 4006) is performed, and various effect control random numbers used when an opportunity to execute the effect lottery occurs are updated.

Next, the input port monitoring process is executed (step 4008). The premise of the pachinko game machine P is such that the input port is monitored even during the interrupt processing of the effect control board P41, which will be described later. However, the input port monitoring processing in the main loop processing is a 16 ms cycle monitoring. Therefore, the monitoring of the input of the switch or the like, which is a monitoring target necessary for the system, is limited, and the monitoring of the input of the sensors or the like necessary for the production control of the effect movable accessory P560 is omitted. As a modification, the sensors to be monitored in the production may be confirmed by the input port monitoring process in the main loop process.

Similar to the input port confirmation process on the main control board, the content to be executed in the input port monitoring process is the process of generating and storing level data from the input data of various sensors and storing the rising (falling) data. Will be done.

Subsequently, the effect control board P41 performs the effect device control process (step 4010) to execute control related to the effect operation other than the effect display device P80 (image display). Examples of the effect device controlled in this process include a lamp P82 (“board lamp (P550)” and “frame lamp (P350)”), a speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), and an effect movable accessory P560. For these effect devices, an effect operation command corresponding to the effect content determined to be executed by a process such as an effect control process (step 4012) described later is transmitted to each effect device to execute the effect operation.

This is because the output of the effect operation command to the various effect devices in the effect device control process (step 4010) needs to be executed (started) in synchronization with the effect image displayed on the effect display device P80 (image display device). , The image control board P42 controlling the effect display device P80 has received a signal transmitted to the effect control board P41 at regular intervals and a signal for forcibly synchronizing (the above-mentioned input port monitoring process). (Reception in) as an opportunity to synchronize with the effect switching timing of the effect display device P80, and output an effect operation command to various effect devices.

Regarding the operation control of the effect movable accessory P560 in the effect device, the effect set in this process is set because the drive means of the effect movable accessory P560 needs to be controlled in a shorter cycle. Regarding the operation pattern of the effect movable accessory P560 to be executed by the operation command, the sensor monitoring and operation switching are executed even during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) of the effect control board P41 described later.

Next, the effect control process (step 4012) executed in the main loop process of the effect control board P41 will be described. The effect control process includes a flag established based on the result of analyzing the effect control command received from the main control board P40 in the effect control command analysis process described later, and information on the received effect control command itself (lottery result ID of special symbol lottery, etc.). ), Input port monitoring process (step 4008), interrupt process (FIG. 16), and other processes. Is.

The effect control process selects the effect decision process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes the submodule process for the corresponding effect decision. As an example of the effect content determined here, the process of determining the variation effect corresponding to one change of the special symbol based on the commands (win / fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command) related to the execution result of the special symbol lottery. (Processing to determine the content of the notice and reach, the decorative pattern to be stopped, etc.) and the look-ahead effect for the newly generated hold based on the hold number information and pre-judgment information sent when the hold occurs (" The pre-reading lottery process that determines whether or not to execute the "pre-judgment effect") and the content of the effect during the special game are determined based on the information sent as the effect control command when the special game (big hit or small hit) is executed. There is a special game production content determination process to be performed.

Further, the effect control process is not only a process for the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, but also a process for determining the error display content when an error is detected on the effect control board P41 (an error transmitted from the main control board). The volume is adjusted by the player based on the input operations such as the effect button P381 and the cross key P383, which are the effect operation means P81, and the lamp P82. It also executes the determination of the effect content such as the adjustment of the amount of light for changing the emission brightness of the and the customization of the effect content and the effect determination tendency.

It should be noted that, with respect to the process of determining various effect contents performed in the sub-module process called in the effect control process, specifications unique to each gaming machine are often used, so the description is omitted and the subject of the invention is provided. When the processing having a feature is executed in the pachinko gaming machine P, the details will be described in the description of the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine P which is the subject of the invention.

Returning to the description of the main loop processing of the effect control board, the effect control command analysis process (step 4014) will be described as the final process of the main loop process.

The effect control command analysis process is based on the information stored as the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, and the information corresponding to the effect control command to be used for determining the effect content in the above-mentioned effect control process. And set flags. In this process, it is necessary to determine the processing content according to the command transmitted from the main control board P40, and the processing content is determined from the contents of the MODE data and EVENT data which are the effect control commands, and the processing content is determined according to the effect control command. Processing is executed.

As for the effect control command, one command (MODE data and Event data) may be transmitted for each interrupt process (every 4 ms) of the main control board P40. The analysis of the effect control command is repeatedly executed as much as possible until the main loop processing cycle (16 ms) of the board P41 elapses (step 4016).

[Interrupt processing of production control board]
Next, the interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the effect control board P41 will be described. The interrupt processing on the effect control board P41 is different from the interrupt processing on the main control board, and has a plurality of interrupt processing started at different execution triggers (see FIGS. 16A and 16B). Priority is set for these multiple interrupt processes, and when an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, the higher interrupt process is executed even while the interrupt process is being executed. Is controlled by. In this description, the effect control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16 (A)) and the effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16 (B)) will be described as representatives.

(Effect control timer interrupt processing)
The effect control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16A) is an interrupt process executed in a 1 ms cycle in the CPU of the effect control board P41.

The port input / output process (step 5002) is performed by inputting a sensor provided for detecting the position of the effect movable accessory P560 or another sensor (input sensor of the effect operation means P81) from the input port of the effect control board P41. The process of generating and storing level data and rising data from the output port, and the output port are used to drive the effect movable accessory P560 drive means (solar, stepping motor, etc.) according to the operation pattern set in the effect device control process. The process of outputting a signal is executed. When data is output from the output port, the data in the counter (storage area) that counts the number of outputs is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) is a process of subtracting or adding a timer for measuring the switching timing of the effect operation. When the update process for each timer is completed, a comparison operation with the comparison value is performed to determine whether or not a switching condition for the effect operation has occurred, and information necessary for determining the effect content in the effect control process (step 4012). Performs the process of storing the flag in the storage area.

In the sensor monitoring process (step 5006), the sensor detection information related to the switching of the effect operation, such as whether or not the effect operation switching condition of the effect movable accessory P560 is satisfied, is obtained from the sensor detection data generated by the port input / output process. Is performed, a process of switching the table of the operation pattern is performed, and a process of setting a condition flag for determining the effect content is performed in the effect control process (step 4012).

The effect button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process for determining whether or not the effect switching condition is satisfied based on the input of the effect button P381, the lever P382, the cross key P383, etc., which are the effect operation means P81. In the effect button monitoring process, the level data indicating the input state of each input device and the rise data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous off to the current on) generated in the port input / output process (step 5002) are used for the effect. It is determined whether or not the operation means P81 is operated and the operation mode is determined.

For example, when the rising data is generated as the input information for the effect operation means P81, it is assumed that the player has operated the effect operation means P81, and information such as a flag for executing the corresponding effect is stored. .. If the input is judged only by the rising data, it may be erroneously detected due to electrical noise and the effect operation may be switched. Therefore, after the rising data is generated, the level data (on-data) is input multiple times. It may be determined that the player operation (may be expressed as "single push (single pull) operation" or "single blow operation") for the effect operation means P81 triggered by the continuation.

Further, when the on-input level data is continuously detected 500 times, that is, when it is determined that the effect operating means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined that the operation is a "long press (long press)" operation. It is configured to be treated as a special operation. Note that the fall data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous on to the current off) may be electrically detected as noise when determining whether or not to perform the "long press (long press)" operation and whether to continue. In this case as well, as with the measures to prevent false positives described above, after the fall data is detected, the input of the "long press (long press)" operation is input based on the detection of multiple level data (off data) inputs. It may be used to judge the end.

Then, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, depending on the content of the effect being executed, the effect operation means once at regular intervals (for example, every 0.3 seconds) by executing the "long press" operation on the effect button P381. It is possible to repeat the process of assuming that there was a "single push (single pull)" input operation on P81, and in this way, with a special operation such as a "long press (long pull)" operation as an opportunity, It is called an "automatic continuous hit" operation that the repetitive processing is executed assuming that the "single push" operation has been performed. The "automatic continuous striking" operation is not limited to the operation content illustrated, but can be performed by simultaneously operating a plurality of effect operation means P81 or by operating an on / off operation such as a DIP switch provided as a switch different from the effect button. It is also possible to adopt a method in which it is considered that the "automatic continuous hitting" operation is executed based on the input of the effect button P381.

The input to the effect operation means P81 has a period treated as an effective operation (“operation valid period”) and a period treated as an invalid operation (“operation invalid period”) depending on the execution status of the effect.

The multitasking process (step 5010) is the effect control generated this time according to the value of the task counter (updated between the values "0" and "15") that is updated every time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed. This is a process performed by different processing contents to be executed during the timer interrupt process. The task counter is configured to circulate in a cycle of 16 ms, and the process at each counter value is executed so as to be substantially synchronized with one cycle of the main loop process. As an example of processing in each task, whether or not the operation of the image control board P42 can be executed is determined based on the signal transmitted from the image control board P42 (input information is generated by port input / output processing), and an image is displayed. A process of monitoring the operating status of the control board P42 is performed.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) includes an image control command (“inter-sub command”) so that the CPU of the image control board P42 executes an image display according to the effect content determined in the effect control process P41. This is a process of transmitting (sometimes called) to the CPU of the image control board P42. Although the image control board P42 and the effect control board P41 may be composed of the same board, they are described as the image control board P42 in the present specification for convenience.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the effect control board P41 is composed of a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command specifying a pattern of display content, and the image control board P42 is composed of the image control command. It is configured to send.

The pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, is configured to transmit image control commands by the effect control timer interrupt process. However, regarding the transmission and reception of commands between the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42, the command is sent and received separately. It is also possible to provide interrupt processing to perform transmission and reception.

(Direction control command reception interrupt)
The effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16 (B)) outputs a strobe signal in the effect control command transmission process (step 2040) during the interrupt process (FIG. 9) of the main control board P40, and outputs the strobe signal to the effect control board. This is an interrupt process generated when P41 receives a signal.

When the effect control board P41 starts the effect control command reception interrupt, the effect control board P41 reads the effect control command (MODE data or EVENT data) transmitted from the output port of the main control board P40, updates the temporary buffer data, and stores it (step). 5502, step 5504).

When the update of the temporary buffer data is completed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the effect control command (combination of MODE data and EVENT data) of 1 is completed (step 5506). In the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, specific bits of the 1-byte data are composed of "1" and "0".

When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, a process of storing the contents of the effect control command received this time is usually performed in the lower 1-byte storage area. At this time, if it is indicated that a specific bit part of the lower 1 byte of the storage area of the current temporary buffer data is MODE data before the update, the storage data of the temporary buffer data is shifted to the upper 1 byte storage area. After the data is stored, the EVENT data received this time is stored in the lower 1-byte storage area of the temporary buffer data.

Then, in the determination of the completion of reception of the effect control command in step 5506, it is determined whether or not the specific bit in the lower 1 byte of the temporary buffer data is the data indicating the EVENT data, and it is determined that the data is the EVENT data. In that case, the process proceeds to the next process assuming that the reception of the effect control command of 1 is completed (step 5506YES), and when it is determined that the data is MODE data (step 5506NO), the EVENT data is transmitted from the main control board P40. Until the strobe signal based on the above is received, the effect control command reception interrupt is exited, other processing is performed, and the process waits.

When it is determined in step 5506 that the reception of the effect control command is completed, it is determined whether or not the sent effect control command is normal (step 5508). This process is determined based on, for example, whether or not there is matching data in the list data of the effect control commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P40. Then, when it is determined that the command is normal, it is stored in the storage area for storing the received effect control command so as to be analyzed by the effect control command analysis process during the effect control timer interrupt process. In case of abnormal data, the temporary buffer data is discarded.

[Example of basic image display effect]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the basic production of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a symbol variation display (during a stop display of a decorative symbol) during a normal game (low probability / low base), and FIG. 18 is a reach effect with a high expectation of being a big hit. It is a figure showing the situation. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being executed, and FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during the operation of the electric chew support function in a specific game state (high probability or low probability / high base). It is a figure that was made.

(Example of production display in normal game state)
《Decorative design》
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a symbol variation display (during a stop display of a decorative symbol) during a normal game (low probability / low base). Three numbers are displayed in a substantially central area of the screen in a manner that can be clearly confirmed by the player. These three symbols are called "decorative symbols (P801)" (also called "designation"), and are dramatic display objects displayed in response to the result of the special symbol lottery, and the variation of the special symbols. It is displayed in a variable manner according to the display. Although it is represented only by numbers in FIG. 17, each number may be displayed with a decorative image such as a character image. Further, when each number is configured to be displayed with a decorative image, the decorative image and the display mode of each number may be different depending on the game state. With such a configuration, the player can easily determine the current gaming state.

In the decorative symbol P801, the variable display as one effect is performed for each variation display of the special symbol (one special symbol lottery) except when a special effect is performed. Although not shown, when the decorative symbol P801 is variablely displayed, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (transparently displayed or hidden in some cases) at high speed, and the image of the animation or effect is displayed. By a production called "notice", a production that raises the expectation of acquiring the right to the jackpot game will be performed.

The decorative symbol P801 shown in FIG. 17 is scrolled in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) when the variable display is started, and then the left symbol (P801a), the right symbol (P801c), and the middle symbol (P801b) are displayed in this order. The stop display symbol determined by the effect control board P41 is stopped and displayed for each symbol row. In general, when three decorative symbols P801 are stopped and displayed in the same mode (doublet), it is provided to inform that it is a big hit. Further, in a state where one symbol is displayed in a variable manner while another symbol is displayed, for example, the left symbol before the middle symbol P801b, which is the last stopped symbol (also referred to as “final stop symbol”), stops. The state in which the right symbol is displayed with the same symbol (temporary stop display) is called "reach" ("reach state", "reach mode").

The variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a form of scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom), but the variable display mode is not limited to the vertical direction, but is used in the horizontal direction and the depth to move back and forth (from top to bottom). The scroll display operation may be performed in the (diagonal) direction, or the rotation operation may be performed on the spot without scrolling and the display may be switched in order.

Further, the decorative symbol P801 has a case where the stop display is performed a plurality of times during the variable display of the special symbol once. At this time, when the stop display is performed a plurality of times, the stop display indicating the result of the special lottery is the stop display displayed at the same time as the stop display symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. The stop display at a timing other than the above is called "temporary stop (display)". In addition, the stop display at the same time as the stop display of the special symbol may be expressed as "main stop".

When the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol P801 is not completely fixed in order to distinguish it from the final stop display (main stop) of the symbol, and the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped to the extent that it is not recognized as fixed. It is configured to move, move in a direction such as up and down or left and right, and swing around one rotation axis. Such a state may be expressed as "sway fluctuation" in addition to the temporary stop.

After the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped, the variation display may be repeated again. Generally, the re-variation from the state in which the symbols other than the jackpot symbol are temporarily stopped is called a "pseudo-variation (pseudo-ream)" effect. , The re-variation that may change the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed after the jackpot symbol is stopped is called "promotion (fluctuation)" effect. When the promotion effect is executed, it may be configured not to be changed to a jackpot symbol that is more disadvantageous than the stopped jackpot symbol, or may be configured not to be changed to a lost symbol.

In addition, when the decorative symbol P801 is stopped and displayed, there is a kind of special decorative symbol that is not displayed during the normal variable display and is displayed only when a part of the effect is executed. (P804) ”(special symbol). Each special design has a meaning, for example, suggesting that a specific jackpot is executed, suggesting that the above-mentioned pseudo-variation effect is performed, or a specific reach effect (reach mode). There is something that suggests that the notice effect (displayed in the case) is executed. When a special symbol is used, the special symbol may be temporarily stopped as the decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) that is temporarily stopped at the end, or one of the left symbol P801a, the middle symbol P801b, and the right symbol P801c are all substituted. A special symbol may be temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol.

《Simple drawing (mini drawing)》
At the upper right of the screen, three numbers displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol P801 are displayed. This symbol is also called "simple design (P802)"("simpledesign") or "mini design", and like the above-mentioned "decorative design", it shows the lottery result of the special design according to the variable display of the special design. It is displayed as a display object.

The simple design P802 (mini design) is different from the "decorative design" in that the special design showing the result of the special lottery is a special design even when the decorative design P801 is not stopped and displayed. In accordance with the display on the display devices P51 and P52, the stop display is always performed once for each special symbol lottery.

Further, the variable display of the simplified design P802 may be configured to form the same reach mode when the above-mentioned decorative symbol P801 is in the reach mode, or the result of the special symbol lottery is notified. In order to achieve the minimum purpose, even if a simple variable display method is adopted, such as a constant display switching is performed until the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of the decorative symbol P801. good.

<< Hold display area >>
A hold display area P810 is provided in the lower area of FIG. In the hold display area P810, as the right of the special symbol lottery acquired by the player, the hold object P811 corresponding to the hold (random value) corresponding to the unexercised right is displayed. In the example of FIG. 17, three special symbol lottery rights are reserved.

In the example of FIG. 17, the earlier the execution time of the special symbol lottery is held (that is, the hold that occurred earlier) is displayed at a position closer to the substantially center direction at the bottom of the screen, and the hold display area P810. The display position of the hold object located on the far right side of is called "Ho 1 (display area)", and as it goes to the left side of the screen, "Ho 2 (display area)", "Ho 3 (display area)", and "Ho 4 (Ho 4) Display area) ".

Further, in the vicinity of the right side of the hold display area P810, an object having substantially the same mode as the hold object P811 in the hold display area P810 is displayed at a position one step higher than the hold object P811. This display area continuously displays the hold display corresponding to the random number value that triggered the start of the current special symbol change display from the hold display area, and is referred to as "the change object display area (P812)". .. Further, the object displayed in the variable object display area P812 is referred to as "the variable object (P813)", but may be referred to as "the pending display" or the like, and is differentiated from the reserved object P811 in the reserved display area P810. Therefore, the acronym "corresponding" is added.

The display mode of the variable object P813 in the variable object display area P812 does not have to be completely the same as that of the reserved object P811, and the reserved display accompanying the start of the fluctuation is moved and displayed in the variable object display area P812. At that time, the shape may change or disappear (hide). Further, the variable object P813 may also be configured so that the display mode can be changed in the same manner as the hold display in the hold change look-ahead described later (for example, the shape and color of the object change at a timing during the change display). ).

《Simple hold display》
Two numbers are displayed side by side in the vertical direction at the substantially center position in the height direction on the left side of the screen. These two numbers represent the current number of holdings of the first special symbol and the number of holdings of the second special symbol, and are called "simple hold display (P814)". In the example in FIG. 17, the reserved number of the first special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "3" displayed above, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "4" displayed below. ..

(Look-ahead production)
《Pending change look-ahead》
Further, in FIG. 17, the hold object P811 in the hold 3 display area in the hold display area P810 is displayed in a different manner from the hold object P811 in the hold 2 and hold 1 display areas. The pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, is configured so that the display mode of the hold object P811 of the hold 3 is more likely to be a big hit than the display mode of the hold object P811 of the hold 2. In this way, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold object P811 and displaying it for a specific hold is called "hold change (look-ahead)".

It should be noted that the mode is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 17, and has a plurality of types of change modes, each of which is configured so that the possibility of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) can be different, and the reserved object P811 is stepwise. The display mode of the above may be changed.

In addition, not limited to "hold change (look-ahead)", when the random value stored as hold is determined as the execution target of the effect, the variation display corresponding to the hold that is the execution target of the effect is started. A production that suggests that there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit on hold, which is the target of the production, is called a "look-ahead effect" (sometimes called a "pre-judgment effect"). I'm out.

Then, when the "look-ahead effect" is executed, the hold determined as the hold for which the effect is executed may be referred to as "look-ahead target hold", "trigger hold", "criminal hold", or the like. , The variable display of the special symbol based on the look-ahead target hold is called "look-ahead target change", "trigger change", "criminal change", or the like.

Here, as a "look-ahead effect", some typical ones that can be adopted in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be illustrated.

《Chance look ahead》
In "chance pre-reading", in the variation display of the decorative symbol P801 until the fluctuation of the pre-reading target fluctuation is started, the stop display symbol of the decorative symbol P801 according to a predetermined rule is stopped display (or temporary stop display). It is a production to be done. As an example of the rule of the stop display mode of the decorative symbol P801 that is predetermined as a chance eye, (a) when the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of only the symbols having the same number part of the decorative symbol, (b). When the stop symbols of decorative symbols such as "1", "2", "3", "5", "4", and "3" are displayed in a regular stop display mode such as in order (forward order, reverse order). (C) When a special number such as "7" or a symbol different from the number such as "destination" is stopped and displayed as a stop display symbol of the middle symbol.

《Direction movable character look-ahead》
"Pre-reading the effect movable accessory" reads ahead the effect movable accessory P560 or the frame movable accessory P360 (such as the lever P382 of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P1) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (glass frame P3). It is an effect of making a lively operation from the start of the variation according to the effect operation pattern, straddling the variation until the variation display of the target variation is started or the look-ahead target variation.

《Zone transition look-ahead》
"Zone shift look-ahead" shifts to a special effect mode (called "zone") in the change display of the special symbol before the look-ahead target change starts, and is special until the change display that becomes the look-ahead target change. It is a look-ahead effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit by executing a notice lottery for executing a notice effect corresponding to a different effect mode. For example, "display normal background-> display background when pre-reading->jackpot" or "display normal background-> display background when pre-reading-> stop off symbol and return to normal background".

(Display example when executing reach production)
Next, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a situation in which a reach effect with a high degree of expectation, which is a big hit, is being performed. As described above, the "reach effect" is a situation in which decorative symbols (left symbol P801a, right symbol P801c) other than one decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and one more symbol is displayed. It refers to the production in a state where it is notified that a big hit will occur if the vehicle stops in the same mode.

In many cases, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, has a specification of notifying a big hit by having three decorative symbols P801 have the same stop display mode via a reach effect.

In the example of FIG. 18, the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c of the decorative symbol are displayed as "5", and "4", "5", and "6" are displayed as the symbols of the changing medium symbol row. The situation is such that the "4" symbol vibrates violently, and if it switches to "5", it will be a big hit.

Here, in the example of FIG. 18, the display of the left symbol and the right symbol “5” of the decorative symbol is displayed smaller than the decorative symbol P801 at the time of the stop display of FIG. 17, and the middle symbol in the variable display is displayed. The decorative symbol P801b in the column is displayed larger than the decorative symbol P801 at the time of stop display and is highlighted. At this time, the small decorative symbols corresponding to the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c may be referred to as "evacuation symbol (P803)" or "reach symbol". In the reach effect, in addition to the illustrated example, it is notified whether or not the animation of the notice effect (reach effect) displayed along with the variable display of the decorative pattern will be a big hit depending on the end. In some cases, the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c that have already been temporarily stopped are displayed (or hidden) in a smaller size than the retracted symbol P803 to enhance the visibility of the effect that the player wants to pay attention to. ing.

Further, a gaming machine or the like in which the number of decorative symbols P801 displayed is not three is known, and there is also a multi-line reach or the like that forms a reach mode of a plurality of rows at the same time, but a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As an exception to the reach effect, there is a reach effect called "full rotation reach" in which all three decorative symbols P801 are synchronously and variablely displayed in the same manner. What is the standard for reach production, "a situation in which decorative symbols other than one decorative symbol are displayed in the same mode, and a state in which it is notified that a big hit will occur if one more symbol stops in the same mode". Although the situation is different, full rotation reach is also recognized by those skilled in the art as a reach effect.

Further, in FIG. 18, the “effect setting display area (P850)” is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 18, the volume setting display P851 is displayed as the effect setting display.

The effect setting display area P850 includes a volume setting function for adjusting the volume level output from the speaker P83 of the gaming machine P, a light amount adjusting function for adjusting the emission brightness of the decorative lamp P82 of the gaming machine P, and an effect mode. This is an area for displaying the setting status and the change status of the effect mode change function for changing the type of the notice effect to be generated and the frequency of occurrence of the notice effect.

The effect setting display area P850 is not always displayed, and is temporarily displayed when the player executes the operations related to the various effect settings (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function, effect mode change function) described above. It is displayed, and for example, it is possible to display the effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. 18 by operating the cross key P383 in the left-right direction. In the situation of FIG. 18, when the right button of the cross key P383 is further operated by the player, the set volume level (black area in the figure) increases and the volume setting value starts from "3". It is supposed to change to "4".

Further, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, when adjusting the amount of light, the change operation is performed by operating the cross key P383 in the vertical direction, and the effect mode change function is configured according to the operation of the effect button. An example is given in which the production modes are switched in a predetermined order. It should be noted that the operations related to these effect settings may adopt different operation modes in relation to the execution of the effect during the game, and can be appropriately adopted in addition to the illustrated setting changing method.

Further, regarding the display of the effect setting display area P850 and the use of various effect setting functions, it is possible to set the period during which the player's effect setting operation is valid and the period during which the player's effect setting operation is invalid. When executed, the effect setting display area P850 is hidden and the use of various effect setting functions is invalidated.

(Example of production display during big hit game)
Subsequently, based on FIG. 19, a display mode of the effect in a state where the jackpot game is being executed on the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be described.

<< Production display showing the type of jackpot >>
At the lower left of the screen and the upper right of the screen of FIG. 19, the decorative symbol P801 that triggered the execution of the big hit game is displayed. At the lower left of the screen, the decorative symbol P801 (also referred to as "big hit design (P805)") of 1 is displayed in a display mode smaller than the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner, as in the case of executing the reach effect described above, and the upper right corner of the screen is displayed. Continues to display the simplified drawing P802 that was displayed when the variable display of the special symbol was completed.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the type of jackpot executed by the player and the number of game balls that can be obtained during the jackpot are determined by the type of the decorative symbol P801 that triggered the occurrence of the jackpot (stopped and displayed when the jackpot occurs). It suggests the degree of expectation of the game and the game state (normal game state) after the big hit. Therefore, by displaying the decorative symbols (big hit design P805, simple symbol P802) that triggered the execution of the jackpot in this way, the type of jackpot and the number of game balls expected to be acquired can be determined even during the jackpot game. It is possible to suggest.

Further, as a display indicating the type of jackpot, in FIG. 19, an icon image P821 imitating a pentagonal shield is displayed under the character string "ROUND6" (referred to as "round display (P820)"), and the icon is displayed. The letters "MAX" are written in the center of P821. The icon P821 in the figure is a jackpot suggested by the character string “MAX”, and indicates that the jackpot game of the maximum round of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is executed. This icon P821 is called a "big hit icon" or a "ream villa (display) icon", and each time a specific game state and a big hit game are repeatedly executed, the display increases cumulatively side by side, so-called "ream villa". It is an effect display that notifies the player how many times and what kind of jackpot has been won in the state so that the player can understand.

Although not shown, in the premised pachinko gaming machine P, "○○ bonus!" (Notifies the maximum round jackpot) and "○○ bonus!" By displaying "△△ chance" (suggesting a big hit that is not the maximum round), an effect of notifying the player of the type of big hit is executed.

In addition, even if it is suggested that the jackpot is a big hit such as "△△ chance" where the number of rounds to be executed is small, the execution round of the jackpot is set as "extra bonus! + ○ round" during the jackpot round. In fact, it is also possible to perform a "big hit promotion effect" such as notifying that it is a big hit in the maximum round.

In addition, the "big hit promotion effect" is also used when it is suggested that a big hit game that shifts to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the previously notified type of big hit is being executed. There are times. For example, from the production of a jackpot game (called "non-probability variable jackpot" or "normal jackpot") that suggests that the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the jackpot game, the jackpot game ("" There is a production display such that the production display is switched to the production of "probability change jackpot" or "specific jackpot").

<< Production display showing the progress of the jackpot game >>
Next, when the jackpot game is executed, the effect display showing the progress of the jackpot game will be described. In FIG. 19, as an effect showing the effect display of the big hit, the character string display of "round display (P820)" executed by the character string display of "ROUND_〇" in the upper left of the screen and the character string display of "TOTAL_〇〇pt" in the lower right of the screen. Examples include the "acquired ball number display (P822)" executed in, and the "count display (P825)" displayed by 10 circular image objects in the center of the right side of the screen. Although not shown, an image display such as an animation called "round effect" is displayed in addition to these displays during the big hit game.

《Round display》
The “round display (P820)” is a display indicating the number of rounds of the running round game (unit game) during the jackpot game. The value on the right side of "ROUND" is updated when the round game starts. The example of FIG. 19 shows a situation in which a round game of the sixth round is being executed.

The "round display (p820)" does not necessarily have to be synchronized with the number of execution rounds during the actual jackpot game. For example, in the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications, the small hit game may be counted as the first round, and the first round of the big hit game executed after winning the V may be treated as the second round. Further, in another example, when the opening pattern of the large winning opening P751 in the round game ends with the transition to the easy-to-enter state for a short time, the value of the "round display" is not updated and the large winning opening is not updated. Only when the opening pattern of is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball for a long time, it may be treated as a substantially executed round "substantial round".

《Display the number of acquired balls》
The "number of acquired balls display (P822)" sandwiches the specific game with the "display of the number of acquired balls (P823 * not shown)" that displays the number of game balls accumulated in one big hit game being executed. There is a type such as "cumulative acquisition number display (824)" that displays the cumulative number of game balls acquired in a plurality of big hits. FIG. 19 shows an example in which the “cumulative number of acquired balls display (P824)”, which is a 5-digit display of the number of acquired balls, is displayed. The "big hit winning ball number display (P823)" and the "cumulative winning ball number display (P824)" may be displayed at the same time in parallel.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the cumulative number of winning balls paid out based on the number of balls entered into the big winning opening P751 during the big hit game is displayed for the “display of the number of acquired balls (P822)”. However, as a cumulative target for the payout of prize balls on the number of acquired balls display P822, the payouts based on the winning balls to the general winning opening P731 and the second starting winning opening P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game board P5 are cumulatively added. You may.

Further, as another modification, the display period of the "acquired ball number display (P822)" may be displayed not only during the big hit game but also during the execution of the specific game, or the "acquired ball number display (P822)". The addition period of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out may be extended not only during the big hit game but also during the specific game or the small hit game.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, in addition to the "number of acquired balls displayed (P822)", the accumulated number of prize balls paid out is divided into "2500 balls", "5000 balls", "10000 balls", and the like. Only in special situations such as when the number of payouts is reached, it is possible to execute the "separated number of acquired balls display" effect in addition to the "acquired ball number display" to notify the player (for example, "GET 10000! ! ”Is displayed).

《Count display》
The "count display (P825)" indicates how many more balls can be entered up to the number of game balls set as the closing condition of the large winning opening P751 in one round game, or how many game balls can be entered in this round game. It is a display indicating whether or not the ball has entered the large winning opening P751. The former is displayed as a shaded circular object in FIG. 19, and the latter is displayed as a white circular object as a two-row object display at a substantially center position on the right side of the screen.

In the example of FIG. 19, as the game of the sixth round, 5 balls have already been entered into the large winning opening (displayed as a white circular object), and 5 more balls can be entered (with a shaded circular object). Display) is indicated by the count display P825. The display of the count display P825 is reset to the initial mode each time a new round is started.

During the execution of the round game of the big hit game, the number of game balls exceeds the closing condition of the big winning opening P751 in succession to the game balls that satisfy the closing condition of the big winning opening P751 depending on the flow condition of the game balls. Winning may occur, and the occurrence of winning of the number of game balls exceeding such a closing condition is called "over winning".

Although not shown, when an "over prize" occurs, a special effect is performed using the object display of the count display P825, or a special light emission of the effect lamp P82 or a special sound effect is emitted from the speaker P83. It may be notified by such means. Further, with respect to the above-mentioned number of acquired balls display P822, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning that is “over winning” may be added or excluded from the addition.

<< Other production display during big hit game >>
Next, another effect display in which the effect display is executed in FIG. 19 will be described.

First, the two numbers displayed at substantially the center position on the left side of the screen are the above-mentioned simple hold display P814.

The display "Sound_2" displayed on the right side of the decorative design (big hit design P805) at the lower left of the screen is "selected music display (P854)" indicating the title of the music being played during the current big hit game. .. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the player can arbitrarily select the music to be played by operating the effect button P381 and the cross key P383 during the first and second rounds during the jackpot game. Has specifications. Regarding the selected music display P854, when the music can be changed, an image "Can be changed with the (up) (down) keys" is displayed in the vicinity of the selected music display P854 as shown in FIG.

It should be noted that the selection of the effect during the big hit game is not limited to the selection of music, but it is also possible to change the round effect and select the effect (effect mode) during the specific game after the big hit game (collectively,). (Called "Production Customized Display (P853)"), detailed explanations of them are omitted.

Finally, the "right-handed" and right-hand arrow symbols displayed at the bottom of the simplified drawing P802 at the upper right of the screen are image displays related to "separate notification (P830)" (also called "recommended launch position notification"). Is. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, during the big hit game, it is recommended to launch the game ball into the right area P501R of the game area, so "right-handed notification (P832)" ("right-handed"). (Display of the character string and the right arrow symbol) is being executed.

The "separate notification" may be displayed not only during the big hit game but also during the game in the specific game state or during the game in the normal game state. In particular, in a situation where the game state is switched (occurrence / end of a big hit or occurrence / end of a specific game state), a display having a larger size than the hitting notification P830 shown in FIG. 19 is easier for the player to recognize. Is temporarily displayed in the center of the screen or the like to notify the player of the recommended firing position in the next gaming state.

In the "separation notification (P830)", the one that is temporarily displayed in a large size at the timing of the transition of the game state is the "first distribution notification image" ("right-handed large display (P831)", " Left-handed large display (P833) "), and the recommended firing position in the game state during the big hit game or the specific game state is displayed for almost the entire period during which the game state continues. It may be expressed as "notification image" ("right-handed small display (P832)", "left-handed small display (P834)").

In addition, when a situation in which the game ball is launched at a position other than the recommended launch position is detected as another type of effect of the "striking notification (P830)", for example, the left area of the game area during a big hit. "Left-handed warning notice" ("Right-handed warning (P835)" that alerts the player that the game ball should be fired in the right area P501R of the game area when the game ball is fired in P501L. ) To display a message such as "Please hit right". In a situation where the recommended firing position and the player's actual firing position are opposite to each other, the “right-handed warning notification” (“left-handed warning notification (P936)”) is executed.

(Example of effect display during a specific game state)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability / high base). Although a wide variety of production displays are shown in the figure, the explanations for those explained in the above explanation are omitted, and the production displays that have not been explained so far and the differences from the above explanations. The effect display having the above will be described.

First, as the effect display that has not been explained so far, the "effect mode display (P840)" and the "remaining game count display (P841)" will be described as the effect display in the specific game state.

<< Production mode display >>
The "effect mode display (P840)" is a display indicating the state of the current effect display mode, and is a display indicating that the advance notice effect corresponding to the corresponding mode is drawn by the state information called the effect mode. .. When the effect mode display is different, the type of advance notice effect visually recognized by the player is generally made so that the impression given to the appearance is significantly different, although there is a common advance notice effect. .. In FIG. 20, the display of "RUSH_MODE" is made, and the display indicating that the gaming state of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" (high probability / high base state) is displayed. ing.

In addition to notifying the effect mode in the specific game state, the "effect mode display (P840)" may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), or one game. When a plurality of effect modes are provided in the state, the display may be temporarily performed each time the condition for switching the effect mode is satisfied, or may be continuously performed until the effect mode ends.

《Display the number of remaining games》
The "remaining game count display (P841)" is a display of the number of variations of the special symbol until the end of the specific game state (the number of special symbol lottery) and the variation display of the special symbol until the end of the current production mode. It is a display showing the number of times. In FIG. 20, the display of "remaining_56" is executed in the upper center of the screen, and the game state of "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" is performed until 56 more special symbol lottery is executed. Notify the person.

Next, in the effect display example of the specific game state shown in FIG. 20, a display different from the effect display example in the other game states described above will be described.

<< Decorative design (specific game state) >>
In the center of the screen of FIG. 20, a variable display of the decorative symbol P801 is displayed. In the effect display example of the decorative symbol P801 in the specific game state of FIG. 20, the display of the decorative symbol P801 is displayed smaller than that of the decorative symbol P801 of the effect display example in the normal game state of FIG. 20.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as the effect display of the specific game state, the effect mode display P840, the remaining number of games display P841, and the jackpot icon display P821 are displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the selected music is displayed at the lower part of the screen. P854 and P824 for displaying the number of acquired balls are performed. In the specific gaming state, such an additional display that is not displayed in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state) is performed. Therefore, if the decorative symbol P801 is displayed in the same size as the normal gaming state, the stop display is displayed. At this time, the display of some symbols may overlap with a part of each display, which may cause a problem that the visibility of the stop display symbol is lowered. The display of the decorative design P801 is made small and simplified so that Further, as an example of simplifying and displaying the decorative symbol P801, in addition to reducing the size, it is also possible to adopt a method of not displaying a character image or the like attached to a number indicating the symbol.

<< Hold display area (specific game state) >>
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in the lower left of the screen of FIG. 20, as the display of the hold object P811 in the hold display area P810 of the specific game state, from the front side of the screen toward the depth direction, from "hold 1" to "hold 1" to " A display area for the reserved object of "Maintenance 4" is provided. The display of the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is omitted in the effect mode state of "RUSH_MODE".

When the variation display shown in FIG. 20 ends and a new variation starts in the state, the display of the hold object P811 located at the bottom of FIG. 20 disappears, and the display of the hold object P811 lined up in the back moves to the front. The display is controlled so that the display becomes large.

In addition, although not shown, the "result display effect", which is an important effect as an effect displayed during a specific game, will be described.

《Result display production》
In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of the "result display effect", the game is mainly performed when the final change of the specific game state (high base state) is executed, or when the hold generated during the specific game state disappears. It is a production performed at the timing when a person recognizes that the "renso" state has ended, and information on how many jackpot games have been won in the so-called "renso" state and how many game balls in total It is a production that notifies the player whether or not it has been acquired (corresponding to the display of the number of acquired balls).

[Example]
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration based on the above-mentioned prerequisite technology. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite technology will be mainly described, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the prerequisite technology are designated by the same reference numerals.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that adopts the "small hit V" described in the description of the typical gaming machine specifications ("specs") of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine, and is small. By passing through a specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 after executing the big hit game (or during the small hit game) according to the "base state" in the normal game state when the hit (or big hit) game is started. Differentiate the content of the "specific game state" (especially the length of the period for maintaining the "base state" to the "high base state") in the normal game state (after the execution of the jackpot game based on the activated accessory continuous operation device). It is a pachinko gaming machine that provides new game characteristics.

In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, the normal gaming state is immediately after the "specific gaming state" (low probability / high base state) ends, and is controlled to the "(low probability /) low base state". If you acquire the right of small hit (or big hit) in the special symbol hold (hold of the second special symbol) that is the main body of the game in the specific game state that is digested while you are playing, after the special game state (big hit game) By configuring the period for maintaining the specific gaming state (low probability / high base state) as the gaming state so that the next small hit (or big hit) can be obtained substantially, two small hits (substantially two small hits) It adopts the characteristic playability that the right of (big hit) can be obtained.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment having the above-mentioned characteristics will be described in detail below.

(Board composition)
First, the configuration of the board surface configuration (composition of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment can be implemented with almost the same board configuration as the presupposed pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment has a configuration in which a specific area P760 is provided inside the large winning opening (attacker) P751 in order to adopt the playability (specs) described later. In addition, as long as it is a change that does not change the playability disclosed below (or a change that is only a minor change), a different board configuration may be adopted as appropriate.

(spec)
Next, the playability (specs) of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described. In this explanation, regarding the "setting" (setting value) that affects the ball ejection performance, only the specifications related to "setting 1" will be described, but various numerical values related to other setting values will be set as appropriate. Is.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the winning / losing lottery probability is set to 1/269 for the big hit probability (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and 1 / 9.1 for the small hit probability (only for the second special symbol). The number of prize balls is 4 for the 1st start winning opening (1st starting opening) P711, 3 for the 2nd starting winning opening (2nd starting opening) P721, and 3 for the left general winning opening P731L. The right general winning opening P731R is set to 2 balls, and the large winning opening (attacker) P751 is set to 15 balls.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment adopts the second special symbol priority digestion control, and when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are reserved, the second special symbol is used. Priority is given to variable display. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, only the second special symbol has a "small hit" as a result of the special symbol lottery, but the first special symbol may be configured to have a "small hit". It is possible. In addition, if the game property of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is not lost, the first special symbol priority digestion control may be applied or the first special symbol priority digestion control may be applied as a modification, not limited to the second special symbol priority digestion control. Needless to say, it is possible to apply a ball-entry order digestion control that preferentially digests the ball that has entered the ball first.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment adopts the playability (specs) called "small hit V" explained as a prerequisite technology, and is special except when it becomes a "big hit" in the special symbol lottery. A "small hit" is obtained in the symbol lottery, and when the game ball passes through the specific area P760 inside the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game to be executed thereafter, the accessory continuous operation device is activated and the large hit game is performed. It is a specification to be executed. In this embodiment, in the case of developing from a small hit game to a big hit game, a series of special game states from the start of the small hit game to the end of the big hit game are referred to as "small hit V" or "small hit development big hit". And so on.

The types of big hits (including small hits V) in the special gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment are 3 round big hits (1st special symbol big hit) and 10 round big hits (2nd special symbol big hit or small hit V). ) Is provided. Further, regarding the specific game which is an advantageous normal game state, the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment does not have a probability fluctuation function, and has an electric chew support function (electric support) function after various big hits (including small hit V). A specific game (high base state) is executed by activating.

Further, in the detailed control example described later, the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment is predetermined in the period of the specific game and / or the period in which a maximum of four remaining pending fluctuations are displayed after the end of the specific game. The special fluctuation pattern table (limited frequency pattern table) is referred to at the same timing, and the fluctuation pattern for securing the fluctuation display time of the special symbol as needed is selected. As for the timing of referring to, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the execution of the special game are counted and stored separately, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is referred to. When the stored information of the number of fluctuations stored corresponding to each at the start of fluctuation is a specific value, the special fluctuation pattern table for the first special symbol or the special fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol can be referred to. There is.

(Game flow)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 21, the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described. The game flow shown in FIG. 21 is a flow assuming a case where a game (normal game) as designed by the player is executed. The game flow when a game (abnormal game, irregular game) that ignores the player's design intention is executed may be an operation that does not apply to the situation shown in FIG. 21, but the abnormal game I will omit the explanation of.

First, in the "normal game (low probability / low base state)" of FIG. 21, the player fires the game ball toward the left side region P501L with the firing strength at which the game ball can enter the first starting winning opening P711. Play the game with the so-called "left-handed"). When the game ball wins the first start winning opening, a special symbol lottery based on the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed, and if the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, a "big hit (special figure 1)" is given. It is executed (FIG. 21 (A)). The state surrounded by the double line in the figure represents a special game state (big hit game, small hit game).

When the "big hit (special figure 1)" is completed, the game state shifts to the specific game state (high base state) (FIG. 21 (B)). The specific game state after "big hit (special figure 1)" is "breakthrough zone_low probability / high base (special figure 2: 1 times) + maximum 4 remaining hold" (details will be described later), and the second The high base state (operating state of the electric chew support function) continues until the special symbol (special figure 2) is changed once and stopped and displayed.

After shifting to the "breakthrough zone", the player plays a game by so-called "right-handed" in which a game ball is launched aiming at the second starting winning opening P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game area P501. Since the "breakthrough zone" is in a high base state, the movable body P771 of the ordinary electric accessory P770 provided in the second start winning opening P721 is likely to be in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, and the game ball is launched into the right area P501R. A game ball enters (passes) into the normal drawing opening P741, a normal symbol lottery is performed, the ordinary electric accessory P770 operates, and the second special symbol is entered by entering the second starting winning opening P721. A special symbol lottery based on (Special Figure 2) will be held.

In the "breakthrough zone", the high base state continues until the variation display of the second special symbol is completed. Therefore, once in the high base state and the maximum number of holdings of the second special symbol (in this embodiment). Only 4) can receive the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol having the "small hit" which is the lottery result that triggers the small hit V. Here, in the "breakthrough zone", a special symbol lottery (up to 5 times) of the second special symbol results in a big hit or a small hit, and the player makes a "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" (Fig. 21 (C). )) Is set to be about 45%. If the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol does not win (big hit, small hit) in the "breakthrough zone", the game shifts to "normal game (low probability / low base)" (Fig. 21 (Fig. 21 (Fig. 21)). D)).

When "Small hit V / Big hit (Special figure 2)" is completed, "Battle mode_Low probability / High base (Special figure 2: 6 times) + Maximum 4 remaining hold" or "Pseudo big hit_Low probability / High base" (Special figure 2: 95 times) + up to 4 remaining holdings ”(Fig. 21 (E), (H)).

Here, the point of whether to shift to "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot" as the specific gaming state to shift after "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" is the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is not a special symbol (stop display symbol) that triggered the execution of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". Decide whether to shift to "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot" depending on the game state when the hit fluctuation of the special symbol that triggered the execution of "small hit V / jackpot (special figure 2)" is started. doing.

Specifically, the variable display starts when the "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot" are controlled, and when the electric chew support function is in the high base state. In the case of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" triggered by the change of the special symbol that is the hit, "battle mode" after the end of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" (Fig. 21 (E)), and the fluctuation starts in the low base state where the electric chew support function is not operating. After the end of the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" triggered by the above, the game is controlled to shift to the "pseudo big hit" (FIG. 21 (H)).

"Battle mode_low probability / high base (special figure 2: 6 times) + remaining hold maximum 4" (details will be described later) is stopped after the second special symbol (special figure 2) changes 6 times. This is a specific game in which the high base state (operating state of the electric chew support function) continues until it is displayed. The player fires a game ball in the right area P501R in the same manner as in the "breakthrough zone", and until the second special symbol is displayed with fluctuations up to 10 times (6 times in the high base state + up to 4 times for the remaining hold). It is a specific game aiming to acquire "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" between the two (Fig. 21 (F)). If the second special symbol does not become a small hit V or a big hit in the fluctuation display of up to 10 times, it shifts to the "normal game (low probability / low base)" (FIG. 21 (G)).

"Pseudo jackpot_low probability / high base (special figure 2: 95 times) + remaining hold maximum 4" (details will be described later) is stopped after the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuates 95 times. This is a specific game in which the high base state (the operating state of the electric chew support function) continues until it is displayed. The player fires a game ball into the right area P501R in the same way as in the "breakthrough zone" and "battle mode", and the second special symbol is up to 99 times (95 times in the high base state + up to 4 times for the remaining hold). It is a specific game aiming to acquire "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" before the variable display is performed (Fig. 21 (I)). In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the probability of becoming a "small hit" is set to 1 / 9.1 in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, so that the probability of becoming a small hit is 10 times or more of this small hit probability. By the time the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, which is the number of times, is performed, it can be said that the small hit V or the big hit is substantially confirmed, but the "pseudo big hit" If the special symbol lottery result does not become "small hit" or "big hit" even if the second special symbol changes 94 times during the game, the mode shifts to the "battle mode" production mode ( FIG. 21 (J). Then, the variation of the 95th rotation of the "pseudo jackpot" is the same as the variation of the 6th rotation in the "battle mode", and the variation display of the 95th rotation and the variation display of a maximum of 4 times of the hold related to the second special symbol are displayed. If the result is not a "big hit" or a "small hit", the game shifts to "normal game (low probability / low base)" (FIG. 21 (G)). As a modification, the transition timing of the production mode to the "battle mode" may be set to an earlier timing. For example, the timing at which the variation display of the second special symbol is performed 89 times during the "pseudo jackpot". That is, it is also possible to set the timing to leave the same number of times as 6 times, which is the number of times the high base state is continued in the "battle mode".

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol is used as the end condition for each of the periods controlled by the specific games "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot". In addition to the end condition based on the number of times, it may be configured to end when the first special symbol is changed five times. The 95 times, which is the end condition of the specific game based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol of the "pseudo jackpot," is the first special, which is the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, which is the maximum duration of the electric chew support function under the current rules, 100 times. It is set so as not to exceed the specific game end condition of either the variable display of the symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol without satisfying, for example, the end condition of the specific game based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol. If is set to 3 times or the like, the period of the "pseudo jackpot" can be set to the time when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changed 97 times and stopped and displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment having the above game flow has a high probability of winning in a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot". Obtain a small hit V (or big hit) based on "hit" and get a large amount of balls by looping "battle mode" or "pseudo big hit" and "small hit V / big hit (Special Figure 2)". It is a game for the purpose of. In particular, "small hit" or "small hit" or "small hit" or "small hit" in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the digestion of up to 4 remaining pending games that occurred in the specific game of "breakthrough zone" and "battle mode", that is, after the end of the high base state. By acquiring the "big hit", the game shifts to the "pseudo big hit", which is a specific game in which the next small hit V (or big hit) is practically definite, and one small hit V (or big hit) is paid out. Since it is possible to acquire more, as a player's experience, depending on the acquisition timing of the small hit V (big hit) during the execution of the "battle mode", one small hit V (big hit) can be played, or a small hit can be obtained. It is possible to provide a game property in which the number of balls for two V (big hits) is different.

In the game flow (FIG. 21) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment described above, the second is set as the main end condition of the high base state in the "breakthrough zone", the "battle mode", and the "pseudo jackpot". The number of variable display of special symbols is set to 1, 6, and 94, respectively, but due to the balance between the entertainment and playability (specs) of the production side, the "breakthrough zone" and "battle mode" are in a high base state. Probability that the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, which is the end condition, is set to 4 times, which is the same as the number of holdings, or loops between "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot" and "small hit V / jackpot (special figure 2)". It is possible to adjust it to 10 times in order to increase the number of times (In addition, the probability of "small hit" in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol and "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" The number of rounds of special games performed in is also adjusted accordingly).

In such a modified example, if the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol, which is the end condition of the high base state, is less than the maximum number of holds related to the second special symbol, the winning is obtained in the lower base state. If the effect can be emphasized and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, which is the end condition of the high base state, is the same as the maximum number of holds related to the second special symbol, for example, "small hit V / big hit (small hit V / big hit ( You will be able to make it look like you will have two chances to become "Special Figure 2)". Further, if the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, which is the end condition of the high base state, is larger than the maximum number of holds related to the second special symbol, "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" in the high base state. It is possible to provide an entertaining production and gameplay that will entertain the game with the expectation that you will be able to acquire the game many times.

(Breakthrough zone)
Subsequently, the game control and the production contents in the "breakthrough zone" will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24.

In the "breakthrough zone", the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the high base state is performed once, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to a maximum of four pending second special symbols generated in the high base state is performed. This is a production mode corresponding to the period.

In the "normal game (low probability / low base)" (see Fig. 21), the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol becomes a "big hit", and when the "big hit (special figure 1)" is executed, the "big hit" is executed. The "breakthrough zone" is started after "(Special Figure 1)".

When the first variation display of the second special symbol is performed after the "breakthrough zone" is started, the effect display of the "hold charge effect" shown in FIG. 22 is started. The variation display of the first second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is about 60 seconds long with reference to the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for the breakthrough zone 1 variation) in the variation pattern lottery of the main control board P40. It is configured so that a time fluctuation pattern is selected, and a "hold charge effect" is executed from the start of the fluctuation to a period of about 30 seconds.

The "hold charge effect" prompts the player to generate a hold of the second special symbol during the effect display period of the "hold charge effect" and display the hold object P811 in the hold display area 810. It is a production. The "hold charge effect" is an effect (effect) displayed on the character and around the character displayed on the screen each time the hold object P811 is displayed (or every time a game ball enters the second start winning opening P721). ) The effect is configured to change so as to improve the degree of expectation for hitting, and the effect can also be urged to the player to increase the hold of the second special symbol by right-handed.

When the "hold charge effect" is completed in the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone", the second special symbol is continuously displayed in the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone". Based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the first fluctuation display and the pre-judgment information related to the holding of the second special symbol generated during the execution of the "hold charge effect", "small hit V / big hit (special) in the" breakthrough zone " An effect of notifying the result regarding whether or not "FIG. 2)" can be obtained (in this embodiment, "breakthrough zone battle effect", see FIG. 23) is performed.

The "breakthrough zone battle production" is a production that collectively notifies the lottery results (including prior judgment information) for up to 5 fluctuations in the "breakthrough zone", and is in a high base state (especially during the execution of the "hold charge production"). With regard to the hold of the second special symbol that has occurred, no direct notification regarding the result of the winning / failing lottery is performed other than the variable display of the simplified drawing P802. In addition, regarding the remaining hold of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" (hold of the second special symbol that is digested after the transition to the low base state), the special variation pattern table (special figure 2 remaining hold digestion) is performed on the main control board P40. It is configured so that a short fluctuation pattern of about 1 second is selected with reference to the fluctuation pattern table for use or the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern table at low base. In addition, as in "Breakthrough Zone Battle Production", all the winning / failing lottery results including the lottery result of this fluctuation display and the pre-judgment information of one or more holds where the fluctuation will start from the next time onward will be notified. The dramatic variation display performed by the variation display of 1 may be referred to as "summary variation".

If the hit fluctuation that triggers the small hit V (big hit) is executed during the five fluctuations of the "breakthrough zone", in the "breakthrough zone battle production", the "breakthrough zone battle" as shown in FIG. 24 "Victory effect" is displayed. The "breakthrough zone battle victory effect" is displayed if there is a "hit" in the remaining hold even if the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is "missing". In the example of FIG. 24, since the number of holds of the second special symbol on the simple hold display P814 is 1, the hold that started to fluctuate when there are two remaining holds of the second special symbol is a hit fluctuation. It shows that there was. In the "breakthrough zone battle victory production", if the result of the special symbol lottery is "small hit", the game ball enters (passes) the specific area P760 in the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game. ), Since it becomes a big hit (small hit V) for the first time, the display of the simple drawing P802 is not composed of doublets, and by displaying the "V" symbol that is not displayed as a normal decorative symbol, the small hit V Notify the player that the license has been obtained. Further, although not shown, if the hit fluctuation is not executed during the five fluctuations of the "breakthrough zone", the "breakthrough zone battle defeat effect" is executed.

When the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is completed, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state, but the gaming state changes from the high base state to the low base state. The transition timing is the timing when the variation display time of the second special symbol has elapsed, and the variation display timing of the second special symbol with respect to the first hold that has occurred as the remaining hold is delayed, so that the high base state is changed to the low base. After switching to the state, a waiting time for a certain period of time (a fixed time for the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment) is set, and the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" ends. Even if the normal electric accessory P770 of the second start winning opening P721 is activated just before, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is terminated during the standby period (“pseudo jackpot” and “battle” described later. The same applies to the final fluctuation of the high base state in "mode".) Therefore, there is a possibility that the ordinary electric accessory P770 of the second start winning opening P721 will operate even if the remaining hold is started to be digested and the second special symbol can be held further. Almost none as well as low probability / low base). Since the waiting time is set to a long time of about 6 seconds, "breakthrough zone battle production", "breakthrough zone battle victory production", and "breakthrough zone battle defeat production" are continuously executed even during the waiting time. Has been done.

Further, although detailed explanation is omitted, the second special that occurs after the "hold charge effect" is completed when there is no winning lottery result and pre-judgment information during the execution of the "hold charge effect". If a hit hold occurs for the hold related to the symbol, it is difficult to replace the production content from the "breakthrough zone battle defeat production", so by performing an alternative production different from the "breakthrough zone battle victory production", The player is notified of the acquisition of the right of small hit V (big hit).

In the "breakthrough zone", the effect display on the effect display device P80 related to the variation display of the first special symbol, which is not the main body of the game, is only the variation display of the simplified drawing P802, and the appearance of the effect is "breakthrough". The effect display that is recognized as highly relevant to the "zone" (such as the display of the notice effect related to the "breakthrough zone") is not performed. If it becomes a "big hit (Special Figure 1)" at the timing controlled by "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot", it is not "breakthrough zone" but "battle mode". It is also possible to control the transition to.

(Small hit V production and pseudo big hit)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 29, a small hit V (big hit) effect and an example of the effect related to the “pseudo big hit” effect will be described. The production example shown in FIGS. 25 to 29 is a production following FIG. 24, and is when the small hit V is won with the remaining hold of the "breakthrough zone", and the game shifts to the "pseudo big hit" as a specific game. , An example of the effect when the small hit V (big hit) is acquired again during the "pseudo big hit" is shown.

FIG. 25 urges the player to enter (pass) the game ball into the specific area P760 in the large winning opening P751 in order to operate the accessory continuous device during the small hit game of the small hit V. A display example of "V prize promotion effect" is shown.

In the "V prize promotion effect", an image imitating the game board P5 is displayed in the substantially central area of the screen, and an arrow image that draws an arc and an emphasized "V" are displayed on the image display imitating the game area P501. The character image of "" is overlaid while adding animation or the like. Further, on the right side of the screen, in addition to the right-handed notification P832, the V-winning promotion notification P837 is displayed, and the "V-winning promotion effect" is right-handed to the player from the entire displayed image and the large winning opening P751 (specification). It is an effect that encourages the player to enter the area P760).

In addition, if the game ball enters (passes) the specific area P760 in the large winning opening P751 during the execution of the "V winning promotion effect", that is, the "V winning effect" occurs, the "V winning effect" is performed. Is executed. As an example, the "V winning effect" is an effect in which the character display of "V" (V winning display P837) displayed at the lower right of the screen in FIG. 26 is displayed together with a predetermined sound effect and the light emitting effect of the effect lamp P82. Can be mentioned.

The "V prize promotion effect" can be displayed from the period called the "small hit start demo" of the small hit game to the execution of the round (special game) of the small hit game. Further, in the round (special game) of the small hit game of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the process of opening the large winning opening P751 for a short time (about 0.120 seconds) and closing it for about 1 second is repeated 13 times. Therefore, if there is no abnormality such as ball clogging with respect to the large winning opening P751 during opening for about 1.560 seconds, the opening mode is such that 10 game balls are almost certain to enter.

FIG. 26 is displayed during the execution of the winning combination operation start demo (big hit start demo), which is the timing when the small hit game in the small hit V ends and the game shifts to the big hit game state due to the operation of the accessory continuous operating device. This is a display mode of the "big hit type notification effect" that notifies the amount of balls to be ejected.

In the "big hit type notification effect" of FIG. 26, two icon displays (the big hit type icon 1P861 displayed as "BONUS" and the big hit type icon 2P862 displayed as "TWIN_BONUS") are displayed as the big hit type icon P860. ing. The jackpot type icon 1P861 displayed as "BONUS" is a small hit in the "breakthrough zone" due to the first fluctuation display of the second special symbol, that is, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that started to fluctuate in the high base state. It is an icon that is selected when it becomes V, and is an icon that suggests that the mode shifts to "battle mode" after one small hit V.

On the other hand, the big hit type icon 2P862 displayed as "TWIN_BONUS" is an icon selected by the small hit V when any of the four remaining holds in the "breakthrough zone" is a hit. As shown in 21, it is an icon suggesting that the game state (specific game) of the pseudo big hit is changed after the small hit V. In addition, during the "pseudo jackpot", the small hit V (or jackpot) acquired during the "pseudo jackpot" from the production of the small hit V (or jackpot) that triggered the transition to the "pseudo jackpot". Since a series of effects are executed up to the effect to be executed, as a player, as a player, two small hits V (or big hits) are ejected, and one small hit V (or big hits) is played. ) Will be produced as if it was acquired.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, in a part of the "breakthrough zone" and the "battle mode" (described later), one fluctuation of the second special symbol that started to fluctuate in a high base state and four remaining hold. Since the batch fluctuation is performed for the minute, the acquired small hit V is subjected to the "big hit type notification effect", and the player is given a small hit (big hit) in either the fluctuation that is the target of the summary fluctuation or the remaining hold. ) Is executed as an effect of notifying the player of whether or not it has become a big hit type notification effect. By checking the number of fluctuations displayed on the simplified drawing P802 and the simple hold display P814 during the execution of the summary fluctuation, it becomes obvious which one is selected in the "big hit type notification effect", but pachinko. If you are not a player who is familiar with the specifications of the gaming machine, you will be able to know the amount of balls you have earned for the first time in the "big hit type notification production".

FIG. 27 shows the small hit V (big hit) ahead of "TWIN_BONUS", which is a production related to the small hit V (big hit), which was executed as a hit with the remaining hold of the "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo big hit". It is a figure which shows the production example in). In the example of this figure, as shown by the round display P820 displayed on the right side of the screen, the two "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" executed across the "pseudo big hit" precede. It indicates that the fifth round of the small hit V to be executed (counting the small hit game as the first round) is being executed.

In the round display P820 shown in FIG. 27, the number of small hit V (big hit) rounds executed in advance within the “small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)” for two times in the right column, and the executed rounds The number is suggested, and the left column shows the number of rounds scheduled to be executed in the small hit V (big hit) acquired in the specific game "pseudo big hit". In FIG. 27, the left column of the round display P820 may not be a small hit V (big hit) during the "pseudo big hit". Therefore, the number of rounds of the small hit V (big hit) being executed is shown. Compared to the round display P820 in the right column to be displayed, the display is configured not to be clear, such as a semi-transparent display.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display during the “pseudo jackpot” which is a specific game. Although the special game is not in the special game state (during the big hit game or the small hit game) during the "pseudo big hit" of the specific game, the effect is displayed as if the special game is continuing.

In the production display example during the "pseudo jackpot" in FIG. 28, an animation in which a group of cat-shaped spherical objects move from the back side to the front side of the screen is displayed, and "TWIN_BONUS_V is waiting ..." at the top of the screen. Is displayed. In addition, the round display P820 also continuously displays the number of rounds of the small hit V (big hit) executed in advance within the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" for two times, and the left column of the round display P820. Is left in a semi-transparent state, indicating that a subsequent small hit V (big hit) is waiting. The production display during the "pseudo jackpot" is not limited to the one that always executes the same animation as shown in the example, and the player can select the content of the animation or the content of the BGM (musical piece) at any time. You may.

In addition, during the "pseudo jackpot", a small hit V (big hit) must be obtained by generating a ball into the second starting winning opening P721 and receiving a special symbol lottery for the second special symbol. It is necessary to have the player fire the game ball toward the right area P501R of the game area P501 even during the execution of the production of the "pseudo jackpot" that looks like between the rounds of the big hit. Therefore, as shown in the lower part of the production example of FIG. 28, in addition to the normal right-handed notification P832 that the character "continue right-handed", there is a production display that appeals that the game ball needs to be fired. It has become.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment motivates the player to continue right-handed while the “pseudo-big hit” in which the effect display looks like between rounds is being executed. The effect object P870 is displayed. In this example, as the setting suggestion effect object P870, an object similar to the cat-shaped sphere object of the animation of the "pseudo jackpot" effect is displayed to move from the right to the left of the screen so as to be easily distinguished from other objects. Is given as an example. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the display of the setting suggestion effect object P870 is a specification in which a display lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each set value for each ball entered in the second start winning opening P721, or a second special symbol. As a fluctuation effect for each fluctuation, there is a specification in which a display lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each set value.

The "pseudo jackpot" is a gaming state in which the high base state continues 95 times, but the main control board P40 refers to the special fluctuation pattern table (variation pattern table for pseudo jackpot) until the fluctuation display of 94 times. By doing so, the fluctuation pattern related to the second special symbol is configured so that a short-time fluctuation of about 0.5 seconds to 1 second can be easily selected. Since the small hit probability is 1 / 9.1, which is a very high probability, in most cases, a small hit (big hit) is obtained during 94 fluctuations in which short-term fluctuations are repeated. If the small hit (big hit) cannot be drawn until the fluctuation display of, the effect display during the "pseudo big hit" shown in FIG. 28 is stopped, and the final fluctuation of the high base state of the "battle mode" described later and the remaining 4 pending It shifts to the effect display state that is almost the same as the minute summary fluctuation. At this time, the display of "TWIN_BONUS" at the top of the screen and the big hit effect such as the round display P820 are also terminated.

In this way, the reason for shifting to the effect display state (effect mode) of the "battle mode" in the variation display at the 95th rotation is that the variation display of the second special symbol up to the 94th variation is likely to be selected for a short period of time. Due to the tendency, it is necessary to set the 95th rotation as a long-time fluctuation display so that the player can have a margin to generate a hold related to the second special symbol, while the 95th rotation is being displayed for a long time. As a production of, by effectively utilizing the production prepared in other production modes and performing production for the final fluctuation of the high base state and up to 4 remaining hold, it is as direct as possible to the player. The purpose is to give a taste.

FIG. 29 shows a small hit V (big hit) during the “pseudo big hit” (within 94 rotations), which is a specific game, and a small hit when the second “small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)” is executed. It is a production image that can be displayed during the winning game and the role-continuous operation start demonstration period. Because the small hit V (big hit) in the "pseudo big hit" and the small hit V (big hit) other than the summary fluctuation of the battle mode described later are specifications that shift to the "battle mode" after the small hit V (big hit). , The above-mentioned "big hit type notification effect" is not executed, and an alternative effect display such as a blessing image by the character is displayed. Further, when the second "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" is started, the round display P820 switches from a transparent state to a clear state. It should be noted that the timing at which the “V” indicating the small hit game on the round display P820 and the “◯” display indicating the big hit game become clear may be shifted. Specifically, when the small hit game is started, the display of "V" becomes clear, and when the game ball enters (passes) into the specific area P760 in the big winning opening P751, "○" indicating the big hit game. An example of clarifying the display of "" is given.

Further, as a modified example, as a lottery result of the second special symbol, a small hit V (big hit) having a different number of rounds and a small hit V (big hit) having a different type of specific game state after the end are provided. In that case, even for the small hit V (big hit) that was hit in the high base state, the number of rounds (ball output amount) of this small hit V (big hit) and the type of specific game after the end are notified. It may be configured to execute "big hit type notification effect".

As a modification of the production example during the "pseudo jackpot", in the production example shown in FIG. 28, the remaining number of games of the specific game during the "pseudo jackpot" display P841 is not displayed, but the rest of the specific game. The remaining number of games display P841 may be configured to be displayed as "remaining _10 times" at the timing when the number of games of is 10 or less, and the second "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". Regarding the round display P820 related to, when the number of remaining games of "pseudo jackpot" is small (when it becomes 10 times or less), or when the production mode is switched to "battle mode", the display mode becomes more unclear. Alternatively, it may be configured to be hidden.

As another modification of the effect example during the "pseudo jackpot", when it is determined from the prior determination information that the hit variation related to the second special symbol is held during the "pseudo jackpot", the effect is produced. The control board P41 is configured to immediately notify that a hold related to the second special symbol to be hit has occurred by using the effect display device P80, the effect lamp P82, the speaker P83, the effect accessory P560, and the like. , Even if a hold related to the second special symbol that is a hit occurs after notifying that a hold related to the second special symbol that is a hit has occurred, the same notification is continuously performed, or a more conspicuous production mode. It may be configured so that it can be notified that a plurality of winning rights have been acquired.

(Battle mode)
Subsequently, an example of the effect display of the “battle mode”, which is a specific game, will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the first half of the battle mode, and FIGS. 31 and 32 are examples of a summary variation effect relating to the final variation (sixth variation) in the high base state of the “battle mode” and a maximum of four remaining hold. It is a figure which shows.

《First half of battle mode》
FIG. 30 is an example of an effect display relating to the first half of the battle mode (1st to 5th variation of the second special symbol of the “battle mode”). The effect of the "battle mode" is an effect of notifying the player of the acquisition of a small hit V (big hit) depending on whether or not the ally character can defeat the enemy character.

Specifically, when the offense and defense of the ally character and the enemy character is developed for each fluctuation and the enemy gauge P883 becomes "0" (all disappeared), it becomes a small hit V (big hit). Is notified. In addition, a ally gauge is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and by increasing or decreasing using the result of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol that is changing and the advance judgment information regarding the hold of the second special symbol that is being held, a small hit Notify the player that the expectation of becoming a V (big hit) is increasing (or the expectation is low).

On the right side of the screen of the effect example shown in FIG. 30, the chance-up icon display P880 is displayed. The chance-up icon display P880 is determined by using the result of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol that is changing and the pre-judgment information regarding the hold of the second special symbol that is being held. Icon display suggesting that the chance-up effect will be displayed so that the ally character becomes dominant during the execution of the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbol or the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol from the next time onward. It has become.

Of the chance-up icon display P880, the item chance-up icon P881 is displayed in the upper row, and the character chance-up icon P882 is displayed in the lower row. The item chance up icon is an icon that suggests that the attack of the ally character becomes more advantageous (the enemy gauge P883 is likely to decrease), such as "attack power UP icon", "special move icon", and "weapon icon". The character chance-up icon P882 is an icon that suggests that a chance-up effect that raises the expectation of a big hit is generated by performing an effect related to an increase or decrease of the ally gauge P884 according to the appearing character.

The item chance-up icon P881 and the character chance-up icon P882, which are the chance-up icon display P880, have a plurality of icons, and are configured so that the expected degree of small hit V (big hit) can be different depending on the displayed type. However, if the higher icon is newly acquired in the place where the icon of 1 is displayed, the item chance up icon P881 or the character chance up icon P882 is updated and displayed to the icon acquired this time. It may be configured to do so.

Further, the item chance-up icon P881 and the character chance-up icon P882 may indicate the occurrence of different chance-up effects, and when a specific combination is displayed, the two icons act at the same time to expect a big hit. It may be configured to generate 1 large chance-up effect that greatly improves the degree.

《Battle mode second half: Summary fluctuation》
Next, an example of the "battle mode final fluctuation effect" that is executed for the high base state final variation (sixth variation) of the "battle mode" and the maximum of four remaining hold will be described.

The "battle mode final fluctuation production" is a production in which the winning / failing lottery results (including prior judgment information) for 5 fluctuations are collectively notified as in the production of the "breakthrough zone", and the production composition is the same as the production of the "breakthrough zone". , "Hold charge production (battle mode)" and "battle mode final battle production". For the 6th variation display of the 2nd special symbol of the specific game "Battle mode" in which the "battle mode final variation effect" is executed, refer to the special variation pattern table (battle mode final variation variation pattern table). A fluctuation pattern of about 1 minute is selected, and about 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation is composed of "hold charge effect (battle mode)", and after the end of "hold charge effect (battle mode)", "hold charge effect (battle mode)" is completed. Move to "Battle Mode Final Battle Production". As for the fluctuation display of the second special symbol for the remaining four reserved symbols, a fluctuation pattern of about 1 second is selected as in the "breakthrough zone".

In the "hold charge effect (battle mode)" shown in FIG. 31, an effect display is performed to urge the player to aim at the second start winning opening P721 and generate a hold related to the second special symbol (for example, the lower center of the screen). "Right-handed to accumulate power (hold) !!" is displayed closer to you). In addition, the ally gauge P884 moves from the lower left to the center of the screen, and by displaying the character string and the arrow of "CHARGE", the ally gauge P884 is accumulated (it is suggested that the jackpot expectation is high). ) To urge the player to hit right.

When the player generates a hold of the second special symbol according to the instruction of the "hold charge effect (battle mode)", the hold object P811 of the hold display area P810 displayed at the lower right of the screen has a "P" (Power). The hold object P811 written as (acronym) is displayed, or the hold object P811 of the chance mode suggesting the acquisition (stock) of the item chance up icon P881 (or the character chance up icon P882) is displayed. These accumulated hold objects display an effect on the ally gauge P884 and the chance up icon display P880 at a predetermined timing (for example, 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation) to increase or decrease the ally gauge P884 and increase the chance. Acquire (stock) the icon display P880.

As a further application example of the effect using the hold display area P810 of the "hold charge effect (battle mode)", the second start winning opening P721 is further reached under the situation where four hold of the second special symbol is accumulated. When the ball is entered, the hold object P811 once displayed can be changed to a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is higher (for example, from "P" hold to "P" hold with a flame effect, or a character chance up icon. It may be configured to perform an effect display (hold chance up effect) such as changing to (hold suggesting acquisition).

As another application example, the hold display area P811 is moved and displayed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method, and the hold object P811 that jumps out of the hold display area P811 while four second special symbols are held is generated. Depending on the mode of the above, the ally gauge P884 and the chance-up icon display P880 may be displayed so as to increase the expectation of a big hit.

When the "hold charge production (battle mode)" is completed, the process shifts to the "battle mode final battle production" shown in FIG. 32. "Battle mode final battle production" is a production display in which a ally character performs a special move, and among the five fluctuations of the final ally gauge P884 display mode and summary fluctuation of "hold charge production (battle mode)" Depending on whether or not there is a hit, the ally character attacks the enemy character according to the expected degree of the small hit V (big hit).

At this time, depending on the type of special move performed by the ally character, the player is urged to operate the effect button P381 to reduce the enemy gauge P883, and the effect content is changed according to the operation state of the effect button P381. It can be configured to be selected from several effect patterns, such as a button effect that can be used, or a result is displayed without the button effect. As for the types of button effects, there are "single press" effect that displays the result by operating the effect button P381 only once, "continuous hit effect" that displays the result by pressing the effect button P381 multiple times, and effect lever P382. It has a type such as "lever operation effect" to operate. In the "battle mode final variation effect" of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the effect pattern in which the button effect is not executed is configured to have a higher expectation, for example, in the "hold charge effect". An example is given in which the button effect is not executed when the hit is deterministically notified by the ally gauge P884 emitting light in rainbow colors.

As described above, it has been explained that if the small hit V (big hit) is not reached by the 94th rotation in the "pseudo big hit", the battle mode is set at the 95th rotation, but the 95 of the "pseudo big hit" The control of the rotation and the remaining hold (selection of the fluctuation pattern and the content of the effect) is the same as the summary fluctuation in the latter half of the battle mode. That is, in the 95th rotation of the "pseudo jackpot", the "hold charge effect (battle mode)" and the "battle mode final battle effect" are performed with a fluctuation of about 1 minute.

<< Example of using ally gauge P884 >>
The ally gauge P884 in the "battle mode" represents the energy of the ally character, and adopts an aspect that suggests that the larger the number, the higher the expectation of the small hit V (big hit). As a modification, the blank area and colored area of the ally gauge P884 displayed at the start of the fluctuation are inverted during the hold charge production of the summary fluctuation in the latter half of the battle mode, and the display of the ally gauge P884 is expected to be a big hit at the start of the summary fluctuation. It is possible to adopt a production method in which the lower the degree, the higher the expectation of hitting in the summary fluctuation (the last maximum 5 fluctuations in the battle mode).

By doing this, in the first half of the battle mode, the more ally gauge P884, the higher the expectation of a big hit, and at the timing when the second half of the battle mode starts (before reverse display), the less ally gauge P884, the more chances. It is possible to make a novel production display.

Further, by configuring in this way, for example, the character chance up icon P882 can be configured to display a character that reduces the ally gauge P884 of the ally character, and the character chance can be displayed in each of the first half and the second half of the battle mode. It is possible to create more interest in the dramatic interference (increase / decrease of the ally gauge P884) with the ally gauge P884 by the characters appearing in the up icon P882. For example, in the "hold charge effect (battle mode)", the character chance up icon P882 that suggests the decrease of the ally gauge P884 is made to appear, and after the effect of reducing the ally gauge P884 is performed, the reversal effect of the ally gauge P884 is performed. For example.

Here, some modifications that can be adopted for the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described. The modified examples described below may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment in combination with a plurality of modified examples.

(Modification example 1)
After executing "small hit V / big hit (Special Figure 2)", the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is controlled to either "battle mode" or "pseudo big hit" by "small hit V / big hit". (Special Figure 2) ”was adopted as a method of determining depending on the gaming state (base state) at the timing when the hit fluctuation is started.

In order to adopt the method in this embodiment, information such as a flag related to the special game to be executed when the result of the special symbol lottery performed at the start of the fluctuation is "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". In addition to setting, information related to the game state set as a specific game after the special game (“small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)”) (the number of times to control to the high base state and various set values) It is necessary to memorize the offset value for calling) together, which makes it feasible.

Here, as a modification 1 regarding whether the control is controlled to "battle mode" or "pseudo-big hit" after executing "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)", "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" is used. ) ”Is executed, a specification may be adopted in which it is determined whether the control is controlled to“ battle mode ”or“ pseudo jackpot ”after the stop display of the special symbol. As a specification to judge after the stop display of the special symbol, for example, the type of the specific game of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" at the time of V winning during the small hit game, which is the timing when the transition to the big hit is definite. There are specifications that determine.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, as described in this embodiment, the final high-base state of the "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot" executed as specific games. When the fluctuation is executed, the control for transitioning the gaming state (base state) when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped is adopted.

Therefore, as a modification 1, "a specification for determining after the stop display of a special symbol (a specification for determining the type of a specific game of" small hit V / big hit (special figure 2) "when winning a V during a small hit game)" By adopting it, it is the final fluctuation of the high base state such as the 1st fluctuation of the "breakthrough zone" and the 6th fluctuation of the "battle mode". When determining the type of specific game after executing "V / jackpot (Special Figure 2)", the determination is made under the condition that the base is controlled to a low base state, so that it is always advantageous for the player "pseudo jackpot". It becomes possible to control so that the transition to "" is obtained as a judgment result.

That is, as a player, when a hit is made when a high-expectation effect display is made in which a maximum of 5 fluctuations is executed as a collective fluctuation, the player always shifts to an advantageous specific game called "pseudo jackpot". Is guaranteed, and the "breakthrough zone battle production" and "battle mode final battle production" as productions that respond to fluctuations in summary should be provided as productions that attract the attention of the players and are highly interesting. Can be done.

(Modification 2)
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment employs a control method of changing the gaming state (base state) to the low base state in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol in the final fluctuation of the high base state, but the gaming state ( The timing for changing the base state) from the high base state to the low base state may be set to different timings.

Specifically, as a second modification, the timing for changing the gaming state (base state) from the high base state to the low base state in the final fluctuation of the high base state is "the change of the final fluctuation of the high base state is being displayed. 2 When the hold related to the special symbol reaches the upper limit value ”may be adopted.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, it is important to maximize the remaining hold when shifting from the high base state to the low base state in a specific game. Adopted a method to change the game state (base state) from the high base state to the low base state when the hold related to the second special symbol reaches the upper limit value while the change of the final fluctuation of the high base state is being displayed. However, the playability (the degree of advantage of the player) is not affected.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, the gaming state is shifted to the low base state when the stop display of the special symbol, which is the final fluctuation of the high base state, is displayed, and the symbol fixing time of the stop display of the special symbol is set to a long time. This prevented the situation where the normal electric accessory P770 was operating at the time of the first fluctuation after the transition to the low base state, but according to the specifications of the modified example 2, the special symbol was used. Since it is possible to make the normal electric accessory P770 difficult to operate first during the variable display without waiting for the stop display of the special symbol, the symbol fixing time at the time of the stop display of the special symbol can be shortened. become.

In addition, when the modification 2 is adopted and the symbol fixing time is shortened, the hold related to the second special symbol is intentionally set to just before the end of the fluctuation of the final fluctuation in the high base state, so that after the transition to the low base state. There is a concern that the normal electric accessory P770 will be activated at the start of the first fluctuation, but the timing of the end of the fluctuation can be selected by selecting multiple fluctuation patterns (variation display time) of the special symbol in the final fluctuation in the high base state. There is a method to avoid intentional capture by making it difficult to aim at, or by setting the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory P770 to 1 or 2 balls (preferably 1 ball) to enter the 2nd start winning opening P721. Can be considered.

(Modification example 3)
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is a small hit symbol that triggers a 10-round big hit (small hit V) as a small hit game (small hit V) executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit. Was selected, and as shown in FIG. 21, it was configured to be controlled so as to always shift to a specific game of either "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot". The number of rounds of the hit V may be configured to have a small hit symbol that executes a small hit V (big hit) of a number of rounds other than 10 rounds (for example, 4 rounds, 7 rounds, etc.), or a gaming state (base state). ), It may be configured to have a small hit symbol that does not activate the electric chew support function after the small hit V (big hit), that is, does not shift to the high base state.

When the configuration having the small hit symbol (referred to as "small hit symbol without time reduction" or "small hit symbol without support") that does not activate the electric chew support function after the small hit V (big hit) illustrated as the third modification is adopted, When the small hit symbol with no time reduction is displayed as stopped and the small hit V is executed, it becomes difficult to generate a hold related to the new second special symbol after the small hit V (big hit), and the continuous villa state is continued. Becomes difficult. In addition, when the small hit symbol without time reduction is configured to be won with a certain probability (for example, about 10% at the time of winning the small hit) in this way, the small hit itself is not excessively deteriorated in the performance of the consecutive villa. It is preferable to increase the winning probability and balance the ease of the consecutive villas.

On the other hand, by mixing such a time-saving small hit symbol, for example, there are two or more holds that trigger a small hit V in the hold related to the second special symbol and the second special symbol that are currently changing. If the first small hit V is a small hit symbol without time reduction and the symbol that triggers the subsequent small hit V is not a small hit symbol without time reduction, the gaming state that shifts after the subsequent small hit V is small without time reduction. The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, which does not have a hit symbol, was in "battle mode", whereas in the modified example 3, it was "pseudo-big hit". There is also the advantage that it can be attached.

In addition, when adopting the time saving small hit symbol, if the time saving small hit is won during the consecutive villa, if there is a remaining hold, the player is very interested in whether or not to win with the remaining hold. Can be considered. In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the remaining hold, which is the hold generated in the high base state, is digested is "Special Figure 2 Variable pattern table for remaining hold digestion" (or "Special Figure 2". It was configured so that a short-time fluctuation pattern was selected by the low-base special figure 2 fluctuation pattern table ”), but after executing the small hit V based on such a time-saving small hit symbol, the special fluctuation pattern By using the table, the fluctuation time of about 10 seconds to 1 minute is selected for each fluctuation, and the effect display regarding whether or not the small hit V (or big hit) is won for each fluctuation is not regarded as a summary fluctuation. It is preferable that the above is performed.

(Modification example 4)
In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, in the "breakthrough zone" and the "battle mode", a collective change is executed from the final change of the high base state to the change of up to 4 remaining pending states, and the high base state and the low We adopted a production specification that notifies which of the base states the small hit V (big hit) was obtained by the "big hit type notification effect", but in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the fluctuation is caused in the high base state. Since the specifications are such that the control of the specific gaming state after the small hit V (big hit) is different between the case of starting and the case of starting the fluctuation in the low base state, the small hit V (big hit) is the high base. It can also be considered preferable that the player can recognize whether the acquisition is in the state or the low base state as the effect content during the variable display of the second special symbol.

Therefore, as a modification 4, for the "breakthrough zone" and the "battle mode", the variation display of the second special symbol in the high base state in which the type of the specific game after the small hit V (big hit) is different, and the second in the low base state. 2 By adopting a method in which the effect display of different effect modes (a state in which at least a part of the effect display contents are different from each other) is executed by the variable display of the special symbol, either the high base state or the low base state can be executed. It can be configured so that it becomes clear to the player whether or not a small hit V (big hit) has been obtained.

<< Production example when transformation example 4 is adopted in the "breakthrough zone">>
In the "breakthrough zone" of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the "hold charge effect" and the "breakthrough zone battle effect" are displayed as effects for one fluctuation in the high base state and fluctuations for up to four remaining hold. However, when a method of separating the production in the high base state and the production in the low base state is adopted as in the modified example 4, the following production example can be examined.

That is, the interest in whether or not to acquire "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" after "big hit (special figure 1)" and shift to the consecutive villa state ("battle mode" or "pseudo big hit"). In the "breakthrough zone" where the number of battles increases, the contents of the production that separate the production of the high base state and the production of the low base state are the "hold charge & logo step-up production" that is carried out with one fluctuation of the high base state, and the remaining 4 holdings. The "remaining hold battle production" can be illustrated.

"Hold charge & logo step-up production" is a "small hit V / big hit (special figure) that triggers the transition to" battle mode "while encouraging the player to accumulate four holds in the" breakthrough zone ". It is a production that informs whether or not "2)" has been acquired. For example, "Put a game ball into the 2nd start winning opening and complete the" Battle Mode "logo! After the instruction "Battle mode" is displayed, the character string "Battle mode" is displayed, and "Battle mode" is displayed according to the entry into the second start winning opening P721 (occurrence of hold related to the second special symbol and over winning). The display mode of the character string of "" is gradually changed. , The color of the character string in the "battle mode" changes to blue, green, red, and gold, and finally the effect button P381 is operated to emit rainbow-colored light to notify the hit. The effect display is executed.

It can be exemplified that the “remaining hold battle effect” has the same effect mode as the “breakthrough zone battle effect” of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. At this time, it is also possible to execute an effect in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other in the collective fluctuation with respect to the maximum of four remaining hold. Further, it may be configured to execute an effect in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other for each remaining hold 1 change (the effect mode is the same as in the "first half of the battle mode"). In addition, when the maximum four fluctuations of the remaining hold are collectively regarded as the fluctuation, it is necessary to configure the fluctuation pattern related to the first special symbol of the remaining hold to be a special fluctuation pattern.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the high base state is off during the execution of "hold charge & logo step-up effect" and there is a hit in the pre-judgment information of the hold that is the remaining hold, the mode of logo step-up is performed. , After making the rainbow-colored mode (first definite notification) to notify the hit, add the characters "BURST!" To the character string of "battle mode" and make the character string of "battle mode_BURST!" In rainbow color. The mode to be displayed (second definite notification) may be displayable. When "Battle mode_BURST!" Is displayed, the process proceeds to "Remaining hold battle production" and the player is in a state of waiting for a change. In addition, after the first confirmation notification, the player may stop firing the game ball toward the second start winning opening P721, and there is a possibility that the step cannot be advanced. The second definite notification may be executed without going through the definite notification, or the effect button P381 is operated at the end of the effect regardless of whether or not the rainbow color (first definite notification) is reached. May be generated and promoted to the second definite notification.

<< Example of production when transformation example 4 is adopted in "battle mode">>
Next, in the "battle mode" of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, a specific game that shifts after a special game (big hit, small hit V) depending on the timing of acquiring "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". As an effect to notify whether is "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot", the effect mode in the high base state and the effect mode in the low base state are separated, and at least a part of the effect is displayed differently. A method (modification example 4) for making it easier for the player to understand the type of the specific game after the special game will be described.

In the "battle mode" of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the "battle mode first half" is produced in the first to fifth fluctuations in the high base state, and the final fluctuation in the high base state is the sixth fluctuation, which is low. It is composed of "hold charge production (battle mode)" and "battle mode final battle production" that are performed with a maximum of 4 remaining hold changes that are displayed in a variable state in the base state. In the case of "battle mode", the "battle mode first half" effect is performed from the 1st fluctuation to the 6th fluctuation (final fluctuation) in the high base state, and the fluctuation display of up to 4 pending movements that are displayed in the low base state is displayed. Summary It is possible to execute the "battle mode final battle production" which is a fluctuation.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, a special variation pattern is selected by the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for battle mode final variation) for the variation display of the special symbol which is the final variation in the high base state. However, in the modified example 4, since the specification is such that a maximum of four remaining holdes are targeted and the fluctuation is executed collectively, it is related to the hold of the second special symbol that is first digested in the low base state. When the variation display is performed, the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for final variation in battle mode) is configured to select a special variation pattern.

In addition, when the "battle mode" adopting the modification 4 is executed, the game state is a low base state because the timing of executing the summary change is after the start of the change of the remaining hold related to the second special symbol. It is already in a state where the hold cannot be accumulated. Therefore, in the case of the "battle mode" in which the modification 4 is adopted, the "hold charge effect (battle mode)" is not included as the effect of the fluctuation. However, if the hold related to the second special symbol is not generated by the end of the sixth fluctuation in the high base state, the probability that the player can obtain "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" is significantly reduced. Therefore, it is necessary to urge the player to generate a hold related to the second special symbol in the sixth variation in the high base state.

Therefore, in the "battle mode" that adopts the modification 4, in the final fluctuation (sixth fluctuation) in the high base state, the "battle mode first half" production, which is the same production mode production from the first fluctuation to the fifth fluctuation, is performed. While being executed, in order to give the player a grace period to cause a hold related to the second special symbol, a special variation pattern table (“variation pattern table for final variation in the first half of the battle mode”) is used from 30 seconds. It is configured to display the fluctuation of the special symbol for about 40 seconds, and in the final fluctuation (6th fluctuation) in the high base state, it suggests the number of holdings related to the current 2nd special symbol, and the 2nd start winning opening P721. Execute the "second special symbol hold increase promotion effect" that encourages the player to enter the ball.

The "second special symbol hold increase promotion effect" is a "battle mode first half" effect in a situation where the effect display device P80 displays the "battle mode first half" effect in the same manner as up to the fifth variation in the high base state. An arrow image having a display area section corresponding to the hold related to the second special symbol divided into four, for example, in the lower right direction of the screen of the effect display device P80 (near the second start winning opening P721). Is displayed, and each time a hold related to the second special symbol occurs, the display area section divided into four is changed to a mode indicating "with hold". Further, in addition to the arrow image, a character or a message "Aim at the second start winning opening!" May be displayed to encourage the player to enter the second starting winning opening P721. , When there are four reservations related to the second special symbol, characters such as "OK" and "ready" may be displayed to notify that the purpose has been achieved.

Further, in the "second special symbol hold increase promotion effect", the pre-judgment information is used for the four-divided display area section of the arrow image indicating the existence of the hold, as in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. Then, an effect (see FIG. 31) such as displaying an image for acquiring the icon displayed on the chance-up icon display P880 as a hold image may be executed.

(Modification 5)
In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" is composed of only 10 rounds, but the special symbol that triggered the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" It is also possible to make it possible to execute "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" having a different number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds and 7 rounds) depending on the stop display mode of.

At this time, the number of rounds is estimated depending on the effect display during the variable display of the special symbol that triggers "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)", the start demonstration effect of the small hit game, or the stop display mode of the special symbol. It is possible to confirm the hit as a look-ahead effect, or configure a look-ahead effect with an extremely high expectation of hit to be feasible for the subsequent hold during the execution of the hit fluctuation, or to confirm multiple hits ( Alternatively, if a look-ahead effect with a high hit expectation is configured to be executable for multiple holds at the same time, it is determined that the preceding "small hit V / big hit (Special Figure 2)" is a hit with a small number of rounds. In some cases, the V prize is not intentionally given, and the subsequent "small hit V / big hit (Special Figure 2)" is intentionally executed in a low base state, so that the hit of a small number of rounds is discarded and the subsequent hit It is presumed that a strategy (illegal game) in which the subsequent game state is confirmed as a real hit can be executed.

As a countermeasure against these strategies (illegal games), if you have already obtained information that will be a hit as pre-judgment information or information on the special symbol lottery result related to this fluctuation display, the newly generated second special symbol is suspended. There is a ball entering (passing) into the specific area P760 in the small hit game regardless of the stop display mode of the special symbol, and the pre-reading effect is not executed based on the pre-judgment information for. The lottery may be configured to be performed at the same timing.

(Modification 6)
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment wins with either hold in the final change of the high base state of the "breakthrough zone" and the "battle mode" in which the summary change is executed, and the change display for a maximum of 4 remaining holds ( When it becomes a small hit), the variation display of the special symbol in the high base state is hit in the "big hit type notification effect" executed in the special game start demo of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". It was configured to notify whether it was a (small hit) or the variation display of the special symbol in the low base state was a hit (small hit). By displaying the contents of the effect that the ally character repeats a specific special move to defeat the enemy character, etc., or by performing the promotion effect of the decorative pattern, the remaining hold is up to 4 variable display (small hit) It may be configured to notify that has become.

If it is notified that a hit (small hit) has occurred within the fluctuation display of the maximum of 4 remaining hold before executing the "big hit type notification effect", the "big hit type notification" is notified. The jackpot type icon P860 of "effect" may be displayed as "TWIN_BONUS", or an alternative effect display may be executed for the period during which the "big hit type notification effect" is executed.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine P of the modified examples 1 to 6 configured as described above, "small hit V" is adopted as the specifications (specs) of the gaming machine, and the base is high. We adopted a method of changing the type of specific game that shifts to after that (after the big hit game) depending on whether the small hit V (big hit) was obtained in the state or the low base state, but similar game characteristics, That is, "a big hit depends on whether the timing of the big hit in the special symbol lottery of the random value (random value of the second special symbol) acquired with the start port of the ordinary electric accessory as a trigger is the high base state or the low base state. As long as the specifications of the gaming machine can provide "a game property that makes the type of the specific game later different", it is possible to carry out similar control and effect with respect to the control and effect contents as described in this embodiment and each modification. Needless to say.

As an example of the specifications of a gaming machine that can provide similar game characteristics, a gaming machine in a low probability band in which the jackpot probability at the time of low probability (when the probability fluctuation function is not activated) is set to about 1/100. A V-ST machine (ST10 times) with a jackpot probability of 1/18 when the probability is high (when the probability fluctuation function is activated), and the number of continuations of the high base state of "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot" Examples of game machine specifications of 1, 6, and 100 times can be exemplified.

In the case of such specifications, a special period in which the special figure 1 is drawn with a high probability may occur even after the end of the "breakthrough zone", but the period may be a special production period (for example, low probability / It can also be set as a period of stay in the production mode that does not occur in the low base state). Since the 11th and subsequent fluctuations of the pseudo jackpot are in a low probability / high base state, the probability of not being able to win the jackpot during the "pseudo jackpot" is higher than that of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, which is high. Since it is not a stochastic state, it is not appropriate to shift to the "battle mode" just before the end of the "pseudo jackpot", so it is preferable to configure the screen so that the end effect is generated while the "pseudo jackpot" screen remains.

[Second Example]
The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the above-mentioned prerequisite technology and the basic configuration of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite technology and the present embodiment will be mainly described, and the common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as the prerequisite technology or the elements described in this embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that employs the “small hit V” as in the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is 100%, and "a hold related to the second special symbol occurs. Or "The game ball enters with the normal electric accessory 770 provided in the second start winning opening P721 open to win the normal symbol lottery", that is, the big hit game (including the small hit V). It indirectly means the acquisition of the right to execute.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment generates a special period in which it is easy to enter the second starting winning opening P721 related to the acquisition of the right of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Based on the hold related to the second special symbol generated in the special period, the big hit game (small hit V) is executed for the number of holds corresponding to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment has the potential to continuously execute a plurality of large hit games (small hit V) and acquire a large number of game balls at one time. It is possible to provide game characteristics to players (* because the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment adopts the second special symbol priority digestion control).

The following are three implementations that constitute the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, which is more interesting by changing the possibility of holding the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol for a special period. An example will be described, but before that, a basic configuration in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment will be described.

(Board composition)
FIG. 33 is a diagram conceptually showing an example of a board surface configuration (arrangement of winning devices) that can be adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment.

An opening is formed in the substantially center of the game area P501 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment so that the effect display device P80 can be visually recognized, and a frame member of a center decoration unit (not shown) is formed in the opening. Attached, it constitutes an inner partition of the gaming area P501.

Below the effect display device P80, a first start winning opening P711A into which a game ball flowing down the game area (left side area P501L) on the left side of the effect display device P80 enters is provided, and further below the effect display device P80 is not shown. An out port P790 is provided. Further, a general winning opening P731 is arranged in the lower region of the left side region P501L of the effect display device P80. That is, when a game ball is launched into the game area on the left side of the effect display device P80, the ball is entered into the first starting winning opening P711A or the general winning opening P731, and it can be expected that a winning will occur. There is.

On the other hand, in the game area (right area P501R) on the right side of the effect display device P80, as shown in FIG. 711B, a large winning opening P751 is arranged, and a game ball launched toward the game area on the right side of the effect display device P80 can win a prize.

Here, the first starting winning opening P711A and the first starting winning opening P711B are starting winning openings for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and the second starting winning opening P721 is the first. 2 It is a starting prize opening to acquire the right to the special symbol lottery of special symbols. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, regardless of whether the game ball is launched toward either the left side region P501L or the right side region P501R of the game area P501, the first start winning opening P711A and the first starting winning opening P711B is configured so that the right of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol can be acquired.

(spec)
The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that adopts the “small hit V” as in the present embodiment, and the major difference from the present embodiment regarding the playability (game property) is the second. The probability of becoming a "small hit" or "big hit" in the special symbol lottery of the special symbol is 100%, and the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is the right of the big hit game (small hit V). It's different.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment also performs a specific game (high base state) by activating the electric chew support function (electric support) function after various big hits (including small hit V) as in the present embodiment. Although it is executed, as a condition for ending the specific game (high base state) in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, "variation based on the specified number of special symbol lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol". It is said that "the display has ended" or "the big hit game (small hit V) is executed". For example, when the specified number of times is set to one, one variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. It is configured so that the high base state can be terminated even if it is done.

Although not described in detail, other design values (big hit probability, number of prize balls of various winning openings, etc.) are not limited to those described in this embodiment, and are appropriately set according to the game characteristics. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, it is preferable to adopt the second special symbol priority digestion control, and the reason will be described later.

(Progress procedure of the game)
Subsequently, the procedure for playing the game on the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment and the progress of the game will be described. Here, in order to simplify the explanation, the end condition of the specific game (high base state) will be described with the "specified number of times" as one time.

First, the player operates the handle P204 to launch the game ball toward the game area (left side area P501L) on the left side of the effect display device P80. The game ball launched in the left area P501L enters the first starting winning opening P711A, the right of the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol is generated, and the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, the player increases the operation amount of the handle P204 and directs the game ball toward the game area (right area P501R) on the right side of the effect display device P80. Fire a game ball. The game ball launched into the right area P501R during the big hit game wins a prize in the big winning opening P751 and the first starting winning opening P711B. At this time, if a game ball is launched toward the big winning opening P751 during the big hit game, at least one ball is configured to win the first starting winning opening P711B, and the first one during the big hit game. It is configured to give rise to the right to draw special symbols for special symbols. Since the jackpot game is controlled to a low base state (non-electric chew support state), there is almost no possibility of winning a prize in the second starting winning opening P721 related to the ordinary electric accessory P770.

When the jackpot game ends and the specific game (high base state) is started, if there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, it is related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol that occurred during the jackpot game. The variable display is started. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, since the second special symbol priority digestion control is adopted, if a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurs at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot is hit. After the end, the variable display related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is started.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, in the specific game (high base state) after the big hit ends, the fluctuation that becomes a big hit in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, or the small hit in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. When a fluctuation that becomes a big hit is started, a short-time fluctuation pattern (variation time) such as 1 second is selected by a fluctuation pattern lottery, and a big hit game (small hit V) is executed immediately after the end of the big hit.

On the other hand, in a specific game (high base state), when a fluctuation display (disengagement fluctuation) in which the result of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is "missing" is started, a long-term fluctuation pattern (for example, 100 seconds) ( The fluctuation time) is determined by the fluctuation pattern lottery, and the high base state will continue for a period of about 100 seconds until the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment aims at the operating port P741 during the period during which the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol in the specific game is executed (hereinafter, may be referred to as “specific period”). By playing a game of firing, the normal electric accessory 770 provided in the second start winning opening P721 is opened by a normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is won in the second starting winning opening P721 to specify for 100 seconds. Accumulating the right of a big hit game (small hit V) during a period is the main game property (game property) for acquiring a large number of game balls in a specific game.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the probability of becoming a "hit" in the normal symbol lottery in the high base state is set to, for example, 1/20, and the normal symbol lottery (missing) related to one normal symbol lottery is performed. The time of one cycle of the variable display period of the symbol or the variable display period of the ordinary symbol related to one ordinary symbol lottery (win) and the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory is about 5 seconds, and it is about 100 seconds in a specific period. It is possible to carry out 20 ordinary symbol lottery. In addition, as the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 770, "elapse of the opening time of the specified time" or "winning of one game ball" is defined, and the "win" of one ordinary symbol lottery is the first. 2 Starting winning opening P721 can be entered with one game ball, that is, one "hit" in the normal symbol lottery corresponds to one acquisition of the right to the big hit game (small hit V). ..

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, a new special symbol lottery is not executed in a specific period of the specific game, and a big hit (small hit V) depends on whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won in the specific period. Since the presence or absence of the right of) changes, the effect display device P80 displays a pattern for notifying the result of the ordinary symbol lottery as a decorative symbol P801, and gives the player the right of a big hit (small hit V). It notifies the occurrence of a state in which it can be acquired (an open state of the ordinary electric accessory 770 provided in the second start winning opening P721).

If a hold related to the special symbol lottery of one or more second special symbols occurs in a specific period (the period during which the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol in the specific game is executed), after the end of the specific period, The special symbol lottery of the second special symbol and the big hit game (small hit V) are repeatedly executed as many times as the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

When all the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that occurred in the specific period is gone and the last big hit game (small hit V) is finished, the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol in the specific game (high base state) is again. The fluctuation display related to is started and a specific period occurs again. If the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained in the specific period, the specific game ends and the game returns to the normal game.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, which proceeds as described above, by setting the second special symbol priority digestion control, the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol generated in a specific period is continuously digested. However, by continuously executing the big hit game (small hit V), the acquisition period of the game balls can be condensed in a short period of time, and it becomes easier to get the feeling that a large number of game balls have been acquired. Have.

If the first special symbol priority digestion control or the ball entry order digestion control is used, the first start winning opening P711B during the period when the game ball is launched into the right area P501R in the specific game or the big hit game (small hit V). The period until the next big hit game (small hit V) occurs after a specific period occurs again under the situation that the ball is entered into the ball and the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is suspended. It will take a long time, and there is a risk that it will be difficult to feel that a large number of game balls have been acquired as a player. It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment does not deny the change to the first special symbol priority digestion control or the ball entry order digestion control, and if these controls are installed, the second special A specific period can be generated when there is a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the symbol, the period during which the game can be played in the specific period increases, and it becomes easier to obtain the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. There is also a merit.

As described above, the pachinko game of the second embodiment, which is a pachinko gaming machine that is expected to acquire a large number of game balls by performing one or a plurality of big hit games based on one or a plurality of holds generated in a specific period. Although the machine P has been described, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, which has been further applied to enhance the interest, will be described below based on three examples.

In the normal electric accessory control, an effective extension period for detecting residual spheres inside the electric accessory is set after the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 770 is satisfied. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the example, the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is the right of the jackpot game (small hit V), and one jackpot game (small hit) for the hit of the ordinary symbol lottery in a specific period. Since the design intention is to grant the right of hit V), when the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 770 is satisfied, the valid extension period may not be set (especially "1 ball". It is preferable to control in this way when the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 770 is completed when the "winning of the game ball" is established, and the effective extension period may be set in the "elapsed specified opening time").

[Example 2-1]
The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36 as a first application example (2-1 embodiment). FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-1 embodiment, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the big hit (small hit) symbols of the 2-1 embodiment, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the big hit (small hit) symbols. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of an effect of a long-time chance state of the 2-1 embodiment, and FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of an ordinary electric accessory opening effect of the 2-1 embodiment.

The feature of the second embodiment is the length of the specific period (the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol) that occurs after the big hit (small hit) with respect to the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment. The point is that it differs depending on the type of special symbol that triggered the execution of the big hit (small hit) immediately before the occurrence of a specific period.

With this configuration, it is possible to create a state in which the probability of being able to generate a hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol during a specific period is different, and the expectation for the consecutive villa (again). , Expectation that a specific period will be given after the big hit) and multiple expectations for the number of holds (rights related to the occurrence of big hit / small hit) related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol The state can be provided to the player for a specific period, a change is given as a game of the specific game, and a highly entertaining pachinko machine can be provided.

Hereinafter, the details of the second embodiment will be described. The board configuration (arrangement of winning devices, etc.) of the gaming machine will be described as being the same as that of the second embodiment, but can be appropriately changed as long as the gaming described below can be configured.

(Game flow)
First, with reference to FIG. 34, the game flow (transition of the gaming state) will be described with respect to the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment.

The normal game (low probability / low base state) is a game state in which the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is the main game, and the player plays a game in the game area (left area P501L) on the left side of the effect display device P80. Aim to win a big hit by launching a ball, inserting a game ball into the first starting winning opening P711A, and winning a big hit by a special symbol lottery of the first special symbol.

In a normal game, when a big hit is obtained (Fig. 34 (A)), a "big hit (special figure 1)" is executed, and depending on the type of special symbol for which the big hit is executed, a "short chance state" is executed after the big hit game. , "Long-term chance state" (FIGS. 34 (B), (E)).

FIG. 35 shows the result of the symbol lottery (at the time of big hit) in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, when a big hit is obtained by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, either "special figure 1_big hit symbol A" or "special figure 1_big hit symbol B" is obtained by the symbol lottery. Is now selected. Although only two types of symbols are shown in FIG. 35, they are roughly classified according to the type of the jackpot to be executed and the type of the specific game after the jackpot, and are actually the first special symbol display device. There may be two or more types of symbols that are stopped and displayed on P51.

The "special figure 1_big hit symbol B" shown in FIG. 35 is a big hit symbol in which the "short-time chance state" is executed as a specific game after the big hit game, and the "special figure 1_big hit symbol A" is a big hit game. It is a jackpot symbol in which a "long-time chance state" is executed later as a specific game.

《Short chance state》
When the game shifts to the "short-time chance state" after the "big hit (special figure 1)", the first special symbol based on the entry into the first starting winning opening P711B arranged in the right area P501R when the big hit game is executed. When the first special symbol lottery is performed based on the hold related to the special symbol lottery of, or the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol remaining before the big hit game, and the first special symbol lottery is missed. As a specific period, a one-minute chance state (low probability / high base state) occurs.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, when the player launches a game ball into the right region P501R in the chance state (low probability / high base state) and the game ball passes through the operating port P741, a normal symbol is displayed. A lottery will be held. At this time, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery is displayed as a stop display symbol of the ordinary symbol after the variable display of the ordinary symbol for 1 minute is performed by the ordinary symbol display device P53, and the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is "winning". If it is, the normal electric accessory 770 is opened, and the ball can be entered into the second start winning opening P721. Then, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening P721, after a lapse of a specific period, a big hit or a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". (Fig. 34 (D)). When the result of the normal symbol lottery in the chance state is "missing", or when the normal symbol lottery is "winning" but the ball does not enter the second start winning opening P721, it is "normal". It shifts to "game (low probability / low base state)" (Fig. 34 (C)).

In the "short-time chance state", one normal symbol lottery is performed during the 1-minute chance state (low probability / high base state), which is a specific period, and "small" depending on whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. Distribution is performed to "hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" or "normal game (low probability / low base state)". The winning probability of the normal symbol lottery of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment is set to 1 / 3.3, and in the "short-time chance state", "small hit V / big hit (special figure). The probability of being able to shift to "2)" is 30% (see "Continuation rate" in Fig. 35 "Special figure 1_Big hit symbol B").
After the execution of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)", the state shifts to the "long-time chance state" (Fig. 34 (G)).

《Long time chance state》
The "long-time chance state" shifts to after "big hit (special figure 1)" (Fig. 34 (E)) or after "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" (Fig. 34 (G)). It is a specific game, and it is a specific period in which the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol after the start of the specific game is missed and the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed.

The duration of a specific period of the "long chance state" differs depending on the type of special symbol that triggered the execution of the big hit game (small hit V) that was executed immediately before the transition to the "long chance state". A specific period (variation of the first special symbol) is executed with a duration of 1 minute, 6 minutes, or 9 minutes. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, in the case of "Special Figure 1_Big Hit Symbol A" and "Special Figure 2_Big Hit / Small Hit Symbol A", the duration of the specific period is 5 minutes, and "Special Figure 2_" In the case of "big hit / small hit symbol B", the duration of the specific period is set to 6 minutes, and in the case of "special figure 2_big hit / small hit symbol C", the duration of the specific period is set to 9 minutes.

In the "long-time chance state" as well as in the "short-time chance state", a normal symbol lottery is performed by entering the game ball into the operating port P741 arranged in the right area P501R, and one normal symbol lottery is performed. Around this time, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for 1 minute is performed by the normal symbol display device P53. That is, if the duration of the specific period is 5 minutes in the "long chance state", 5 ordinary symbol lottery can be received, and if the duration of the specific period is 9 minutes, 9 ordinary symbols can be received. You can take a lottery.

In the "long chance state", if a "hit" is obtained by a normal symbol lottery and a game ball can be entered into the second start winning opening P721 based on the opening of the normal electric accessory 770, After the lapse of a specific period, the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is exhausted, and the big hit or small hit is won by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and "small hit V / big hit (special symbol 2)" (Fig. 34 (F)). In addition, even after the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurs, as long as the specific period continues, it is possible to receive the ordinary symbol lottery, and it is related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It is possible to accumulate (stock) the right to execute a big hit or a small hit for the maximum number of holds.

In the "long chance state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol was explained as 1 minute, but when the normal symbol is a hit, the normal electric accessory 770 is activated (opened) after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (for example, 55 seconds), which is slightly shorter than the deviation fluctuation, may be designed so that one cycle including the operation period of the normal electric accessory 770 is completed in about 1 minute.

If a hold related to the special symbol lottery of one or more second special symbols occurs in the "long chance state", the second special symbol will be displayed in "small hit V / big hit (special diagram 2)". The "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" of the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved pieces accumulated (stocked) as a hold is executed. When "small hit V / big hit (Special Figure 2)" is repeated multiple times, each time it internally shifts to the same low probability / high base state as the long-time chance state, but the second The variable display time of the big hit (small hit) based on the special symbol drawing of the special symbol is set to 1 second, and "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" resumes immediately after the big hit game (small hit V) ends. Will be done.

Therefore, for "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)", a big hit effect called "STOCK-BONUS" is executed, and the big hit effect is continuously executed until there is no hold regarding the special symbol drawing of the second special symbol. Even in a situation where the player is internally in a "long chance state", the effect for a specific period is not executed, and the effect for notifying that a big hit (small hit V) is continuously generated is performed. Run.

In the "long chance state", if the normal symbol lottery is executed 5 to 9 times and all of them are "missing", or even though the normal electric accessory 770 is opened, the second start prize is won. If the ball does not enter the mouth P721, the game returns to the "normal game (low probability / low base state)".

Although not shown in FIG. 34, in the "short-time chance state" or "long-time chance state", when the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol becomes a "big hit", the fluctuation time is 1 second. Is set to, and "big hit (special figure 1)" is executed without a specific period. In the "long-time chance state" and "short-time chance state", if the special symbol that becomes a big hit or a small hit is displayed in a variable manner by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, strictly speaking. Has a specific period of 1 second, during which a variable display of the normal symbol may be performed based on the entry into the operating port P741 or the hold related to the normal symbol lottery.

However, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, even if the result of the normal symbol lottery is "hit", it must be in a high base state (electric chew support state) at the timing when the stop display is made. For example, the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 770 is not opened in such a manner that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening P721, and there is almost no possibility of entering the second starting winning opening P721. It is configured as. Therefore, even if the normal symbol lottery becomes a "hit" due to the big hit fluctuation (small hit fluctuation) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the "long-time chance state" or the "short-time chance state", one minute later. Is after the stop display of the special symbol and the big hit game is being executed, so it has shifted to the low base state, so "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" and "long time chance" It is configured so that a new hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol does not occur during the hit fluctuation period of the special symbol in the "state" or the "short-time chance state".

In addition, in the "long-time chance state", if a big hit is obtained by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, the game shifts to "big hit (special figure 1)", and this big hit is "special figure 1_big hit symbol". If it is based on "B", it will shift to a disadvantageous "short-time chance state", and there is a risk that the player may feel that he has suffered a disadvantage. In order to prevent such disadvantages, if the "special figure 1_big hit symbol B" is won in the "long-time chance state" or the "short-time chance state", the game after the "big hit (special figure 1)". The state may be controlled to be a "long-time chance state" (specific period 5 minutes).

(Example of directing a long chance state)
FIG. 36 shows an example of the production in the “long-time chance state” of the gaming state (the gaming state in which the jackpot game is most likely to be acquired) that is most advantageous to the player in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment. .. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, "4 consecutive battle productions" are performed in the "long chance state" (when the specific period is "5 minutes" and the normal symbol lottery is the "long chance state". When executed 5 times in a row after the start of).

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment has N times during a specific period (N minutes) during which the first special symbol of the specific game, which is in a low probability / high base state, is out of alignment. The normal symbol lottery can be received, and in the "long chance state" when the specific period is 5 minutes, one normal symbol production is performed for each normal symbol lottery, and the second -1 In the pachinko gaming machine P of the embodiment, four "battle productions" and one "final chance" production (a production common to the short-time chance state) are executed.

The screen example of FIG. 36 shows a state in which the third "battle effect" of the "four consecutive battle effects" is being executed. More specifically, the production mode title of "continuous battle" indicating that the production is "4 consecutive battles" is displayed on the production mode display P840 on the upper left side of the screen, and the remaining number of games display P841 is currently the third time. "Battle production" is being executed, which indirectly suggests to the player that there are two remaining "battle productions" (including the third) and "final chances".

At the lower right of the screen, two holding objects P811 are displayed in the holding display area P811, indicating that two holdings related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol have been acquired.

An image of the characters facing each other is displayed in the center of the "Battle effect" screen, and depending on whether or not the player-side character placed on the right side can defeat the enemy character on the left side, a normal pattern is displayed. Notify whether the result of the lottery is "win" or "miss".

A simple design P802 is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, the result of a normal symbol lottery is displayed on the simple design P802 as a decorative design. The simple drawing P802 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery, and if it is a "hit" and is stopped and displayed in doublets, it may be illusion that a big hit has been won at that time. For example, "3V3" may be configured to notify that the result of the normal symbol lottery is "hit" in a mode in which the "V" symbol is stopped and displayed in the center. In addition, during the production of "4 consecutive battles", the result of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is not notified by the decorative symbol because the first special symbol is out of alignment, but it is a simple for the special symbol lottery. The drawing P802 may be separately easily displayed.

A right-handed notification P832 is displayed as a separate notification P830 below the simple design P802 of the normal symbol. In the "long-time chance state" and the "short-time chance state", it is necessary to enter the operation port P741 and receive a normal symbol lottery for a limited time during the fluctuation display period of the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol. , In order to prevent a specific period from elapsed without receiving the normal symbol lottery as many times as the design intended, control regarding fluctuation of the normal symbol or operation of the normal electric accessory 770 during the special symbol fluctuation display period. When the control for You may make a notification to urge you to do so.

In the "battle effect", when the player-side character wins, the "ordinary electric accessory opening effect" is performed as shown in FIG. 37. In the "ordinary electric accessory opening effect", an image imitating the second start winning opening P721 and a character string of "aiming" are displayed, and a game ball is fired toward the second starting winning opening P721. Is performed. Since the ordinary electric accessory 770 has the end condition of "entry of one game ball to the second start winning opening P721" or "elapse of the operation period of a predetermined time", the pachinko game of the second embodiment is performed. In the machine, in the "ordinary electric accessory opening effect", an indicator display (display of the recommended launch period) that roughly corresponds to the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory is displayed below the image imitating the second start winning opening P721, and the game is played. The period during which the ball can be entered into the second starting winning opening P721 is shown to the person.

In the "ordinary electric accessory opening effect", the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the second start winning opening P721 is taken into consideration, such as during the hit fluctuation of the normal symbol or the fixed time of the hit symbol of the normal symbol. , Ordinary electric accessory 770 may be configured to be performed before the operation.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment configured as described above, it is possible to obtain a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in which the big hit (small hit V) is definite in the specific game. The length of the duration of the specific period can be made different depending on the type of the special symbol that is to execute the big hit (small hit V) that was executed immediately before the start of the specific game. Like pachinko game machines, we provide game machines that give intervals that allow us to acquire a large number of game balls in a short period of time. It has the effect of being able to provide different specific games and providing pachinko gaming machines that enhance the interest of the games in the specific games.

(Modification 1 of the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1st embodiment)
In the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned 2-1 embodiment, in the "short-time chance state" and the "long-time chance state", the big hit fluctuation or the small hit fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to 1 second. Therefore, it is configured so that a specific period is not generated, but (a) after the big hit game (small hit V) executed in some special symbol types, even if the big hit fluctuates, the specific period ( For example, it is configured to have a jackpot symbol in which the jackpot fluctuation time is set so that 5 minutes) can be generated, or (a) a special symbol lottery in the "short-term chance state" and the "long-term chance state" is a jackpot or Fluctuation pattern when it is a small hit By configuring it so that the fluctuation time is 5 minutes with a probability of several percent in the lottery, it is a big hit in the "short chance state" or the "long chance state". It may be configured to separately provide a "special chance state" in which a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be obtained during the fluctuation (or small hit fluctuation).

In such a "special chance state", if there is a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol at the start, a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is held as a "recharge chance". It is possible to restart the "4 consecutive battle production" while notifying that there is, and if there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol at the start, the final of the "4 consecutive battle production" If there is no hold of the 2nd special symbol at the time of battle, the occurrence of a big hit (small hit V) will be notified as a revival effect, and if the 2nd special symbol can be held during the "special chance state", the final It may be configured to perform an effect display such that a big hit game (small hit V) executed in "STOCK-BONUS" is added after the battle.

In addition, when the "special chance state" is triggered by (a) a big hit game (small hit V) executed in some special symbol types, as another modification, the target special symbol In a big hit game (small hit V) triggered by a symbol type, or a part (gase) of a non-target big hit (small hit), a special battle effect is generated as an effect of "STOCK-BONUS", and the game is played in a special battle. It may be configured to notify the occurrence of the "special chance state" when the success mode in which the character on the side of the player wins is displayed.

(Modification 2 of the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1st embodiment)
The pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1st embodiment is designed on the assumption that N times of ordinary symbol lottery (1 minute / time) will be executed when the specific period continues for N minutes. After shifting to the game, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, and then there is a time until the ball enters the operating port P741 and the normal symbol lottery is performed, or the fluctuation display of the normal symbol during a specific period. Considering the possibility that the player will not be able to receive the N times ordinary symbol lottery due to the continuation of the period in which the game is not performed, the time of the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is a specific period, is N minutes + X seconds. Or, by setting the fixed time of the symbol after the fluctuation display of N seconds of the first special symbol to X seconds, a guarantee time "X seconds" is provided so that the player does not lose the right of the normal symbol lottery. It may be configured.

When the guaranteed time is set in this way, the guaranteed time is set as the time until the big hit (small hit) game is started or the time until the normal game is returned after the notification of the result of N times normal symbol lottery. It is necessary to wait for the remaining time of "X seconds", but during these periods, "STOCK-BONUS execution waiting" is displayed when shifting to a big hit (small hit), and when returning to normal game, it is displayed. , It may be configured to execute a "result effect" that notifies the total number of balls obtained by the consecutive villas.

Further, in order for the player to receive the N times ordinary symbol lottery, the player may be configured to call attention as the remaining time of the guaranteed time "X seconds" decreases. As an effect of alerting, the right-handed notification P832 may be changed to the emphasized mode, and the alerting "If you do not hit right, you will lose the right to battle !!" may be displayed or voice notification may be performed. The guarantee time "X seconds" is the period from the start of the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol (after the start of the specific period) to the start of the ordinary symbol lottery, and the control of the ordinary symbol or the ordinary electric accessory after that is stopped. When "X seconds" have passed after the time is measured, "1 minute" (corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol lottery and the time of one cycle related to the operation of the normal electric accessory) is newly set as the guaranteed time, and the same applies. It is configured to repeat the control of.

[2-2 Example]
Next, a second application example (2-2 Example) relating to the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a game flow of the 2-2 embodiment, FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an production example during the chance time of the 2-2 embodiment, and FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a production example of the second-2 embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other effect example during the chance time of an Example, and FIG. 41 is a figure which shows the effect example during the super chance time of 2-2 Example.

The feature of the second embodiment is that the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment can obtain the first specific period (the period during which the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be obtained, which is simplified. In addition, during the execution of the "chance time" which is the "first specific period"), the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is a predetermined condition (the second special symbol in the 2-2 embodiment). When the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of 2 or more is satisfied, it is easy to obtain the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that will occur next time. By controlling so that the state, which is simply referred to as the "second specific period") is given the right to be in a more advantageous state than the first specific period, the player can play the game during the specific period. Depending on the result (the number of pending acquisitions related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol), it is possible to pay attention to whether or not it is possible to shift to a further advantageous state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The details of the second and second embodiments will be described below. The board configuration (arrangement of winning devices, etc.) of the gaming machine will be described as being the same as that of the second embodiment and the second embodiment, but if the gaming described below can be configured, it will be described. It can be changed as appropriate.

(Game flow)
First, with reference to FIG. 38, the game flow (transition of the gaming state) will be described with respect to the pachinko gaming machine P of the second and second embodiments. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment also adopts the second special symbol priority digestion control like the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment and the 2-1 embodiment.

In the normal game (low probability / low base), the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L in the game area P501 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the second-2 embodiment, and the game ball is inserted into the first start winning opening 711A. As a result, it is a gaming state in which the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is executed and the "big hit (special diagram 1)" is acquired (FIG. 38 (A)).

When the "big hit (special figure 1)" is executed, the "chance time" is started (Fig. 38 (B)). The "chance time" is a gaming state in a low probability / high base state (one electric support), and like the pachinko gaming machines of the second embodiment and the second embodiment, the first special symbol is out of alignment. In the period (80 seconds), a specific period in which the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be obtained occurs.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2nd-2nd embodiment, the "chance time" is composed of an 80-second deviation variation of the first special symbol. During this time, by inserting the game ball into the operating port P741 arranged in the right side area P501R of the game area P501, a normal symbol lottery (win probability 1 / 9.99, variation time per time 10 seconds) is received. By performing 8 ordinary symbol lottery during the "chance time", the right to execute "STOCK-BONUS", which is a small hit V / big hit game based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol described later. It is a game state aiming at the acquisition of. That is, in this specific period of 80 seconds, as described above, it is possible to receive the ordinary symbol lottery with a hit probability of 1 / 9.99 and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds per time eight times.

In the "chance time", the game ball enters the P721 in the easy-to-enter state by winning the above-mentioned ordinary symbol lottery with a probability of 1 / 9.99, and thus the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is involved. The probability (continuation rate) of acquiring at least one hold and acquiring the execution right of "chance time" or "super chance time" described later is 56.9. % (In other words, the expected value obtained once in 8 times (80 seconds / fluctuation time 10 seconds) with a probability of 1 / 9.99), the probability of acquiring the execution right of "super chance time" Is 19% (in other words, the expected value that can be obtained twice or more in 8 times (80 seconds / fluctuation time 10 seconds) with a probability of 1 / 9.99). If the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained in the "chance time", the game returns to the normal game (FIG. 38 (I)).

After the lapse of a specific period in the "chance time", if there is one hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, "STOCK-BONUS" (small hit V / big hit game based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol) ) (Fig. 38 (D)), and after the end of "STOCK-BONUS", the process shifts to "chance time" (Fig. 38 (E)).

Further, in the "chance time", the right to execute the "super chance time" can be obtained by acquiring two or more holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. The "super chance time" is the period during which the small hit fluctuation or the big hit fluctuation of the second special symbol, which started to fluctuate when there are two holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, is executed for 170 seconds. A specific period occurs, which is the variable display period of the special symbol of. That is, in the specific period of 170 seconds, as described above, it is possible to receive 17 times of the ordinary symbol lottery with a hit probability of 1 / 9.99 and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds per time.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second-2 embodiment, the special symbol of the second special symbol is also in the specific period of the small hit fluctuation or the big hit fluctuation period of the second special symbol, which is the execution period of the "super chance time". It becomes possible to obtain a hold related to the lottery. Since the "super chance time" (170 seconds) is set to be longer than the specific period in the "chance time" (80 seconds), the number of feasible normal symbol lottery is large, and the second special symbol is more. It can be said that the possibility of obtaining a hold related to the special symbol lottery is increasing.

In the "super chance time", the number of times the normal symbol lottery is executed is about 17, and the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be obtained with a probability of about 83.3%. It is possible to acquire the right to execute "Super Chance Time". If the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained in the "super chance time", the process shifts to "STOCK-BONUS" after the end of the "super chance time" (Fig. 38 (G)). 2 If the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the special symbol can be obtained, the process shifts to "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS" (FIG. 38 (F)). After the execution of "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS", it returns to the "super chance time" (FIG. 38 (H)).

The "STOCK-BONUS" executed after the "super chance time" is repeated until the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol becomes 0 (the fluctuation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is 1). Since it is seconds, a specific period of 80 seconds does not occur even if it is in the same state as "chance time" internally), "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS" executed after "super chance time" is the second special symbol. It is repeatedly executed until there are two holds related to the special symbol lottery (since the fluctuation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is 1 second, even if it is internally the same as the "super chance time" 170 No specific period of seconds occurs).

In addition, if two holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are acquired during the "chance time", the 80-second missed fluctuation based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, which is the "chance time", ends. Later, the "super chance time" will be started. That is, the variation display period of the second special symbol is the variation display time of the special symbol depending on the number of holdings, regardless of whether or not the base state, which is the game state, in other words, the variation time shortening function (time reduction state) of the special symbol is activated. In the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the variable display period of 170 seconds is selected when the number of holdings is 2, and the variable time of 1 second is selected when the number of holdings is other. It has become like.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, even if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained in the "super chance time" which is the most advantageous state for the player, even if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained. After "STOCK-BONUS" is executed once, "chance time" will be started, so it has a two-stage configuration from the most advantageous state to the transition to the normal game, and the most advantageous state. Even when the "super chance time" is over, the player can be made to think that "there is still a chance", and the game flow is such that the decline in the motivation to play can be suppressed.

(Example of production of pachinko gaming machine P in 2-2 Example)
Subsequently, examples of the production of the “chance time” and the “super chance time” in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41.

<< Example of production of chance time for pachinko gaming machine P in 2-2 Example >>
FIG. 39 shows an example of the effect display at the chance time after the “big hit (special figure 1)”. At the top of the screen, the effect mode display P840 (character string of "chance time") and the remaining number of games display P841 (character string of "54 seconds left") are displayed. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, since the specific period is the variation display period of the special symbol, the "remaining variation time" of the special symbol (or the variation of the special symbol) is set as the remaining number of games display P841. The remaining time from the end of the display to the end of the electric chew support status) is displayed.

The hold display area P810 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and in the embodiment of FIG. 39, there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and the hold object P811 (see FIG. 36) is not displayed. Also in the simple hold display P814 in the center of the left side of the screen, "0" is displayed as the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

At the bottom left of the screen, the cumulative number of acquisitions display P824 (display of "Total_00600pt") and jackpot icon display P821 (display of icon "V" and "x1" indicating the number) are displayed, and when they are displayed in FIG. 39. It shows the number of balls won and the big hit game (small hit V) in the game of.

Then, in the center of the screen, a situation is shown in which the "7" symbol with a character is displayed as a variable display of the decorative symbol P801 in the right column and the middle column (temporary stop), and the left symbol is varied. It is shown that it is being displayed. Here, the decorative symbol P801 notifies the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery, and the ordinary symbol is displayed by displaying three 7 symbols in a doublet or by displaying other special decorative symbols. It is configured to notify the "win" as a result of the lottery.

In the example of FIG. 39, the decorative symbol P801 (decorative symbol in the left column) of 1 is in an unstoppable state, and "Aim for" 7 (image) "" is displayed together with an image imitating the effect button P381, and the player By operating the effect button P381, whether three "7" symbols of the decorative symbol P801 are aligned (hit), or whether the decorative symbol P801 other than the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol (missing). A button effect for notifying is being executed. Even when a predetermined time has elapsed after the effect button is displayed (when the player does not press the effect button for a predetermined time), the image to be finally displayed, such as 7 sets or the tempai is off, is displayed.

Not limited to the effect example shown in FIG. 39, as an effect of notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery during the "chance time", for example, an effect using a character (for example, without a variable display of the decorative symbol P801). You may notify that the normal symbol lottery will be won by executing the battle effect) and displaying the success mode (battle victory).

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing another production example of the “chance time” of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment. More specifically, in the "chance time", one hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is acquired (in FIG. 40, one hold object P811 is displayed in the hold display area P810 at the lower right of the screen. This is an example of an effect display that is displayed at least in a situation where "STOCK-BONUS" is executed and the entry into the "chance time" is confirmed again, that is, in a situation where the consecutive villas are confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 40, the effect mode display P840 is switched to the “promotion chance”, and a message of the command mode “destroy the seal !!” is displayed below the character string of the “promotion chance”. A character holding a heavy weapon is displayed in the center of the screen, and a mode for notifying that the result of the normal symbol lottery will be a hit by succeeding in "breaking the seal" required as an effect by this character. It is suggested that That is, in the situation of "chance time", before and after the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is acquired, the tendency of the effect and the effect mode for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery are switched. There is.

As a reason for switching the production mode in the middle of the "chance time", in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurs during the execution of the "chance time". If not, the player is paying attention to whether or not the favorable state continues (whether or not he / she can acquire the right to enter the "chance time" again), and the hold for the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is suspended. After that, there is a different concern for those players, as there will be a focus on whether or not there will be a hold on the special symbol lottery for the second second special symbol, which is the right to execute the "super chance time". On the other hand, by displaying the optimum production, the effect of enhancing the interest can be expected.

In the example of FIG. 40, an effect example using a character holding a heavy weapon is shown, but an effect by another character may be performed, or a different effect is performed each time a normal symbol lottery is executed. The result of the lottery may be shown. Further, even after the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is acquired, the same effect display as before the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 39 can be executed. It may be configured as.

Although not shown, in the case where the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is further acquired under the situation shown in FIG. 40 and the right of two or more big hit games (small hit V) is acquired. , Further different production tendencies, may be configured to change to a state in which the production is determined in the production mode.

<< Example of production of super chance time of pachinko gaming machine P in 2-2 Example >>
FIG. 41 shows an example of the production of the super chance time executed in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment.

In the example of FIG. 41, as the effect of the “super chance time”, an example in which the effect display substantially equivalent to the “chance time” shown in FIG. 39 is displayed is shown. As a different point, in order to congratulate you on the situation where you are controlling to the most advantageous state, the display area of the variable display of the decorative symbol P801 for notifying the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery was changed to the background. The difference is that the animation is displayed as a production image. In the example of FIG. 41, it is assumed that the background animation displays an image that is not related to the result of the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, there is a case where a preview image (mini character action, addition of effect effect to variable display of decorative symbol P801, etc.) displayed overlaid on the background animation image is displayed.

If there are four holds related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol during the execution of "Super Chance Time", the right to enter the second start winning opening P721 is a new jackpot game (small hit V). The variable display of the decorative symbol P801 for notifying the result of the ordinary symbol lottery may be hidden or changed so as to be displayed in a smaller display area. By reducing the visibility of the variable display of the decorative symbol P801 in this way, the visibility of the animation display of the background may be further enhanced.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, about 10 animations are displayed in order as the background animation during the "super chance time" according to the number of times (or the number of consecutive times) the super chance time is executed. It is configured to be. Then, in the situation where the "super chance time" is executed a specific number of times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), when the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is obtained, in "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS". Even if it is configured to execute a special effect (for example, an effect display related to the animation displayed in the immediately preceding "super chance time") as the effect of the big hit game (small hit V) to be executed. good.

In addition, in the "super chance time" which is the specific number of times, if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained, it will be the "chance time" after "STOCK-BONUS". When the right to execute "Super Chance Time" is acquired again, the animation of the same background as the previous specific number of times is displayed (separated effect) again, and the divided effect is executed in "Super Chance Time". At the time of execution, if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained, the background animation in the "super chance time" may not proceed.

Further, not limited to the effect display mode as shown in FIG. 41, in the "super chance time", a notice effect for notifying the result of the ordinary symbol lottery as in the "chance time" as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40. It may be possible to execute an effect mode that draws attention to the above, or one of a plurality of effect modes such as the same effect mode as the "chance time" or the above-mentioned effect mode mainly based on the background animation of the player. It may be configured to be arbitrarily selectable.

(Modification 1 of the pachinko gaming machine of 2-2 Example)
Subsequently, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment will be described. First, as a first modification, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second example 2-2 has two specific periods having different degrees of advantage as specific periods, but there are modifications such as three or four that are further increased. Conceivable.

More specifically, as a modification 1 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, when determining the variation display related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the variation is limited to the variation when the number of reservations is two. However, even when there are 3 or 4 holds related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol, a specific period (the period during which the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol can be obtained) can be generated. It is conceivable to control so as to determine the time (variation pattern) of the fluctuation display related to the special symbol lottery of the special symbol.

At this time, the specific period may be longer as the number of holdings related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol increases (for example, when the number of holdings is 2, 40 seconds, and the number of holdings is 3). When 50 seconds, when the number of holds is 4, the fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds is determined), on the contrary, even if it is configured so that the specific period is shorter when there are many holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Good (for example, 100 seconds when the number of holds is 2, 20 seconds when the number of holds is 3, and 10 seconds when the number of holds is 4).

(Modification 2 of the pachinko gaming machine of 2-2 Example)
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, as described above, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol when the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is two in the second specific period (the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol). The variable display period of the big hit (small hit V) based on is not dependent on the gaming state (high base state or low base state), but is determined depending on the number of pending special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It was explained that it is performed by the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation pattern lottery table, but when "the number of reservations and the gaming state related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is a high base state". The second specific period may be generated by the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern lottery table referred to on the condition of.

With this configuration, the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol generates the second specific period in the period of the first specific period (the deviation of the first special symbol in the high base state). Even if it matches the number of conditions to be made, at the end of the first period, the gaming state shifts to the low base state, and one of the conditions for generating the second specific period is not satisfied. After the end of one specific period, it is possible to always shift to the big hit game (small hit V), and it is possible to control so that the second specific period is always executed after the big hit game (small hit V). Will be.

At this time, in order to acquire the execution right of the second specific period, the condition for generating the second specific period after the execution of the big hit game (small hit V) in the first specific period + 1th 2 It is necessary to obtain a hold related to the special symbol lottery of special symbols, but as mentioned above, after the end of the first specific period and after the end of the second specific period, it always shifts to a big hit (small hit V). However, the start of the first specific period and the second specific period can always be configured to be after the execution of the big hit (small hit V), and the transition of the gaming state is easy for the player to understand. Can be done.

[2nd-3rd Examples]
Regarding the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the third application example (the second to third embodiments) will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 43. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a game flow of the second and third embodiments, and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a distribution ratio of big hit (small hit) symbols of the second and third embodiments.

The feature of the second to third embodiments is that the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment is given a special opportunity to execute a big hit game (small hit V) immediately before shifting to a specific game (high base state). Depending on the type of symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol), one of a plurality of high base states (electric support mode) with different controls related to the normal symbol lottery is set, so that a specific period (second special symbol) in the specific game is set. It can be configured so that the ease of obtaining the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in (the period during which the hold related to the special symbol lottery can be obtained) is different, and the gaming performance in a specific period (related to the ordinary symbol lottery). The purpose is to enhance the interest of specific games by the difference in control).

More specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second to third embodiments, the normal symbol lottery is "winning" as a type of high base state (electric support mode) in which the control related to the normal symbol lottery in a specific period is different. It is composed of "electric support mode 1" with a probability of 1/1 (100%) and "electric support mode 2" with a probability of 1/10 (10%) that the normal symbol lottery will be a "hit". When controlling to the "electric support mode 2", the number of games maintained in the high base state is configured to be any one of 1 to 3.

That is, when controlled to "electric support mode 1", by playing the game as intended by the design, it is possible to always obtain a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the four second special symbols, and the "electric support mode 2" is set. If controlled, the game will be developed in which a normal symbol lottery is received in anticipation of the continuation of the specific game (ream villa).

The details of the second to third embodiments will be described below. The board configuration (arrangement of winning devices, etc.) of the gaming machine will be described as being the same as that of the second embodiment, the second embodiment, and the second embodiment, but the game described below will be described. If it can be configured, it can be changed as appropriate.

(Game flow)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a game flow of the pachinko gaming machine P according to the second to third embodiments. In the "normal game (low probability / low base state)" of FIG. 42, the player fires a game ball into the left side area P501L of the game area P501, causes the game ball to enter the first starting winning opening P711A, and the first ball is inserted into the first starting winning opening P711A. 1 By receiving a special symbol lottery for special symbols, we aim to acquire the right to execute the "big hit (special diagram 1)" (Fig. 42 (A)).

When the "big hit (special figure 1)" is started, the player fires a game ball in the right area P501R of the game area P501, inserts the game ball into the big winning opening P751, and uses the prize ball to play the game ball. Make an acquisition. At this time, as in the second embodiment, the 2-1 embodiment, and the 2-2 embodiment, if the fire is aimed at the big winning opening P751 during the big hit game, the first starting winning opening P711B is also entered. A ball is generated, and a hold related to a special symbol lottery of at least one first special symbol is generated during the big hit game (small hit V). After the "big hit (special figure 1)", the process shifts to "STOCK-TIME1" as shown in FIG. 42 (FIG. 42 (B)).

"STOCK-TIME1" is a specific game that has a low probability / high base state (electric chew support state), and is a hit of a normal symbol lottery based on the symbol that triggered the execution of "big hit (special figure 1)". While controlling to one of two high base states (electric support mode) with different probabilities of becoming, the big hit game (small hit V) is executed based on the symbol that triggered the execution of "big hit (special figure 1)". The number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol that maintains the high base state when it is not performed is also controlled to one of 1 to 3.

A specific example of the gaming state of "STOCK-TIME1" is shown in FIG. 43. In the distribution of the big hit game (small hit V) symbols of the pachinko gaming machine P of the second to third embodiments shown in FIG. 43, the names of the "symbols (groups)" are "Special Figure 1_Big Hit Symbol A" to "Special Figure 1_". The jackpot symbol (group), which is the jackpot symbol D, is a jackpot symbol that is controlled by “STOCK-TIME1”.

Here, in the "selection probability" of FIG. 43, the jackpot symbol included in any of "special figure 1_big hit symbol A" to "special figure 1_big hit symbol D" as the jackpot symbol is selected by the jackpot symbol lottery of the special symbol. The probability of being determined is shown, and the "number of times of electric support" is the number of games to maintain the high base state set after each big hit game of "special figure 1_big hit symbol A" to "special figure 1_big hit symbol D". Is shown.

The "normal symbol probability" in FIG. 43 is the probability that the normal symbol lottery will be a "win" in a specific game (high base state) controlled after "special figure 1_big hit symbol A" to "special figure 1_big hit symbol D". The high base state in which the normal symbol probability is 1/1 is defined as "electric support mode 1", and the high base state in which the normal symbol probability is 1/10 is defined as "electric support mode 2".

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second to third embodiments, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol in the high base state is 30 seconds, and the normal symbol based on the ordinary symbol lottery is set. The fluctuation time of is about 4 seconds per fluctuation. That is, while the first special symbol is displaced once in the high base state (electric support state), the normal symbol variation is executed about 7 times, and the duration of the high base state is the variation display of the special symbol twice. Or, in the case of 3 times, the maximum number of times that the normal symbol lottery can be executed increases to about 14 times and about 21 times.

The “continuation rate” in FIG. 43 indicates the probability (expectation degree) of obtaining a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in a specific period (the total period of the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol in the high base state). It indicates that the execution right of the specific game (STOCK-TIME2) is acquired at the indicated continuation rate (probability).

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second to third embodiments, the number of times to maintain the high base state may be a plurality of times (the number of times of electric support may be two or three times), but the first to second times. If a hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol can be obtained during the execution of the first special symbol out-of-order fluctuation, which is the second specific period, the second to third special symbol priority digestion control is used to identify the second or third special symbol. The big hit game (small hit V) is executed by the special symbol lottery related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol without executing the period (the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol).

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second to third embodiments, in the specific game controlled by the "electric support mode 1", four reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are acquired in a short time (30 seconds). On the other hand, when it is controlled to "electric support mode 2", even if the number of times of electric support increases, a specific period (first special) in which the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is acquired. When the operation is controlled to "electric support mode 2" because the execution of a specific period in which the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the new second special symbol can be obtained is canceled at the moment when the symbol deviation change) is completed. It is a rare event to obtain a hold related to a special symbol lottery for a plurality of second special symbols.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description of the game state (game flow) will be continued. In "STOCK-TIME1", the special symbol of the second special symbol is used before the specified number of games (number of electric support) is exhausted based on the jackpot symbol that triggered the execution of "big hit (special figure 1)". If the hold related to the lottery can be obtained, the "big hit (special figure 2)" STOCK-BONUS "" is executed (FIG. 42 (C)). On the other hand, in "STOCK-TIME1", the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained before the specified number of games (the number of electric support) is exhausted by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. In that case, the game returns to the "normal game" (FIG. 42 (D)).

"Big hit (special figure 2)" STOCK-BONUS "" is a big hit game (small hit) until there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol acquired in "STOCK-TIME1" or "STOCK-TIME2". V) is controlled to be executed repeatedly, and after the "big hit (special figure 2)" STOCK-BONUS "" corresponding to the hold related to the special symbol lottery of all the second special symbols is executed, the process goes to "STOCK-TIME2". Transition (Fig. 42 (E)).

In addition, every time "big hit (special figure 2)" STOCK-BONUS "" is executed, "STOCK-TIME2" is executed internally, but it is based on the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Since the big hit (small hit) fluctuation of the second special symbol ends in a short fluctuation of about 1 second, there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of all the second special symbols, and the special symbol of the first special symbol is eliminated. Until the out-of-bounds fluctuation based on the lottery is executed, a specific period does not occur, and the ordinary electric accessory 770 is not released in a manner in which it is easy to enter the ball.

"STOCK-TIME2" is a specific game that shifts after a big hit game (small hit V) based on a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and has three types of gaming states as shown in FIG. 43. Like "STOCK-TIME1", "STOCK-TIME2" is a combination of "electric support mode 1" and "electric support mode 2", which are types of high base state, and the number of games (number of electric support) to maintain the high base state. There is no difference in the mechanism of the game. However, "STOCK-TIME2" that shifts after the big hit game (small hit V) of "special figure 2_big hit / small hit symbol A" to "special figure 2_big hit / small hit symbol C" is a normal symbol lottery. The frequency of distribution controlled by "electric support mode 1", which has a normal symbol probability of 1/1, is high, and "STOCK-BONUS" of four big hit games (small hit V) is executed. It is highly likely that the game will be played, and it is easy to get a large number of balls in a short time.

Further, "STOCK-TIME2" is configured so that the number of times of electric support in a specific game is at least 2 times even in the case of "electric support mode 2" which has a normal symbol probability of 1/10. The minimum number of times of electric support when "STOCK-TIME 1" is executed in "electric support mode 2" is more than one, and the expectation of continuation of a specific game (consecutive villa) is also set high.

In "STOCK-TIME2", when the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is obtained, the "big hit (special figure 2)" STOCK-BONUS "" is executed (Fig. 42 (F)), and the second If the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the special symbol cannot be obtained, the game returns to the "normal game" (Fig. 42 (G)).

(Modification example of the pachinko gaming machine of the second to third examples)
Subsequently, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine P of the second to third embodiments will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second to third embodiments, the control related to the normal symbol lottery in the high base state is different, and the "normal symbol probability", which is the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, is different. Although "support mode 1" and "electric support mode 2" have been described, the types of "electric support mode" are not limited to two, and "electric support mode 3" and "electric support mode 4" having different "normal symbol probabilities" are used. It may be configurable.

In addition, as a method of different types of "electric support mode", instead of "normal symbol probability", different types of "normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function (normal symbol time reduction)" are used, and fluctuations per fluctuation of normal symbols are made. The time may be set to 2 seconds per fluctuation instead of 4 seconds, or 8 seconds per fluctuation, and the fluctuation time of various ordinary symbols can be determined, and the average is 4 seconds. Such a case may be provided. By making it possible to execute different "electric support modes" by "ordinary symbol time reduction", the number of times the ordinary symbol lottery is executed in a specific period can be made different, and the more the ordinary symbol lottery can be executed in a shorter time, the more. It can be sent as a game state in which a high continuation rate can be expected. Further, the "electric support mode" may be configured as different specifications by combining the types of "ordinary symbol probability" and "ordinary symbol time reduction".

As described above, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, Examples 2-1 to 2-3 have been described as application examples thereof. These application examples, the pachinko gaming machine P of Examples 2-1 to 2-3 and its modifications, can be implemented as independent technologies, but the technologies disclosed in each can be combined as appropriate. It is also possible to carry out.

Further, in the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment, the "hit" of the normal symbol lottery occurs, that is, a state in which the ball is easily entered in the second starting winning opening P721, and the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is performed. Although described in the embodiment of obtaining the hold, as a modification of the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment, the “hit” of the ordinary symbol lottery is the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It is also possible to configure a modified example as follows so as not to acquire (the right to execute the big hit game (small hit V)).

In the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment, the "hit" of the ordinary symbol lottery is a modification in which the hold (right to execute the big hit game (small hit V)) related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is not acquired. As an example of the method of executing the example, a distribution device (movable valve member, etc.) for distributing game balls to two flow paths is provided inside the winning device related to the ordinary electric accessory 770, and one flow path is used as the general winning opening P731. A method is conceivable in which a board surface configuration is adopted in which the flow path for guiding the game ball is formed on the other side, and the other side is composed of the flow path for guiding the game ball to the second starting winning opening P721.

At this time, the operation pattern of the sorting device inside the winning device related to the ordinary electric accessory 770 is different depending on the winning symbol lottery of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol lottery, the type of "electric support mode", etc., and the ordinary symbol lottery is performed. The winning probabilities for the second starting winning opening P721 when the result is "hit" are different. As a specific example, in "ordinary symbol_hit symbol A", the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 770 and the distribution device inside the winning device is set so that the winning probability for the second starting winning opening P721 is 100%. In "ordinary symbol_winning symbol B", the winning probability for the second starting winning opening P721 is 50%, and in "ordinary symbol_winning symbol C", the winning probability for the second starting winning opening P721 is 10% (may be 0%). An example is given in which the configuration is such that.

In the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment configured in this way, if a "hit" is won in the ordinary symbol lottery during the execution of a specific period, the "ordinary electric accessory opening effect" is executed. Then, when the player is urged to enter the game ball into the ordinary electric accessory 770 and the player enters the game ball into the winning device related to the ordinary electric accessory 770, the general winning opening P731 or the second start winning is won. Regardless of which of the mouths P721 the ball is entered, the notification is made to raise the expectation level regarding whether or not the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol has occurred (the color of the effect effect is "blue" ⇒ " "Green" ⇒ "Red" ⇒ "Gold" ⇒ "Rainbow (confirmation of hold acquisition related to the special symbol lottery of 4 second special symbols)") At the end timing, the game may be configured to notify the number of pending acquisitions related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol (for example, the button effect is executed at the symbol fixed time of the special symbol at the expiration of the specific period. Then, by operating a button, the number of pending acquisitions related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is displayed as "V × ○").

In such a configuration, it is preferable not to display the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery (display by the hold display area P810, simple hold display P814). Further, by adopting such a modified example, even if the normal symbol is a hit, the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol does not always occur, so that the ordinary electric accessory 770 opens. Pachinko gaming machine P, which is a modification of the second embodiment and the application examples of the second embodiment, in which a large number of situations can be transmitted, and the hit frequency of the normal symbol lottery is increased in a specific period and there are many dramatic changes. Can be provided.

(Activation of the fluctuation time shortening function triggered by the number of operations of the special symbol "Relief function")
Operation of the fluctuation time shortening function triggered by the number of times the special symbol is operated In the "relief function" and the low base state (so-called "normal game"), when the variation display of the special symbol of the predetermined number of games is executed. , It is a function to generate a high base state (operating state of the electric chew support function).

More specifically, after the transition to the low base state (immediately after the RAM is cleared, after the game end condition in the high base state is satisfied, and after the execution of the special game that shifts to the low base state), a predetermined game By generating a high base state when the number of special games is executed, the start winning opening for the ordinary electric accessory 770 (starting winning opening for the first special symbol or starting winning for the second special symbol) It is a function that facilitates winning a prize in the mouth), facilitates the acquisition of the right to a special symbol lottery, and suppresses the player from excessively consuming the game ball.

The "relief function" sets a plurality of game times as a predetermined number of games, and the time reduction number (the number of games to maintain a high base state) given when the first relief function is activated and the second time (the number of games to maintain a high base state). The third time) may be configured so that the number of time reductions given when the relief function is activated is different.

In addition, when the "relief function" is configured to always operate by executing a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of games, depending on the performance of the "relief function" that operates, the player is allowed to play excessively. Therefore, when a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of games is executed, the lottery related to the operation of the "relief function" is configured to be executed, and for example, the operation of the "relief function" is won. The "relief function" may be activated at 1/2 with a probability of 50%.

(Activation of the function to shorten the fluctuation time of special symbols by "time saving symbols")
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine and this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine P that operates the fluctuation time shortening function (time saving function) and the electric chew support function of the special symbol after the jackpot game (special game) is executed has been described. .. The operation of the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function (time reduction function) and the electric chew support function is not limited to after the execution of such a special game, but a specific type of special symbol (missing symbol, small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to start the operation even when the jackpot game is not executed.

For example, in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, when the winning / failing lottery is "missing", the winning symbol lottery (missing symbol lottery) is won at 1/800, and the "missing symbol with time reduction" is won. In addition, it may be configured to generate a high base state (time saving state, electric chew support state) that continues until 100 special symbol lottery is executed.

In addition, a type may be provided for the "time-saving _-missing symbol" so that the number of games to be maintained in the high base state differs depending on the type of the "time-saving _-missing symbol". For example, up to 50 times for "Time saving _ Missing symbol A", 100 times for "Time saving _ Missing symbol B", and 10000 times for "Time saving _ Missing symbol C" (* Substantially the next big hit is confirmed) It can also be.

The variable time shortening function (time saving function) of the special symbol, the "relief function" related to the electric chew support function, and the "time saving symbol" are the techniques disclosed in this embodiment and application examples of the second embodiment and the second embodiment. It is also possible to apply for.

In particular, with respect to the present embodiment, the second embodiment, and the application examples of the second embodiment in which the small hit V is adopted as the specifications of the gaming machine, the special symbol variation time shortening function (time saving function) and the electric chew support function are related. When the "relief function" and the "time saving symbol" are adopted, the situation in which it is easy to obtain a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, which is a big hit game (small hit V) with a high probability, is the first in the "normal game". It can be generated even when the special symbol lottery of the special symbol does not result in a "big hit", and the effect of suppressing the player's consumption of the game ball can be expected more effectively.

[Third Example]
In the pachinko gaming machines P of the present embodiment and the second embodiment, the player actually operates the effect button P381 to change the effect content or display a new effect content. However, the effect using the effect button P381 is not limited to this. Further, the simple symbol P802 was displayed as a display object showing the lottery result of the special symbol, but it plays a role of not only such a role but also a role of ensuring visibility to give diversity to the production in the decorative symbol P801. It is also possible to configure it to be displayed as a display object. Further, it is possible to expand the range of the game by applying not only the playability of "small hit V" mainly composed of special symbols but also the playability of "small hit V" mainly composed of ordinary symbols. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a third embodiment, and only the prerequisite technology and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below, and the description of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as the prerequisite technology or the elements described in the present embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals.

《Button effect and automatic operation function》
As described above, an effect of changing the effect content or displaying a new effect content by operating the effect button P381 is referred to as a button effect. Depending on the type of this button effect, the presence / absence of display of the operation promotion image (details will be described later), the operation type, and the effect content type are different. With this button effect, the player can infer the degree of expectation of a big hit. In other words, the jackpot expectation is configured to differ depending on the effect content changed by the button effect and the type of the newly displayed effect content (effect content type).

The operation promotion image is an effect image for encouraging the player to operate the effect button P381 and the effect lever P382, and is a button image that imitates the effect button P381 and an effect image that imitates the effect lever P382. In the lever image, which is an operation mode (for example, "single press" which is an operation mode in which the effect button P381 is operated only once, or "continuous hit" which is an operation mode in which the effect button P381 is pressed a plurality of times, as described above. , "Lever operation" to perform the effect lever P382, etc. (For example, if "single push", "press!" Or if the image showing the operation mode is hidden and only the operation promotion image, "continuous hit" Refers to an image with characters such as "Push the lever!" Or "Pull the lever!" For "Lever operation". When displaying the operation promotion image, it is a dedicated voice at the same time and a voice instructing the operation mode (for example, "press!" For "single push" and "continuous hit!" For "continuous hit". , If it is "lever operation", voice such as "pull the lever!") May be output. The presence / absence of the operation promotion image display indicates whether it is a button effect that displays the operation promotion image or a button effect that does not display the operation promotion image, and the button effect that displays the operation promotion image is a front button effect. (Also referred to as the first operation effect), the button effect that does not display the operation promotion image is referred to as the back button effect (also referred to as the second operation effect). The back button effect, which is a button effect that does not display the operation promotion image, does not display the operation promotion image (thus, it does not output the sound instructing the operation mode described above), but the effect button P381 and the effect lever P382. By operating, it is an effect that changes the effect content or displays a new effect content.

The operation type is the type of the operation mode described above, and is an operation mode of the effect button P381 and an operation mode of the effect lever P382 for changing the effect content or displaying a new effect content. In addition to "single push", "continuous hit", and "lever operation", the operation type also includes "long press" that keeps pressing the effect button P381 and "lever long pull" that keeps pulling the effect lever P382. If the operation promotion image corresponding to such an operation type is "long press", the button image is accompanied by the characters "long press!" (At this time, "long press!" If it is "Lever long pull", the image with the characters "Keep pulling the lever!" Is output (At this time, the voice "Keep pulling the lever!" Is output. May be).

The effect content type is a type of effect content displayed by operating the effect button P381 or the effect lever P382. The type of effect content differs depending on the type of operation promotion image or operation mode in the case of a front button effect, and differs depending on other effect contents when the back button effect is executed in the case of a back button effect {For example, the degree of expectation is high as described above. Whether the reach effect (development effect that develops after the reach state is formed, the so-called super reach effect) is being executed, or whether the image of a specific character displayed immediately before the execution of the reach effect with high expectation is being displayed, etc.}. As the type of production content in the table button production, for example, in the case of "single-shot push production" (also referred to as "single-shot operation production"), dialogue production before the reach state formation and development after the reach state formation (among multiple development productions). In the case of the cut-in effect of the effect A), the "continuous hit effect" (also referred to as the "continuous hit operation effect"), the meter effect before the reach state is formed and the meter effect after the reach state is formed (the development effect B among the multiple development effects). In the case of an enemy annihilation effect or a "lever operation effect", it is a darkening effect before the reach state is formed, a character falling effect after the reach state is formed (a development effect C among a plurality of development effects), and the like. The details of these table button effects will be described later. Further, as an effect content type in the back button effect, for example, a reach effect with high expectation as described above (a development effect that develops after the reach state is formed, a so-called super reach effect) is being executed, and the reach effect is developed. In production D (a reach production with a lower expectation of a big hit than development production A, development production B, and development production C, and a production that may further develop from development production C to any of development productions A to C). In a certain case, the back button effect is a title indicating that the development effect C can be repeatedly hit for 10 seconds (the operation valid period is 10 seconds), and the development effect D is being executed by repeatedly hitting. The color (the color of the title display that is always displayed during the execution of the development effect D) changes. The title color change effect (the title color is emitted and displayed for each operation, and the title is emitted along with the emission display. There is a possibility that the color of will change in the order of blue → green → red → gold, and the latter color suggests that the jackpot expectation or development expectation for development production A or development production B is higher). , When the image of a specific character displayed immediately before the execution of the reach effect with high expectation is being displayed, the back button effect is to press the button once when the specific character laughs (operation valid period is 0.5 seconds). By doing so, only when the fluctuation in which this effect is executed is a big hit, it is a timing single-shot push effect in which characters such as "confirmed" are displayed in rainbow colors.

Specific examples of the button effect in the third embodiment are as follows.
(1) Display of dialogue effect operation promotion image: Yes (table button effect), operation valid period is 3 seconds (operation valid period ends with button operation)
Operation type: Single-shot press effect content type: Before the reach state is formed, the character and button image (without displaying "Press!") Are displayed, and when the effect button P381 is pressed once, "Speech balloon image" is displayed. Is displayed. The color of the image (the color of the balloon) is expected to be a big hit in the order of blue <green <red <gold.
(2) Presence / absence of display of cut-in effect operation promotion image: Yes (table button effect), operation valid period is 3 seconds (operation valid period ends with button operation)
Operation type: Single-shot push effect Content type: Development When the button image (with the display of "Press!") Is displayed and the effect button P381 is pressed once during the execution of the development effect A, "Cut-in of ally character" is displayed. Is displayed. The color of the image (cut-in color) is expected to be a big hit in the order of green <red <gold. After the cut-in effect, it is notified whether or not it is a big hit (for example, if the ally character wins the enemy character, it is a big hit, and if it is defeated, it is a miss).
(3) Presence / absence of display of meter effect operation promotion image: Yes (table button effect), operation valid period is 5 seconds (operation valid period does not end by button operation, but operation valid period ends when the meter reaches 20 stages )
Operation type: Repeated hits Production content Type: Before the reach state is formed, a 20-step meter and button image (with the display of "Continuous hits!") Are displayed, and when the effect button P381 is repeatedly hit, the number of repeated hits is increased. The message "Meters are accumulating" is displayed. The more meters you have, the higher your expectation for a big hit.
(4) Enemy annihilation effect operation promotion image display presence / absence: Yes (table button effect), operation valid period is 7 seconds (operation valid period does not end by button operation)
Operation type: Continuous hitting effect content type: During the execution of development production B, "100 remaining enemies" is displayed and a button image ("Repeat hitting!" Is displayed) is displayed, and when the production button P381 is repeatedly hit. , "The number of remaining enemies will decrease" is displayed according to the number of repeated hits. When the number of remaining enemies reaches 0, it is notified that it is a big hit.
(5) Presence / absence of display of darkening effect operation promotion image: Yes (table button effect), operation valid period is 3 seconds (operation valid period ends with button operation)
Operation type: Lever operation Content type: Reach state Before the formation of the reach state, the lever image (with the display of "close!") Is displayed, and when the effect lever button P382 is operated, the screen goes dark with a "puchun" sound. After that, "Characters written as large and intense heat in outline characters" are displayed. Although the jackpot is not confirmed, the expectation for big hits is relatively high compared to the dialogue and meter productions (only when the dialogue and meter productions are golden, the dialogue and meter productions have higher expectations for jackpots. ). If the image is the character "confirmed", the jackpot is confirmed.
(6) Character drop effect operation promotion image display presence / absence: Yes (table button effect), operation valid period is 3 seconds (operation valid period ends with button operation)
Operation type: Lever operation effect content type: Development When the lever image (with the display of "close!") Is displayed and the effect lever button P382 is operated during the execution of the development effect C, it is a useful item only when it is a big hit. Is dropped, and the effect display device P80 becomes a rainbow-colored screen. If it is not a big hit, the accessory does not fall and the effect display device P80 becomes a gray screen. Compared to the cut-in effect and the enemy annihilation effect, the expectation for a big hit is relatively high (the character falls rather than the ally character winning after the cut-in effect or the number of remaining enemies becoming 0 in the enemy annihilation effect). There is a higher possibility that the character will fall in the production, but if the cut-in is gold, the victory of the ally character may be confirmed).

Regarding the meter production, enemy annihilation production, and title color change production, which are "continuous hitting effects", the production contents change based on the actual repeated hitting operation of the player, but even if the above-mentioned "automatic continuous hitting" operation is possible. good.

In this way, when executing the button effect, the effect is generated or changed based on the actual player operation, but in the third embodiment, the player operation is performed even without the player operation. The production can be generated or changed as it was. Specifically, it is as follows.

When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops in a situation where neither the hold corresponding to the first special symbol nor the hold corresponding to the second special symbol exists. , It becomes a variable standby state. When the effect button P381 is pressed once in this variable standby state, as shown in FIG. 44, two item screens of "automatic operation function ON" and "automatic operation function OFF" are displayed {in other words, , A predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped in a situation where neither the hold corresponding to the first special symbol nor the hold corresponding to the second special symbol existed. Until this is done, since the variable standby state is not displayed, even if the effect button P381 is pressed once, the two item screens "automatic operation function ON" and "automatic operation function OFF" are not displayed. In a situation where there is neither a hold corresponding to the special symbol nor a hold corresponding to the second special symbol, the fluctuation standby state may be set immediately after the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has stopped. In that case, the fluctuation may occur. Immediately after the operation is stopped, a single press of the effect button P381 displays two item screens, "automatic operation function ON" and "automatic operation function OFF"}. The cursor can be selected on this item screen by operating the cross key in the left-right direction, and when the effect button P381 is pressed once again after moving the cursor to the item screen of "automatic operation function ON", FIG. 45 shows. As shown, the screen switches to the screen that says "Automatic operation function has been turned on", and the automatic operation function is set. In addition, when the effect button P381 is pressed once again after moving the cursor to the "automatic operation function OFF" item screen, the screen switches to the "automatic operation function turned off" screen and automatic operation is performed. The function is not set (cancelled). Although not shown, in the variable standby state, the decorative symbol P801 and the simple symbol P802 are continuously displayed, and then the item screens of "automatic operation function ON", "automatic operation function OFF", and "automatic operation". Even if the "function ON" screen is displayed, the decorative symbol P801 and the simple symbol P802 are still displayed on the back layer.

When the automatic operation function is set, the table button effect is actually operated by the player at a predetermined timing within the operation valid period even if the player does not actually operate the table button effect. Generate or change the effect in the same way as. Specifically, when the dialogue effect is executed, the "line image with a balloon" is automatically displayed 1.5 seconds after the operation valid period starts, and when the meter effect is executed, 0.2 seconds from the start of the operation valid period. Later, "Meters will accumulate" will be automatically displayed as a continuous hit at 0.2 second intervals, and when the enemy is annihilated, it will be treated as a continuous hit at 0.1 second intervals 0.2 seconds after the start of the operation validity period. The display "The number of remaining enemies will decrease" is automatically displayed, and when the blackout effect is executed, 1.5 seconds after the start of the operation validity period, "Characters written as large and intense heat in white letters" (or "Confirmed" The character "") is automatically displayed. In this way, with regard to the table button effect, even if there is no actual operation by the player, the effect is generated or changed at a predetermined timing within the operation valid period in the same manner as when the player actually operates the table button effect. Can be made to do. If the automatic operation function is not set and there is no actual operation by the player, the "line image with balloon" is not displayed when the line effect is executed, and the "meter" is displayed when the meter effect is executed. "Accumulating" is not displayed, and "The number of remaining enemies is decreasing" is not displayed during the enemy annihilation production (however, only the process of decreasing is not displayed, and if it is out of order, one person, If it is a big hit, it will be displayed as 0 people in the end), and when the blackout effect is executed, "characters written as large and intense heat in outline characters" (or "characters written as confirmed") will be displayed. Do not show.

Here, the cut-in effect and the accessory drop effect, which are a part of the front button effect, and the two types of back button effects are button effects that are not covered by the automatic operation function. That is, even if the automatic operation function is set, if there is no actual operation by the player, it is not considered that the actual operation by the player has been performed. However, for the cut-in effect and the two types of back button effects, regardless of whether the automatic operation function is set or not, the effect does not occur without the actual operation of the player, but the character drop effect. With respect to, regardless of whether the automatic operation function is set or not, at the timing when the operation valid period expires (that is, the timing 3 seconds after the start of the operation valid period) if there is no operation by the player. If it is a big hit, the accessory falls and the effect display device P80 has a rainbow-colored screen, and if it is not a big hit, the accessory does not fall and the effect display device P80 has a gray screen. With this configuration, the button effect just before the big hit is confirmed or the button effect that is greatly related to the big hit notification can give the player a feeling of grasping the big hit by himself, so the automatic operation function is not applied. , The generation of the production depends on the operation of the player.

Whether or not to set the automatic operation function (setting and canceling the setting) is not limited to selecting from the two item screens displayed from the single press of the effect button P381 in the variable standby state, but also the first special symbol or the second. It can be set even during a special symbol change (hereinafter referred to as a symbol change). Specifically, it is as follows.

During the period in which the automatic operation function is not set and the operation is not valid during the symbol change (the period during which the symbol is changed and not the operation valid period in the front button effect and the back button effect), the effect button P381 is displayed. The automatic operation function is set by performing a long press (also referred to as "continuation operation" or "continuation of one-shot operation") for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). In that case, the screen as shown in FIG. 45 "The automatic operation function has been turned on" is displayed during fluctuation, but it is smaller than the screen displayed in the fluctuation standby state and is not in the center of the screen but in the lower left. Is displayed in. In addition, if the automatic operation function is set, the setting of the automatic operation function is canceled when the effect button P381 is pressed once while the symbol is changing (the effect during the operation valid period of the front button effect). It is also released by pressing the button P381 once). In that case, the screen "The automatic operation function has been turned off" is displayed during the fluctuation, but it is smaller than the screen displayed in the fluctuation standby state and is displayed at the lower left instead of the center of the screen. However, in some situations, these settings and cancellations cannot be set or canceled.
(1) Situation in which the automatic operation function cannot be set (1-1) When the long press of the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function overlaps with the operation valid period of the table button effect (1) When the operation validity period of the table button effect starts before the lapse of a predetermined time)
(1-2) When the operation valid period of the back button effect overlaps with the predetermined time of long press of the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function (the operation of the back button effect is valid before the predetermined time elapses). When the period starts)
(1-3) By the time the predetermined time of long press of the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function is reached, the next symbol variation of the current symbol variation (the symbol variation that started the long press) starts. Case (2) Situation where the setting of the automatic operation function cannot be canceled (2-1) When the effect button P381 is pressed once during the operation valid period of the back button effect.

With this configuration, it is possible to set and cancel the automatic operation in an appropriate situation without waiting for the symbol fluctuation to stop (to be exact, the fluctuation standby state). As a modification, the automatic operation function is not set, and the effect button P381 is changed from the operation valid period during the symbol variation (the symbol variation period, which is the operation valid period in the front button effect and the back button effect). The automatic operation function may be set when the long press is started and then the long press reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after the operation valid period ends. In such a configuration, in the single-shot pressing effect of the front button, the operation valid period ends when the single-shot pressing is performed. Therefore, after the operation valid period of the single-shot pressing effect of the front button starts, a predetermined time of the effect button P381 (for example, 2 seconds) If you press and hold it for a long time, the automatic operation function is set when the predetermined time is reached, but if the effect button P381 is pressed and held after the operation valid period of the continuous hit effect starts, the "auto continuous hit" operation is performed. In The automatic operation function is set when the push reaches a predetermined time (for example, taking the meter effect which is a continuous hit effect as an example, the long press starts when the remaining 4 seconds out of the operation valid period of 5 seconds. If this is done, if the long press is continued, the automatic repeated hits will be executed for the remaining operation valid period of 4 seconds, but the automatic operation function will be set even if 2 seconds have passed from the start of the long press. However, if the long press is continued even after the remaining operation valid period of 4 seconds has passed, and if the remaining operation valid period of 4 seconds has passed and the long press is continued for another 2 seconds, the remaining operation remains. The automatic operation function is set at the timing when another 2 seconds have elapsed after the expiration of 4 seconds, which is the operation valid period of.). Further, in such a configuration, as a modification of (1-1), the operation valid period of the front button effect is set until the long press of the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function reaches a predetermined time. Even in the case of duplication (when the operation valid period of the front button effect starts before the lapse of a predetermined time), the automatic operation function may be set, and further, the effect button P381 for setting the automatic operation function. The automatic operation function can be set even if the operation valid period of the back button effect overlaps with the operation valid period of the back button effect by the time the long press reaches the predetermined time (when the operation valid period of the back button effect starts before the predetermined time elapses). May be.

In the third embodiment, the player can set the automatic operation timing in order to reflect the player's hobbies and tastes in the automatic operation function. That is, it is possible to set the timing of the effect generation and the effect change (timing that is considered to have been the button operation) in the table button effect in the state where the automatic operation function is set.

As described above, by setting the automatic operation function, even if there is no actual operation of the player for the table button effect, when the dialogue effect is executed, 1.5 seconds after the start of the operation valid period, " "Speech balloon image" is automatically displayed, and when the meter effect is executed, "Meter accumulates" is automatically displayed as a continuous hit at 0.2 second intervals 0.2 seconds after the start of the operation validity period. When the enemy is annihilated, the message "The number of remaining enemies will decrease" is automatically displayed as a continuous hit at 0.1 second intervals 0.2 seconds after the start of the operation validity period, and when the darkening effect is executed, the operation is performed. 1.5 seconds after the start of the validity period, "characters with large white letters written as intense heat" (or "characters written with confirmed") are automatically displayed, but this automatic operation timing {automatic The timing of the effect occurrence or effect change in the front button effect in the state where the operation function is set (timing when the button operation is considered to have occurred)} is referred to as the normal setting state of the automatic operation function. From the normal setting state of this automatic operation function, the automatic operation timing in the table button effect to which the automatic operation function can be applied {The timing of the effect occurrence and effect change in the table button effect in the state where the automatic operation function is set (button operation is The state in which (timing to be considered to have existed)} is changed is the state in which the automatic operation timing of the automatic operation function is changed. The change of the automatic operation timing can be arbitrarily set for each of the table button effects to which the automatic operation function can be applied. Specifically, it is as follows.

When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops in a situation where neither the hold corresponding to the first special symbol nor the hold corresponding to the second special symbol exists. , It becomes a variable standby state. When the effect button P381 is pressed once in this variable standby state, two item screens of "automatic operation function ON" and "automatic operation function OFF" are displayed as described above. By moving the cursor to the item screen of "automatic operation function ON" on this item screen and performing an upper operation of the cross key, the automatic operation timing setting item screen as shown in FIG. 46 is displayed. More specifically, as the setting item screen of the automatic operation timing, four item screens of "line generation timing", "meter storage start timing", "enemy annihilation start timing", and "darkening occurrence timing" are displayed. When these four item screens are displayed, perform up / down / left / right operations of the cross key, move the cursor to one of the item screens, and press the effect button P381 once, the table button effect corresponding to that item. The screen dedicated to setting the occurrence timing for setting the occurrence timing (occurrence timing when the automatic operation function is set) is displayed. The "line generation timing" corresponds to the dialogue production, the "meter storage start timing" corresponds to the meter production, the "enemy annihilation start timing" corresponds to the enemy annihilation production, and the "darkening occurrence timing" corresponds to the darkening production.

As shown in FIG. 47, on the screen dedicated to setting the generation timing of the "line generation timing", three item screens of "first", "intermediate", and "last" are displayed. When the effect button P381 is pressed once by moving the cursor to any of the item screens, the generation timing corresponding to the item screen is set. Here, "first" is the timing immediately after the start of the operation valid period (timing 0 seconds after the start of the operation valid period), and "intermediate" is the timing 1.5 seconds after the start of the operation valid period. , "Last" is the end timing of the operation valid period (timing 3 seconds after the start of the operation valid period). The same applies to the screen dedicated to setting the occurrence timing of the "darkening occurrence timing", and the screen can be selected from the "first", "intermediate", and "last" three-item screens. On the screen dedicated to setting the generation timing of "Meter storage start timing", three item screens of "First", "Midway 1", and "Midway 2" are displayed. When the effect button P381 is pressed once by moving the cursor to the screen, the generation timing corresponding to the item screen is set. Here, "first" is the timing immediately after the start of the operation valid period (timing 0 seconds after the start of the operation valid period), and "midway 1" is the timing 1.5 seconds after the start of the operation valid period. Yes, "midway 2" is the timing 3 seconds after the start of the operation valid period. On the screen dedicated to setting the occurrence timing of "enemy annihilation start timing", three item screens of "first", "midway 1", and "midway 2" are displayed. When the effect button P381 is pressed once by moving the cursor to the screen, the generation timing corresponding to the item screen is set. Here, "first" is the timing immediately after the start of the operation valid period (timing 0 seconds after the start of the operation valid period), and "midway 1" is the timing 2.5 seconds after the start of the operation valid period. Yes, "midway 2" is the timing 5 seconds after the start of the operation valid period.

As a modification, the change of the automatic operation timing may be set uniformly. For example, the automatic operation timing is uniformly set to the operation valid period regardless of the type of table button effect to which the automatic operation function can be applied. It can be set in 0.5 second increments from immediately after the start (0 seconds after the start of the valid period) to 2 seconds after the start of the valid period (0 seconds, 0.5 seconds, 1 second after the start of the valid period). After that, it can be set to either 1.5 seconds or 2 seconds later).

With this configuration, the automatic operation timing can be set to any timing of the player for each of the plurality of types of table button effects, so that the player can set the timing according to his / her own hobbies and tastes. It will be possible to enjoy the production of.

In the table button effect, an operation promotion fanning effect suggesting that the operation promotion image will be displayed soon before the operation promotion image is displayed may be executed. Specifically, by displaying the silhouette image representing the silhouette of the button image or the lever image in advance immediately before displaying the button image or the lever image, the button image or the lever image appears after that (that is, the operation). It is an effect that suggests that the promotion image is displayed). When displaying the button image or the lever image, it is not always necessary to execute such an operation promotion fanning effect, and the button image or the lever image may be displayed suddenly without going through the operation promotion fanning effect. Here, the operation promotion fanning effect may be provided with a plurality of types of display modes, and when such a display mode is configured, for example, the operation promotion fanning effect accompanied by a blue effect (the silhouette of the button image or the lever image glows pale blue). The operation promotion fanning effect with a red effect (the operation promotion fanning effect that the silhouette of the button image or lever image is displayed as if it is shining lightly in red) is better than the operation promotion fanning effect that is displayed as if it is. It may be configured so that the jackpot expectation is high. In addition, as another modification, a plurality of types of button images and lever images are provided (for example, in the case of a button image, a blue button image and a red button image are provided, and the red button image has a higher expectation than the blue button image. It is easier to execute the advance notice effect, for example, the red dialogue effect is easier to execute than the blue dialogue effect), the operation promotion fanning effect with the red effect is more specific button than the operation promotion fanning effect with the blue effect. It may be configured so as to easily become an image (for example, a red button image). In addition to the above, the operation promotion fanning effect for a long time (for example, 4 seconds) may be configured to have a higher expectation of big hit than the operation promotion fanning effect for a short time (for example, 2 seconds). , The operation promotion fanning effect for a long time (for example, 4 seconds) is more likely to be a specific button image (for example, a red button image) than the operation promotion fanning effect for a short time (for example, 2 seconds). You may. In addition, when a plurality of types of display modes for the operation promotion fanning effect are provided, the latter half of the variable display (specific timing after the reach state is established) is more than the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before the reach state is formed). ) May be configured so that the operation promotion fanning effect with a high degree of expectation can be easily executed, or the operation promotion fanning effect is not executed in the first half (predetermined timing before the reach state formation) during the variable display. , The operation promotion fanning effect may be executed only in the latter half of the variable display (specific timing after the reach state is formed). Further, as a further modification, the dialogue effect can be executed even during the execution of one or more times of the variation display (look-ahead variation display) before the hold targeted for the look-ahead effect is exhausted (button image is displayed). It is possible), and the operation promotion fanning effect is executed when the look-ahead variation display is being executed than when the variation display (the variation display) when the hold that is the target of the look-ahead effect is exhausted. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fluctuation display is executed, and the expectation is higher when the read-ahead variation display is being executed than when the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display) when the operation holding ball to be read ahead is digested. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the operation promotion fanning effect is executed. As another modification, the operation promotion fanning effect is not executed in the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before the reach state is formed) (or the operation promotion fanning effect with high expectation is not executed and the operation promotion with low expectation is promoted. Execute the operation promotion fanning effect (or execute the operation promotion fanning effect in the latter half of the variable display (specific timing after the reach state is established) (or operate the operation promotion fanning with high expectation instead of the operation promotion fanning effect with low expectation). When the effect is executed), the longer the period between the predetermined timing before the reach state formation, which is the first half of the variable display, and the specific timing after the reach state formation, which is the latter half of the variable display, is longer (for example, 60 seconds). The jackpot expectation may be higher than 90 seconds (90 seconds), or the button image at a specific timing after the reach state formation, which is the latter half of the variable display, tends to be a high expectation image (90 seconds). For example, it may be configured to be a red button image instead of a blue button image).

《Decorative design and simple design》
The decorative symbol P801 is a symbol displayed in a size larger than that of the simple symbol P802. The combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol P801 is composed of three symbols, and in principle, they are stopped one by one after the variable display. The combination of the stop symbols of the simple symbol P802 is also composed of three symbols, but the three are stopped at the same time after the variation display. As the combination of the stop symbols of the simple symbol P802, the same combination as the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol P801 is displayed.

In addition, during the execution of the development effect, the decorative symbol P801 may be configured to be displayed small (the alternative symbol is displayed) or the decorative symbol P801 may be hidden (the alternative symbol may also be displayed) during at least a part of the period. However, in such a situation, the simplified symbol P802 is always displayed in a variable manner. This simple symbol P802 is displayed small in the upper right corner of the effect display device P80, and while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the variable display is performed and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. During the process, the stop display is performed, and like the decorative symbol P801, the three symbols are the variable display and the stop display. By providing this simple symbol P802, a situation in which the decorative symbol P801 is desired to be made smaller or hidden (for example, when a development effect is executed, an effect is performed by a movable accessory and the center of the effect display device P80 is hidden. Even if it is (such as), it is possible to notify that it is changing (in other words, that the result of success or failure has not been determined). That is, it can be said that this simple symbol P802 is a symbol for display security (to compensate for the display state of the decorative symbol P801). When the simplified symbol P802 is variablely displayed, it is preferable to always continue the variable display from the start of the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to the stop display, that is, the decorative symbol P801 is in the middle. Even when the temporary stop is performed in (for example, when the special decorative symbol P801 that displays characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when executing the pseudo continuous effect), the simple symbol P802 temporarily stops in the middle. (Therefore, the simple symbol P802 is not provided with a special symbol for displaying characters such as "NEXT", and the simple symbol P802 only performs a fixed stop). Furthermore, in order to prevent the misunderstanding that the hit is a big hit in the case of a missed fluctuation, and to prevent the jackpot from being detected in advance in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, the player regardless of whether the fluctuation is a missed fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation. (For example, when the type of the simple symbol P802 is "1" to "7", "123"-> "234"-> "345"-> "456" ”→“ 567 ”→“ 671 ”→“ 712 ”→“ 123 ”→ ...).

Further, when the decorative symbol P801 and the simple symbol P802 start to fluctuate from the situation where the confirmation is stopped, the symbol combination (the first symbol combination immediately after the start of the fluctuation), which is the starting point, advances by one from the symbol combination at the time of the confirmation stop. However, when the simple symbol P802 starts to fluctuate from the situation where the fixed symbol P802 is fixedly stopped, the symbol combination as the starting point is a predetermined symbol combination regardless of the combination at the fixed stop. For example, when the decorative symbol P801 and the simple symbol P802 start to fluctuate in a situation where both the number combinations related to the decorative symbol P801 and the simple symbol P802 are fixedly stopped at "243", the symbol that becomes the starting point of the decorative symbol P801 The combination is "354", but the symbol combination that is the starting point of the simple symbol P802 is fixed at "123", and both the number combinations related to the decorative symbol P801 and the simple symbol P802 are fixedly stopped at "333". When the decorative symbol P801 and the simple symbol P802 start to fluctuate, the symbol combination that is the starting point of the decorative symbol P801 is "444", but the symbol combination that is the starting point of the simple symbol P802 is fixed to "123". In addition to this, the simple symbol P802 can be clearly differentiated from the decorative symbol P801 by having the following features. Specifically, it is as follows.

The display area of the decorative symbol P801 that is easy for the player to recognize is larger than the display area of the simple symbol P802 for display security (to compensate for the display state of the decorative symbol P801). This is a situation in which the decorative symbol P801 and the simple symbol P802 are fixedly stopped, the decorative symbol P801 is immediately after forming the reach state (the reach state in the state where the development effect has not been developed), and the simple symbol P802 is displayed in a variable manner. It is preferable to configure the decorative symbol P801 in this way even in a situation where the decorative symbol P801 is a small symbol and the simple symbol P802 is in a variable display, not limited to the situation in which the symbol is being developed. be.

Whether the display position of the decorative symbol P801 is in the first effect mode (for example, stage A in the normal mode or the normal mode) or in the second effect mode (for example, the rush mode described later or the stage B in the normal mode). By setting different display positions according to the display position, it is possible to realize a variety of effects in the decorative pattern P801 according to the effect mode. On the other hand, since the simple symbol P802 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol P801, it is unnecessary to develop the same display position regardless of whether it is the first effect mode or the second effect mode. It is preferable to avoid designing. The details of the effect mode in the third embodiment will be described later.

The display mode of the decorative symbol P801 depends on whether it is the first effect mode (for example, stage A in the normal mode or the normal mode) or the second effect mode (for example, the rush mode or the stage B in the normal mode). By using different display modes, it is possible to realize a variety of effects in the decorative pattern P801 according to the effect mode. For example, in the first production mode, the decorative design P801 is composed of only the decorative design P801 of numbers (decorative design P801 such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second production mode, the decoration of numbers The decorative symbol P801 is configured by combining the symbol P801 and the decorative symbol P801 of the ally character ("1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g". Decorative design P801). On the other hand, since the simple symbol P802 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol P801, only the same display mode, for example, a number, regardless of whether it is the first effect mode or the second effect mode. It is preferable that the simple symbol P802 is configured only with the decorative symbol P801 of the above, and no extra development design is required.

The display area of the decorative symbol P801 can be changed (moved, made into a small symbol) according to the fluctuation situation (for example, whether or not it is before the development effect, whether or not it is in the development effect, etc.) to decorate it. It is possible to give variety to the production of the design P801. On the other hand, since the simple symbol P802 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol P801, the display area of the simple symbol P802 is not variable (does not move or is not made into a small symbol), and an extra development design is made. It is preferable not to do so.

The decorative symbol P801 can be changed to low speed, medium speed, high speed, ultra high speed, etc. according to the fluctuation situation (for example, whether it is at the start of fluctuation, in the middle of fluctuation, or just before the end of fluctuation). , It is possible to give variety to the production of the decorative pattern P801. On the other hand, since the simple symbol P802 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol P801, the fluctuation speed of the simple symbol P802 is not variable, or the stage of making it variable is reduced (for example, only low speed and high speed). It is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design. Also, regarding the direction of fluctuation, the decorative symbol P801 enables not only the fluctuation from top to bottom but also the fluctuation from bottom to top (it enables fluctuation in a plurality of directions), while the simple symbol P802 enables fluctuation in multiple directions. It is preferable to make only the fluctuation from to the bottom. In addition to that, the decorative symbol P801 fluctuates from top to bottom in the first effect mode, but in the second effect mode, it rotates on the spot and is switched and displayed in order. The simplified symbol P802 may be changed only from top to bottom regardless of whether it is in the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

The decorative symbol P801 is a temporary stop (temporary stop in the middle of the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) before the fixed stop (stop at the timing when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops). A temporary stop with slight shaking fluctuations) is performed, and at that time, a specific design (for example, a decoration with the letters "super" foretelling the development to a development effect), which is a decorative design P801 other than numbers, is written. By temporarily stopping the symbol P801), it is possible to have a relationship between the effect of the decorative symbol P801 and other effects. On the other hand, since the simple symbol P802 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol P801, the simple symbol P802 is not temporarily stopped, and the specific symbol is not temporarily stopped. It is preferable not to do this.

The decorative design P801 overlaps with the display area of other notice effects (for example, dialogue effects, meter effects, etc.), that is, superimposed display is performed. In order to perform a powerful effect by using the area on the effect display device P80 as much as possible, such superimposed display is allowed, but the simple symbol P802 plays a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol P801. It is desirable that the display area of the simplified symbol P802 is designed so as not to overlap with the display area of the other notice effect (do not overlap and display). However, regarding the relationship with the special notice effect that is inevitably duplicated (for example, the darkening effect displayed on the entire effect display device P80, the character falling effect, etc.), the display priority of the simple symbol P802 is set to the special. It is preferable to set it higher than the display priority of the notice effect (the simple symbol P802 is set to be displayed on the front layer rather than the special notice effect). In addition, the right-handed notification image (unlike the image displayed during the special game, the right-handed notification image dedicated to the high-base state displayed during the high-base state, but may be an image common to the image during the special game. Since it is desirable that the player can always see the right-handed notification P832 described above, the display area of the simple symbol P802 and the display area of the right-handed notification image do not overlap (the display area of the right-handed notification image does not overlap). It is desirable to design so that it is not superimposed. However, when the display area of the decorative symbol P801 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the decorative symbol P801 and the display area of the right-handed notification image may overlap (superimpose display), in which case. Is preferably set to lower the display priority of the decorative symbol P801 than the display priority of the right-handed notification image (set the decorative symbol P801 to be displayed on the rear layer more than the right-handed notification image). be.

During the special game, the decorative symbol P801 may be displayed as only one, not as a combination display. For example, if "777" is fixedly stopped and the special game is executed, "7" is displayed during the special game, and if "222" is fixedly stopped and the special game is executed, the special game is executed. "2" is displayed during the special game. As a result, it is possible to recognize which decorative symbol P801 is the big hit during the special game. As a modification, only the decorative symbol P801 corresponding to the jackpot with high advantage (for example, "333", "555", "777" indicating that the jackpot is 7R or more or the jackpot of 10R) is during the special game. It may be displayed. The display area for displaying one decorative symbol P801 displayed during the special game is a round display area, a right-handed display area, a prize ball acquisition display area, and a cumulative prize ball, which are other display areas during the special game. It is desirable that the area does not overlap with the number display area, that is, it is configured so that it does not overlap (however, the highlighting may be superimposed, and in that case, the highlighting has a higher display priority). Further, the simple symbol P802 is preferably hidden during the special game (because the variable display is not performed during the special game), but it may be displayed during the special game.

In the decorative design P801, in addition to fluctuating (for example, moving from top to bottom), a display accompanied by a predetermined operation is performed at the start of fluctuation, immediately after temporary stop, after forming a reach state, during temporary stop, and the like. (The operations in each situation may be referred to as fluctuation start operation, temporary stop operation, reach state formation operation, and shaking operation). For example, in the case of non-reach (when the decorative symbol P801 and the simple symbol P802 are displayed as "624" when the confirmation is stopped), when the fluctuation starts, all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the decorative symbol P801 are displayed. Starts to fluctuate after performing an operation that expands, and then, when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation and then continues the shaking operation after "6" temporarily stops. After that, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and after "4" temporarily stops, it continues the shaking motion, and then when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it seems to bounce. After performing the operation, "2" temporarily stops and performs a slight shaking operation, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are terminated. In this case, the simple symbol P802 does not perform each operation at all. Further, when the reach state is formed and then the development effect does not develop (when the decorative symbol P801 and the simple symbol P802 are displayed as "212" when the confirmation is stopped), when the fluctuation starts, the left symbol in the decorative symbol P801 is displayed. , The middle symbol and the right symbol all move to expand and then start to fluctuate, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion and then temporarily stops "2". After that, the swaying motion is continued, and then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, a bouncing motion is performed, and then the swaying motion is continued after "2" is temporarily stopped, and then the reach is achieved. The left symbol and the right symbol rotate to notify the above, and then continue the shaking motion again. After that, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion and then "1" is provisionally. It stops and shakes a little, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the actions of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are finished (the middle symbol does not rotate). In this case, the simple symbol P802 does not perform each operation at all. In addition, when developing into a development effect (when the decorative symbol P801 and the simple symbol P802 are displayed as "232" when the confirmation is stopped), when the fluctuation starts, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the decorative symbol P801 After performing an operation that expands everything, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation and then continues the shaking operation after "2" temporarily stops. After that, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then continues the swinging motion after the "2" temporarily stops, and then the left symbol to notify that it is reach. After the right symbol rotates, the swaying motion is continued again, and then the middle symbol fluctuates while the left and right symbols are swaying (at this time, the middle symbol is enlarged). It fluctuates from top to bottom in the state, and the overlapping or overlapping ratio is high for the left and right symbols that were not overlapping or had a small overlapping ratio until then), and then the development effect In order to execute, it shifts from the normal background to the reach background, and when it is notified in the development effect that it is the result of the deviation, it shifts from the reach background to the normal background, and after the transition, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right The symbol continues to sway for a predetermined time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are terminated (the middle symbol does not bounce or rotate). In this case, the simple symbol P802 does not perform each operation at all. With this configuration, it is possible to give variety to the production of the decorative symbol P801, while the simple symbol P802 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol P801. Is preferably configured so as not to perform any particular operation, and does not require unnecessary development and design. Further, the specific symbol (for example, “7” of the middle symbol) in the decorative symbol P801 may be configured so that the predetermined operation is not performed or the probability of performing the predetermined operation is lower than that of the other symbols. This predetermined operation may be, for example, the above-mentioned temporary stop operation (bounce-like operation) (particularly, regarding “7” of the middle symbol after the reach state is formed). With this configuration, the rarity of the movement in a specific symbol can be increased. The decorative symbol P801 of the number and the decorative symbol P801 of the ally character are combined to form the decorative symbol P801 ("1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7". In the case of the decorative symbol P801) such as "+" character g ", the decorative symbol P801 of the number and the decorative symbol P801 of the ally character both perform the swaying motion, but the swaying width (swaying) is performed. It is a moving distance, for example, if it sways up and down, the distance width between the state where the decorative symbol P801 during the swaying operation is displayed at the top and the state where it is displayed at the bottom) is made different. A dynamic swinging motion may be realized, and when configured as such, the swinging width of the decorative symbol P801 of the number is made smaller than the swinging width of the decorative symbol P801 of the ally character, or the decorative symbol of the number is used. P801 may be configured not to perform the shaking operation, and only the decorative symbol P801 of the ally character may perform the shaking operation.

Here, in the third embodiment, the effect using the decorative symbol P801 is possible, and an effect different from the pseudo continuous effect can be executed. For at least one symbol (for example, the right symbol) of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the decorative symbol P801, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is provisionally changed from the start to the stop display. Fixed in the stopped state {For other symbols (for example, the left symbol and the middle symbol), depending on the fluctuation status from the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to the stop display. The fluctuation speed fluctuates while changing to low speed, medium speed, high speed, ultra high speed, etc., or temporarily stops (that is, as an example, while the left symbol and the middle symbol are fluctuating, the right symbol fluctuates. Temporary stop has been continued since the start)}. Such a variation of the decorative symbol P801 is referred to as a fixed special variation. When the fixed special fluctuation is performed, the expectation of the jackpot in the hold is higher than when the fixed special fluctuation is not performed, or the expectation that the fluctuation in which the fixed special fluctuation is performed is the jackpot fluctuation is higher. It is configured. When the fixed special fluctuation is performed, it is preferable that the simplified symbol P802 always continues the fluctuation display from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to the stop display (note that the fluctuation speed is It is preferable not to make it variable or to reduce the number of steps to make it variable, and to make a definite stop when the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed). Since the decorative symbol P801 is fixed (temporarily stopped) from the start of the fluctuation, it is difficult for the player to know whether the fixed special fluctuation is fluctuating or not, so the simple symbol P802 is always displayed in a fluctuating manner. By letting the player do so, the player can confirm the situation in which the display is variable. Further, since a skilled player (a player who knows the existence and role of the fixed special variation) can detect in advance that the fixed (temporarily stopped) decorative symbol P801 will be fixedly stopped, for example, the middle symbol. If is a fixed special fluctuation such that is fixed (temporarily stopped) at "7", and if the right symbol and the left symbol form a reach state at "7", the big hit can be detected in advance. ..

In the third embodiment, there are a plurality of types of effect modes, and it is determined which type of effect can be executed for each effect mode. To specifically explain the effect mode and the effect content executed in the effect mode, for example, "normal mode" and "rush mode" are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, and changes in the game state and special symbols. One of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set according to the number of impressions and the like, and a variable effect according to the set effect mode is executed. Basically, when the game state is the normal state (low base state), the "normal mode" is set, and when the game state is the time saving state (high base state), the "rush mode" is set. When any of the effect modes is set, as an effect (variable effect) suggesting that the user is staying in the effect mode, a background image dedicated to the effect mode (a background displayed on the back of the decorative symbol 61) is displayed on the screen. (Image) is displayed, and a BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 83. Since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently staying from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing. Specifically, the "normal mode" is equipped with four stages, "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage". In addition, the transition from "Stage A" to "Stage B", the transition from "Stage B" to "Stage C", the transition from "Stage C" to "Stage A", and the pre-reading notice production judgment of the "pre-reading stage" If you win the execution (transition), you will move from the stage you are currently staying to the "look-ahead stage". If the Zoro eyes are displayed, other than the Zoro eyes will be displayed in the "Look-ahead stage", and the next change will return to the stage before the transition to the "Look-ahead stage"). The BGM (stage BGM) is different for each of "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage" (also different from the stage BGM in "rush mode"), but it is not in "stage A". The stage BGM is interrupted (finished) triggered by the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) of the reach loss (the gap that does not form the reach state, for example, "351"), and the stage is triggered by the start of the next fluctuation. BGM is started from the beginning, and in "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage", the stage BGM is not interrupted (it never ends) even if it becomes a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation stop (fixed stop). The stage BGM is output continuously after the next fluctuation (the same applies to the "rush mode").

Here, the pseudo-continuous production can be executed in any of the "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage", but in any stage, at the time of temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous production. The stage BGM is not output at (when a predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a symbol having the character "NEXT") is displayed in a variable manner in the vicinity of a predetermined temporary stop position and then temporarily stopped. (Interruption), the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the re-variation display (re-variation after the temporary stop), or the stage BGM is switched to a specific BGM different from that before the re-variation display. After that, when developing into a development effect in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage", the background image of each stage (the stage where you were staying) is switched to the background image of the development effect. (At the same time, it is switched to the BGM dedicated to the development effect), the stage BGM is not output during the development effect, and the effect indicating the deviation is displayed in the development effect, so that the development effect is executed in the variable display. It switches to the background image of each stage again (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development effect development), but in that situation, even if the background image of the stage is displayed until the next variable display starts. , The stage BGM is not output, and the BGM dedicated to the development production is not output (there is no sound, or a specific BGM different from the stage BGM and the development production BGM is output). Therefore, the stage BGM is not interrupted (does not end) even if the fluctuation is stopped (fixed stop) out of reach, and the stage BGM is output continuously after the next fluctuation. "Stage B" and "Stage" Even if it is "C" or "look-ahead stage" (even if it is not "stage A"), if it is missed via the development effect, the stage BGM is before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop). Will be interrupted, and the stage BGM will be started from the beginning with the start of the next fluctuation.

In the "rush mode", the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Here, a special effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (for example, "Continue!", Which is a notice of continuous dialogue and the execution of the subsequent pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed, and the subsequent execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. It is suggested that a pseudo-continuous production (re-variation display) will be performed after that by executing an unconfirmed production (such as "may continue?"), But this special production is "Stage A" and "Stage A". It is displayed only in "Stage C" and not in "Stage B" and "Look-ahead stage". In other words, by preparing both a stage where the possibility of pseudo-continuous production can be detected and a stage where it cannot be detected and repeating the stage transition between the stages, a production that does not make the player bored is realized. doing. In "Stage A", a special effect using the character A as a motif is executed, but in "Stage C", a special effect using the character B as a motif is executed. In addition, it is a different effect from the special effect, and it is confirmed that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed after it occurs (for example, when the character C appears, the line "Continue confirmed!" Is always displayed. A production that is displayed) is also provided, and it is a production that is different from the special production and the pseudo-continuous production. For example, when the character D appears, the line "development confirmed!" Is always displayed). The pseudo-continuous confirmation effect and the development confirmation effect can be executed in any of the "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage". In this way, when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and when the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed, the execution expectation of the pseudo-continuous effect can be determined by displaying one or more combinations of the special effect, the pseudo-continuous effect, and the development confirmed effect. It is possible to diversify the degree of development expectation for development production. In addition, all of the special effect, the pseudo-continuous confirmation effect, and the development confirmation effect may be executed during one variation display, and in that case, during a certain re-variation display (for example, the first or second re-variation display). ) May include a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo-continuous confirmation effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development confirmation effect is executed. In the pattern in which the special effect is executed in the first or second time), the pseudo-continuous confirmation effect may be further executed during the certain revariation display after the special effect is executed during the certain revariation display.

<< Playability of "small hit V" mainly with ordinary symbols >>
The gaming machines in the present embodiment and the second embodiment (including application examples) are mainly playable with special symbols in the low base state, and are mainly composed of both special symbols and ordinary symbols in the high base state. Although it was playable, in the third embodiment, in both the low base state and the high base state, by making the game playability mainly based on ordinary symbols, only the result of the winning / losing lottery performed by the gaming machine is expected. It is possible to pay attention to the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory P770 instead of the playability (not the passive playability), and to expect a big hit or visually increase the expectation for the big hit. It becomes. Specifically, it is as follows.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that employs the “small hit V” as in the present embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment does not have the second special symbol, but has only the first special symbol. The probability of winning a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol is 100%, and "holding related to the first special symbol occurs" or "winning the ordinary symbol lottery, the first 1 The game ball enters with the ordinary electric accessory P770 provided in the starting winning opening P711 in an open state, that is, indirectly means the acquisition of the right to execute a big hit game (including a small hit V). Yes (substantially a big hit). In the third embodiment, one hold related to the first special symbol is provided, but four may be provided. Further, as a modification, it is not necessary to provide a hold (hold function) related to the first special symbol (in this case, the ordinary symbol lottery is won and the ordinary electric accessory P770 provided in the first start winning opening P711 is opened. As a state, the winning / failing lottery is performed when the game ball enters, but since the hold function is not installed, when the winning / failing lottery is performed again, the normal symbol lottery is won again and the first start winning opening P711 is provided. It is necessary to open the normal electric accessory P770 and re-enter the game ball).

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment has a normal period in which it is difficult to enter the first starting winning opening P711 related to the acquisition of the right of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and the first. A special period is generated in which it is easy to enter the first starting winning opening P711 related to the acquisition of the right of the special symbol lottery of the special symbol. With this configuration, the number of required winning openings can be reduced by creating a state in which the ease of entering the ball of the first starting winning opening P711 is different without requiring the second starting winning opening P721. , It is possible to make it appear as if the probability fluctuation function is operating in the small hit V.

The following describes an example of configuring the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, which is more interesting by changing the ease of entering the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol for a special period. do.

FIG. 48 is a diagram conceptually showing an example of a board surface configuration (arrangement of winning devices) that can be adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment. An opening is formed in the upper center of the game area P501 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment so that the effect display device P80 can be visually recognized, and a frame member of a center decoration unit (not shown) is formed in the opening. Attached, it constitutes an inner partition of the gaming area P501. A specific entry port P910 is attached below the effect display device, and a distribution device P900 for distributing the game ball that has entered the specific entry port P910 to either the operation port P741 or the out port P790 (not shown) is provided. Has been done. Further, in the upper left part of the game area P501, the first starting winning opening P711 (the first starting winning opening P711 is the starting winning opening for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol) and the ordinary. The electric accessory P770 has a large winning opening P751 in the lower left portion of the game area P501. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, it is not necessary to switch from left-handed to right-handed or right-handed to left-handed, and the game proceeds only by left-handed.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that adopts the “small hit V” as in the present embodiment, and the major difference from the present embodiment regarding the playability (game property) is the second. The major difference is that it does not have a special symbol and the probability of becoming a "small hit" or a "big hit" in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is 100%.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment also performs a specific game (high base state) by activating the electric chew support function (electric support) function after various big hits (including small hit V) as in the present embodiment. Although it is to be executed, as a condition for ending the specific game (high base state) in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, "the variable display based on the specified number of special symbol lottery of the first special symbol has been completed. , Or "the big hit game (small hit V) is executed". The specified number of times is set to one (the high base state can be terminated even when the first special symbol is displayed once in a variable manner). Although not described in detail, other design values (big hit probability, number of prize balls of various winning openings, etc.) are not limited to those described in this embodiment, and are appropriately set according to the game characteristics. ..

Subsequently, the procedure for playing the game on the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment and the progress of the game will be described. First, in the low base state, the player operates the handle P204 to launch the game ball toward the game area (left side area P501L) on the left side of the effect display device P80. The game ball launched in the left side region P501L can enter the specific entry port P910, and when the ball enters the specific entry port P910, the distribution device P900 uses the operation port P741 or the out port P790 (not shown). It is distributed to one of. In the third embodiment, one first route to the operating port P741 and nine routes to the out port P790 are provided in the distribution device P900. When the game ball is distributed to the first route and the game ball enters (passes) into the operating port P741, the normal symbol lottery is executed. In the third embodiment, the probability of becoming a "hit" in the normal symbol lottery is set to, for example, 1/1 (100%) in both the low base state and the high base state. However, if a "hit" is obtained in the normal symbol lottery in the low base state, the fluctuation display period of the normal symbol related to one normal symbol lottery is 120 seconds on average, and one normal symbol lottery (win) is performed. The operating period of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is selected to be 5 seconds at 10% and 0.01 seconds at 90%. The average of the fluctuation display period of the ordinary symbol related to one ordinary symbol lottery is 120 seconds. In this time, the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory P770 related to one ordinary symbol lottery (win) is 5 seconds. This is because the effect display device P80 executes an effect of notifying whether the time is 0.01 seconds (in other words, suggesting an expectation of 5 seconds). In both the low base state and the high base state, "elapse of the opening time of the specified time" or "winning of one game ball" is defined as the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 770. Here, when 5 seconds is selected as the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory, the player can easily enter the ordinary electric accessory P770, so that the player aims to enter the ordinary electric accessory P770 and actually By entering the ball, the right to be involved in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is acquired (when 0.05 seconds is selected as the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory P770, the ball is entered into the ordinary electric accessory P770. Is so difficult that the right to the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol cannot be obtained substantially). Since the probability of becoming a "small hit" or "big hit" in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is 100%, if the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is acquired, it is a spec of the small hit V. Therefore, it is practically a big hit.

After a big hit (small hit V) from the low base state, it always shifts to the high base state (as a modification, it may shift to the high base state at 50% and shift to the low base state at 50%). Even in the high base state, as in the low base state, the ball is entered into the specific entry port P910 and the ball is aimed at entering (passing) into the operation port P741 via the distribution device P900. In the case of "hit" in the ordinary symbol lottery, the fluctuation display period of the ordinary symbol related to one ordinary symbol lottery is 1 second on average, and the ordinary electric accessory related to one ordinary symbol lottery (win). Since the operating period of P770 is selected to be 5 seconds at 100%, in the high base state, unlike the low base state, the ball entering (passing) into the operating port P741 always enters the normal electric accessory P770. Since it is easy to enter the ball, by entering (passing) the ball into the operating port P741, the player substantially acquires the right to be involved in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and yet the special symbol of the first special symbol is entered. Since the probability of becoming a "small hit" or a "big hit" in the lottery is 100%, it is practically a big hit. The average of the fluctuation display period of the ordinary symbol related to one ordinary symbol lottery is 1 second, although the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory P770 related to one ordinary symbol lottery (win) is always 5 seconds. Therefore, an effect of notifying whether the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory P770 related to one ordinary symbol lottery (winning) is 5 seconds or 0.01 seconds (suggesting the expectation of 5 seconds) is produced. This is because it is not necessary to execute the operation on the display device P80, so that the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 can be immediately started. Even after the big hit (small hit V) from the high base state, it always shifts to the high base state, so the situation where the high base state ends and shifts to the low base state shifts after the big hit (small hit V). If the big hit or small hit is not won by the end of the variable display based on the special symbol lottery for the specified number of times of the first special symbol (once in the third embodiment) in the high base state (the variable display is displayed as it is). When finished). That is, since the high base state is reached until the variable display based on the special symbol lottery for the specified number of times of the first special symbol in the high base state (once in the third embodiment) is completed, the high base state is reached. It is possible to create a game property in which a ball is entered (passed) into the operating port P741 from the distribution accessory P900.

Supplementally, when 5 seconds is selected as the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory P770, "Aim for the electric chew!" On the effect display device P80 before and after the ordinary electric accessory P770 operates. Is displayed, and when the small hit is won, "Aim for the attacker!" Is displayed on the effect display device P80 before the start of the small hit game and after the start of the small hit game. As a modified example, it may be configured so that it does not have a big hit and only a small hit (the probability of becoming a "small hit" in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is 100%). Further, as a modification, after a big hit (small hit V) from the high base state, it may be configured to shift to the high base state at 80% and shift to the low base state at 20%, and is configured as such. In this case, the specified number of times for the first special symbol that ends the high base state may be 99 times instead of 1 time. In that case, there is no problem even if it is installed. In addition, in the case of configuration, since the specified number of times of the first special symbol is very large, the possibility that the high base state ends at the specified number of times of the first special symbol is low, so that the specified number of times of the first special symbol is set. A big hit (small hit V) that shifts to a low base state of 20% instead of the gameplay of letting the ball enter (pass) from the distribution accessory P900 to the operating port P741 by the end of the fluctuation display based on the special symbol lottery. It becomes a game playability that it is important to avoid.

[Fourth Example]
By installing the above-mentioned "relief function", the pachinko gaming machine P (including the prerequisite technology) of the present embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment can further expand the range of games. Become. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only the prerequisite technology and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below, and the description of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as the prerequisite technology or the elements described in the present embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment employs the above-mentioned "second special symbol priority digestion control" and "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)". In the low-probability low-base state, the gaming machine shifts to the high-probability high-base state after the end of the special game, and the state is up to 100 rotations (related to the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol). The total number of special symbol lottery (the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) will be continued until it reaches 100 times. After 100 rotations, the game shifts to the low-probability high-base state, but by hitting the jackpot within 100 rotations, the number of STs (the number of times in the high-probability high-base state) is again after the execution of the special game related to the big hit is completed. ) Is reset 100 times. In the low-probability and high-base state, since the electric chew support function is not operating, the player launches a game ball aiming at the special figure 1 starting port and enters the ball, so that the first special symbol is correct or not. Since the game progresses by lottery (and fluctuation) and the electric chew support function is activated in the high probability and high base state, the player shoots and enters the game ball aiming at the special figure 2 starting port. As a result, the game will proceed in the winning / failing lottery (and fluctuation) related to the second special symbol. Supplementally, when the first special symbol is changing, the second special symbol does not change (even if there is a hold related to the second special symbol, it waits for the winning / failing lottery or the start of the change), and the second When the special symbol is changing, the first special symbol does not change (even if there is a hold related to the first special symbol, the winning / losing lottery or the start of the change is awaited). As a modification, by adopting "V probability variation", it may be configured so that it is possible to shift to not only the high probability high base state but also the low probability high base state after the end of the special game. More specifically, during the execution of the special game, the ball is entered into the "specific area P750" to shift to the high-probability high-base state, and the ball is not entered to shift to the low-probability high-base state. In this case, in the special game executed when the result of the winning / failing lottery related to the first special symbol becomes a big hit, the special game (the obstructing member blocking the specific area P750) makes it easy to enter the specific area P750. A special game that drives the game ball to a position that does not prevent entry, or a first guide position that guides the game ball outside the specific area 750P and a second guide position that guides the game ball to the specific area P750. A special game in which the displaceable guide member is in the second guide position) and a special game in which it is difficult to enter the ball (the obstructing member blocking the specific area P750 does not drive or drives only for a very short time, so that it is difficult to enter the ball. In the special game executed by setting the ratio to 50:50 and the result of the winning / failing lottery related to the second special symbol to be a big hit, (1) it is easy to enter the specific area P750. It is preferable that the ratio of the special game jackpot to the jackpot that is difficult to enter is 80:20, or (2) only the special game that makes it easy to enter the specific area P750 is provided.

In this way, the opportunity to enter the high base state in the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment is a big hit (special game), but in addition to that, a "relief function" is provided, and after the special game is completed. In addition to this, there is an opportunity to enter a high base state. Specifically, after the high-probability high-base state ends (after 100 rotations have passed since the end of the special game), and after 599 rotations have passed (the next change in the 699th rotation after the end of the special game). That is, it enters the high base state at the 700th rotation after the end of the special game (in other words, when the number of fluctuation display times after the end of the special game reaches 700 times, it enters the high base state which is a "relief function". However, thereafter, the number of variable display times (700 times in the above example) that enters this high base state may be simply referred to as "the number of starts"). However, the high base state in this "relief function" is not given up to the high probability state, that is, it shifts to the low probability high base state. For the low-probability and high-base state that rushes from the 700th rotation, up to 100 rotations (total number of special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol and special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol (first special symbol and first special symbol). Until the total number of times the 2 special symbols are displayed changes) reaches 100 times), that is, it continues from the 700th rotation to the 799th rotation after the end of the special game (in other words, the high base which is the "relief function"). It can be said that the number of times of variation display in which the state continues is 100 times, and thereafter, the number of times of variation in display in which this high base state continues (100 times in the above example) may be simply referred to as "number of continuations"). From the next fluctuation (from the 800th rotation after the end of the special game), it will shift to the low probability low base state (in other words, when the fluctuation display number after reaching the above specific number reaches 100 times. It can be said that the high-base state, which is the "relief function", ends and shifts to the low-base state. It is also called "the number of ends"). As a matter of course, in the low-probability and high-base state, which is this "relief function", the electric chew support function is operating, so the player must shoot and enter the game ball aiming at the special figure 2 starting port. Then, the game will proceed in the winning / failing lottery (and fluctuation) related to the second special symbol, and in the low probability low base state that shifts thereafter, the electric chew support function is not operating, so special figure 1 By launching a game ball aiming at the starting port and letting the ball enter, the game progresses in the winning / failing lottery (and fluctuation) related to the first special symbol. It should be noted that what is described as "○○○ rotation number" in the following description is the number of rotations calculated after the end of the special game.

FIG. 49 shows an effect mode (effect content displayed on the effect display device P80) regarding the state immediately before and the state immediately after the “relief function” is generated. In addition, in FIG. 49, at least one hold related to the first special symbol exists (or the second special symbol) in FIG. 49 (a) which is the 699th rotation which is the state immediately before the “relief function” occurs. There is one or more holds related to the symbol).

FIG. 49A shows a situation in which the fluctuation at the 699th rotation (one time before the start number of entering the high base state (the “relief function” occurs)) has stopped. It should be noted that the symbol fixing time has not yet passed (it is exactly the timing immediately after the fluctuation ends). At the 699th rotation, the first special symbol has changed and stopped, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In this situation, the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed before reaching the 699th rotation (for example, from the 697th rotation, the 698th rotation, etc.), and the decorative pattern is displayed. The background of the mountain is displayed behind. With this fluctuation stop as an opportunity (to be exact, with the lapse of the symbol fixing time after the fluctuation stop), the transition from the low-probability low-base state to the low-probability high-base state is performed.

FIG. 49 (b) shows a situation in which the change at the 700th rotation (the number of starts of entering the high base state (the “relief function” occurs)) has started and a state in which the change is in progress. From the situation of FIG. 49 (a), the hold of the first special symbol is exhausted, and the change of the first special symbol starts at the 700th rotation. More precisely, it is a situation in which the fluctuation of the 700th rotation, which is a new fluctuation of the first special symbol, has started after the symbol fixing time of the 699th rotation has elapsed. Here, at the start of fluctuation (or immediately before the start of fluctuation), the character "right-handed" (separate notification A) is displayed small in the upper right corner of the screen. After that (or at the same timing), the background of the mountain, which is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low-probability low-base state, is hidden, and instead, the transition to the low-probability high-base state is performed. A stage change effect is generated. This stage change effect is a background for stage change in which the screen immediately darkens from the background of the mountain that has been displayed until then, and the white characters of "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on the black background. Approximately at the same time that the background for this stage change is displayed, the sound "SEVEN RUSH rushes!" Is output from the speaker 83. This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability and high base state. In addition, when the background for this stage change is displayed, the characters "Right-handed" (separate field notification B) are displayed in large size at approximately the same time. As a modification, after a predetermined time has passed since the background for the stage change is displayed (for example, 2 seconds later) or after the background for the stage change is hidden (in other words, FIG. 49 (in other words, which will be described later). Almost at the same time as the background display corresponding to "SEVEN RUSH" shown in c) is started), the voice "SEVEN RUSH rushes!" Is output from the speaker 83, or the large characters "Right-handed" are displayed. It may be displayed large. As a modification, the characters "SEVEN RUSH rush!" May be displayed. In that case, after a predetermined time has passed (for example, 2 seconds) after the background for the stage change is displayed, or for the stage change. It is desirable to display it after the background is hidden.

FIG. 49 (c) shows the situation during the fluctuation at the 700th rotation. The background for the stage change at the 700th rotation is hidden, and instead, the sky background, which is the background corresponding to the low-probability high-base state of "SEVEN RUSH", is displayed. At this time, the large characters "Right-handed" may be hidden, but it is desirable that they are continuously displayed from the background for the stage change (or until the movement stops at the 700th rotation. Or, it is desirable that the display continues until the 701st rotation starts). Note that the small "right-handed" characters are always displayed during the low-probability, high-base state, unlike the large "right-handed" characters.

FIG. 49 (d) shows a situation in which the fluctuation of the 799th rotation (the number of terminations at which the high base state (“relief function”) ends) has stopped. It should be noted that the symbol fixing time has not yet passed (it is exactly the timing immediately after the fluctuation ends). As described above, the 700th rotation was the fluctuation of the first special symbol, but the 701st to 798th rotations (not shown) are already in the high base state (low probability high base state), so the second special. It is a fluctuation of the design. However, there is no problem even if all or part of the 701st to 798th rotations is a variation of the first special symbol. Then, the 799th rotation is also a variation of the second special symbol. Therefore, FIG. 49 (d) shows that the second special symbol has finished fluctuating at the 799th rotation. At this time, the characters "SEVEN RUSH end ..." may be displayed. In FIG. 49, at least one hold related to the second special symbol exists (or is related to the first special symbol) in FIG. 49 (d), which is the 799th rotation immediately before the end of the “relief function”. There is one or more holds). From the 700th rotation to the 799th rotation, the sky background which is the background of "SEVEN RUSH" is displayed. In this situation where the symbol fixing time has not yet passed, the low probability and high base state is maintained.

FIG. 49 (e) shows a situation in which the fluctuation at the 800th rotation has started and a situation in which the fluctuation is in progress. It is a situation where the change of the second special symbol has started as the 800th rotation by digesting the hold of the second special symbol from FIG. 49 (d). More precisely, it is a situation in which the fluctuation of the 800th rotation, which is a new fluctuation of the second special symbol, has started after the symbol fixing time of the 799th rotation has elapsed. Here, the small "right-handed" character (separate notification A) displayed in the upper right corner of the screen at the start of fluctuation (or immediately before the start of fluctuation) is hidden. After that (or at the same timing), the sky background, which is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low-probability high-base state, is hidden, and instead, the low-probability high-base state is entered. A stage change effect is generated. This stage production is the same production (background) as the 700th rotation stage production (background for stage change). As a modification, it may be an effect (background) different from the stage effect (background for stage change) at the 700th rotation. For example, as a background for stage change in which black characters of "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on a white background. Is also good. After that, the background for the stage change is hidden, and instead the background of the mountain, which is the background corresponding to the low probability low base state, is displayed. As a modification, it may be the background of the sea instead of the background of the mountain (it may be different from the background before the "relief function" occurred), and it may be the background of the mountain or the background of the sea. It may be designed so that it may be a background (it may be configured to have a case where it differs from the background before the "relief function" occurs and a case where it does not differ). In addition, in order to clarify that the background of the mountain (or the background of the sea), which is the background corresponding to the low probability low base state at this time, is not the "relief function", the high base state ("relief function"). It is desirable that the process always ends within 100 rotations, which is the number of continuations of the above, and the background is switched to a background of a different production mode (effect stage) (for example, a background of a grassland or a background of the universe).

With the above configuration, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the "relief function" has occurred, and the change in the base state and the change in the effect mode (effect stage) due to it can be smoothly performed. This will be done, and the player can recognize the change of the base state without any discomfort in the production. In addition, since the type of starting port that the player aims at will be different due to the switching of the base state (because the starting port of Special Figure 1 will be switched to the starting port of Special Figure 2), the separate notification for that will also be given. The striking notification A is displayed immediately and continuously, and the striking notification B is displayed prominently in association with the stage change, so that the striking notification B is appropriately and emphasized when the base state is switched. (Aiming at the special figure 2 starting port) can be notified, and even in the subsequent high base state, it is possible to continuously notify the player (aiming at the special figure 2 starting port). Appropriate separate notification is realized.

In FIG. 49, it is assumed that there is a hold related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol at the timing when the base state is switched (the timing when the “relief function” occurs and the timing when the “relief function” ends). bottom. Next, in FIG. 50, regarding the situation where there is no hold related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol at the timing when the base state is switched (the timing when the “relief function” is generated and the timing when the “relief function” ends). explain.

FIG. 50 shows an effect mode (effect content displayed on the effect display device P80) regarding the state immediately before and the state immediately after the “relief function” is generated. In FIG. 50, at least the hold related to the first special symbol does not exist in FIG. 50 (a) which is the 699th rotation, which is the state immediately before the "relief function" occurs (the hold related to the second special symbol). Does not exist).

FIG. 50A shows a situation in which the fluctuation at the 699th rotation has stopped. It should be noted that the symbol fixing time has not yet passed (it is exactly the timing immediately after the fluctuation ends). At the 699th rotation, the first special symbol has changed and stopped, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In this situation, the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed before reaching the 699th rotation (for example, from the 697th rotation, the 698th rotation, etc.), and the decorative pattern is displayed. The background of the mountain is displayed behind. With this fluctuation stop as an opportunity (to be exact, with the lapse of the symbol fixing time after the fluctuation stop), the transition from the low-probability low-base state to the low-probability high-base state is performed.

FIG. 50B shows a situation in which the first special symbol and the decorative symbol maintain the stop display after the fluctuation at the 699th rotation is completed (the symbol fixing time has also elapsed). As described above, this situation continues because there is no hold for the first special symbol (there is no hold for the second special symbol). In this situation, the character "right-handed" (typed notification A) is displayed small in the upper right corner of the screen. The display start timing of the small "right-handed" character is immediately after the fluctuation at the 699th rotation is completed and the symbol fixing time has elapsed. The base state at this time has already been switched to the high base state, and is in the low probability high base state. However, as the background of the production mode (production stage), the background of the mountain is continuously displayed.

FIG. 50 (c) shows a situation in which the fluctuation at the 700th rotation has started. From the situation of FIG. 50 (b), it is a situation in which the second special symbol has started to fluctuate due to the entry of the ball at the special figure 2 starting port. By starting the fluctuation, the background of the mountain, which is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low-probability low-base state, is hidden, and the stage change indicates that the transition to the low-probability high-base state is performed instead. Production occurs. This stage change effect is a background for stage change in which the screen immediately darkens from the background of the mountain that has been displayed until then, and the white characters of "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on the black background. Approximately at the same time that the background for this stage change is displayed, the sound "SEVEN RUSH rushes!" Is output from the speaker 83. This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability and high base state. In addition, when the background for this stage change is displayed, the characters "Right-handed" (separate field notification B) are displayed in large size at approximately the same time. As a modification, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 2 seconds later) after the background for the stage change is displayed, or after the background for the stage change is hidden (in other words, FIG. 50 (in other words, which will be described later). Almost at the same time as the background display corresponding to "SEVEN RUSH" shown in d) is started), the voice "SEVEN RUSH rushes!" Is output from the speaker 83, or the large characters "Right-handed" are displayed. It may be displayed large. As a modification, the characters "SEVEN RUSH rush!" May be displayed. In that case, after a predetermined time has passed (for example, 2 seconds) after the background for the stage change is displayed, or for the stage change. It is desirable to display it after the background is hidden.

FIG. 50 (d) shows the situation during the fluctuation at the 700th rotation. The background for the stage change at the 700th rotation is hidden, and instead, the sky background, which is the background corresponding to the low-probability high-base state of "SEVEN RUSH", is displayed. At this time, the large characters "Right-handed" may be hidden, but it is desirable that they are continuously displayed from the background for the stage change (or until the movement stops at the 700th rotation. Or, it is desirable that the display continues until the 701st rotation starts). Note that the small "right-handed" characters are always displayed during the low-probability, high-base state, unlike the large "right-handed" characters.

FIG. 50 (e) shows a situation in which the fluctuation at the 799th rotation has stopped. It should be noted that the symbol fixing time has not yet passed (it is exactly the timing immediately after the fluctuation ends). As described above, the 700th rotation was the fluctuation of the first special symbol, but the 701st to 798th rotations (not shown) are already in the high base state (low probability high base state), so the second special. It is a fluctuation of the design. However, there is no problem even if all or part of the 701st to 798th rotations is a variation of the first special symbol. Then, the 799th rotation is also a variation of the second special symbol. Therefore, FIG. 50 (e) shows that the second special symbol has finished fluctuating at the 799th rotation. At this time, the characters "SEVEN RUSH end ..." may be displayed. In FIG. 50, at least in FIG. 50 (e), which is the 799th rotation immediately before the end of the "relief function", there is no hold related to the second special symbol (there is no hold related to the first special symbol). ). From the 700th rotation to the 799th rotation, the sky background which is the background of "SEVEN RUSH" is displayed. In this situation where the symbol fixing time has not yet passed, the low probability and high base state is maintained.

FIG. 50 (f) shows a situation in which the second special symbol and the decorative symbol maintain the stop display after the variation at the 799th rotation is completed (the symbol fixing time has also elapsed). As described above, this situation continues because there is no hold related to the second special symbol (there is no hold related to the first special symbol). In this situation, the small "right-handed" character (typed notification A) on the upper right of the screen, which was displayed in the high base state until then, is hidden. The display end (non-display) timing of the small "right-handed" character is immediately after the end of the 799th rotation variation and the elapse of the symbol fixing time. The base state at this time has already been switched to the low base state, and is in the low probability low base state. However, as the background of the effect mode (effect stage), the sky background is continuously displayed.

FIG. 50 (g) shows a situation in which the fluctuation at the 800th rotation has started and a situation in which the fluctuation is in progress. From the situation of FIG. 50 (f), it is a situation in which the first special symbol has started to fluctuate due to the presence of a ball at the first starting port. By starting the fluctuation, the fluctuation of the first special symbol has started as the 800th rotation. More precisely, it is a situation in which the fluctuation of the 800th rotation, which is a new fluctuation of the first special symbol, has started after the symbol fixing time of the 799th rotation has elapsed. In this situation, the small "right-handed" character (opposite field notification A) already displayed in the upper right corner of the screen is hidden. After that (or at the same timing), the sky background, which is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low-probability high-base state, is hidden, and instead, the low-probability high-base state is entered. A stage change effect is generated. This stage production is the same production (background) as the 700th rotation stage production (background for stage change). As a modification, it may be an effect (background) different from the stage effect (background for stage change) at the 700th rotation. For example, as a background for stage change in which black characters of "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on a white background. Is also good. After that, the background for the stage change is hidden, and instead the background of the mountain, which is the background corresponding to the low probability low base state, is displayed. As a modification, it may be the background of the sea instead of the background of the mountain (it may be different from the background before the "relief function" occurred), and it may be the background of the mountain or the background of the sea. It may be designed so that it may be a background (it may be configured to have a case where it differs from the background before the "relief function" occurs and a case where it does not differ). In addition, in order to clarify that the background of the mountain (or the background of the sea), which is the background corresponding to the low probability and low base state at this time, is not a "relief function", it must be completed within 100 rotations. , It is desirable to switch to a background of a different production mode (production stage) (for example, a background of a grassland or a background of space).

As a modification of the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, the timing at which the "relief function" ends is not after the 799th rotation of the symbol fixing time elapses, but at the start of the symbol fixing time (or when the fluctuation is stopped). Yes, just before the symbol fixing time starts). That is, at the start of the symbol fixing time at the 799th rotation (or when the fluctuation is stopped and immediately before the symbol fixing time starts), the low probability high base state may be configured to shift to the low probability low base state. In such a configuration, at the start of the symbol fixing time (or when the fluctuation is stopped and immediately before the symbol fixing time starts), the small "right-handed" character (typed notification A) is hidden and the symbol is fixed. It is desirable that the small "right-handed" character (typed notification A) is hidden during the time.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine P shifts to the high-probability high-base state, which is the high-base state even after the end of the special game. Since this high-probability high-base state continues for 100 rotations, the "high-base state of 100 rotations" is a high-base state of the "relief function" even in the high-base state after the end of the special game. (Note that, as a modification, (1) the high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the special game is rotated 100 times and the high base state (low probability high base state) of the "relief function" is set. It may be 200 rotations instead of 100 rotations, and (2) the high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the special game is 200 rotations instead of 100 rotations and the high base state (low probability high base state) of the "relief function". The state) may be set to 100 rotations).

In the high base state after the end of the special game, the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, the 100th rotation) and the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, the first rotation to 99 rotations). In the high base state of the "relief function", the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, the 799th rotation) and the fluctuation pattern table of the high base state are configured differently from the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the eye). The fluctuation pattern table referred to in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation (for example, the 700th rotation to the 798th rotation) is configured to be the same. The fluctuation pattern table referred to in the high base state of the "relief function" (for example, from the 700th rotation to the 799th rotation) is referred to in (1) the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation). The fluctuation pattern table may be different from the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation (for example, the first rotation to the 99th rotation), and (2) the high base after the end of the special game. It may be the same as the fluctuation pattern referred to in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the state (for example, the first rotation to the 99th rotation). The fluctuation pattern described here is a fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol.

Here, the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation) is referred to as "variation pattern table A", and the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game. The fluctuation pattern table referred to in (for example, 1st to 99th rotations) is referred to as "variation pattern table B", and the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the high base state of "relief function" (for example, 700th rotation to 799th rotation) is referred to as "variation pattern table B". Assuming that "variation pattern table C" is used, in the case of "variation pattern table A", when the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a predetermined number (for example, 4 is used, and 4 is reserved for the start of fluctuation. When the number of holdings related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a specific number (for example, 1 when the number is reduced from 1 to 3), and the number is reduced from 1 to 0 due to the holding digestion accompanying the start of fluctuation. When the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a predetermined number for "variation pattern table B" and "variation pattern table C". (For example, when the number is 4, and the number is reduced from 4 to 3 due to the hold digestion accompanying the start of fluctuation), and when the number of holds related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a specific number (for example, 1). , When the number decreases from 1 to 0 due to the pending digestion accompanying the start of fluctuation), the tendency of selecting the fluctuation pattern is the same. The fluctuation pattern table is simply shown in FIG. 51, but in FIG. 51 (a), the case where the “variation pattern table B” and the “variation pattern table C” are set to different fluctuation pattern tables is used. 51 (b) shows a case where the “variation pattern table B” and the “variation pattern table C” are set in the same variation pattern table. The fluctuation pattern described here is a fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. Further, when referring to the "variation pattern table A", that is, in the final variation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation), the above-mentioned "result display effect" is executed. However, even if the final fluctuation is in the same high base state, it is preferable not to execute the "result display effect" in the final fluctuation in the high base state of the "relief function" (for example, the 799th rotation).

As a modification, all the high base states after the end of the special game (for example, for 100 rotations) refer to "variation pattern table B", and all the high base states of the "relief function" (for example, for 100 rotations) are "variation". It may be configured to refer to "Pattern Table C", and the symbol fixing time may be set to a long time only for the final fluctuation (for example, the 100th rotation) of the high base state after the end of the special game. Specifically, the symbol fixing time is set to 10 seconds only for the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation), and the fluctuation of the other high base state (final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game). Other than that, all fluctuations in the high base state of the "relief function") set the symbol fixing time to 0.5 seconds. With this configuration, the number of variable pattern tables can be reduced, the development burden can be reduced, and the "result display effect" can be executed with a fixed symbol time of 10 seconds.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, the look-ahead effect can be executed in both the low base state and the high base state. However, in the low base state, the look-ahead effect can be executed for the hold related to the first special symbol, but the look-ahead effect is not executed for the hold related to the second special symbol, and in the high base state, the look-ahead effect is not executed. The look-ahead effect can be executed for the hold related to the second special symbol, but the look-ahead effect is not executed for the hold related to the first special symbol.

Here, in a part of the situation where the "relief function" occurs (before and after the occurrence of the "relief function"), the execution of the look-ahead effect is restricted. The reason is that before the occurrence of the "relief function", the game was mainly in the first special symbol (win / miss lottery or fluctuation), but after the occurrence of the "relief function", the game in the second special symbol was used. A "relief function" is tentatively generated because the special symbol that is the target for which the look-ahead effect can be executed is switched from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. If the hold related to the first special symbol that occurred before is not digested before the "relief function" occurs, the look-ahead effect for the hold related to the first special symbol is executed even after the "relief function" occurs. This is because such an event will occur. In order to prevent this, the look-ahead effect for the hold related to the first special symbol is not executed even in the low base state from 5 fluctuations before the occurrence of the "relief function". More specifically, for the 5 fluctuations from the 695th rotation to the 699th rotation, the look-ahead effect for the hold related to the first special symbol is not executed. As a supplement, the hold related to the first special symbol that occurred during the fluctuation of the 695th rotation, the fluctuation of the 696th rotation, the fluctuation of the 697th rotation, the fluctuation of the 698th rotation, and the fluctuation of the 699th rotation. However, even if the look-ahead effect is executed for the hold related to the first special symbol caused by the fluctuation before the 695th rotation (for example, the fluctuation at the 694th rotation). good. Specifically, when a new hold related to the third first special symbol occurs due to the fluctuation of the 694th rotation and a look-ahead effect is performed for the new hold, the new hold is digested 3 In the 695th rotation change from the second hold to the second hold, and in the 696th turn change from the second hold to the first hold after the new hold is exhausted, the new hold The look-ahead effect for is executed. In other words, the look-ahead effect may be executed until a predetermined number of times, which is a variable display number less than the start number, is reached, and the look-ahead effect may not be executed until the start number is reached from this predetermined number. It can be said that an appropriate number of times can be set. The "variation" described in this paragraph is the variation of the first special symbol.

Then, for one fluctuation immediately after the "relief function" is generated, the look-ahead effect for the hold related to the second special symbol is not executed even in the high base state. More specifically, for the 700th rotation, the look-ahead effect for the hold related to the second special symbol is not executed, that is, the look-ahead effect for the hold related to the second special symbol generated during the fluctuation of the 700th rotation is performed. Do not execute. The look-ahead effect can be executed for the hold related to the second special symbol that occurred during the fluctuation from the 701st rotation to the 799th rotation, but as a modification, a part before the end of the "relief function". During the period (for example, from the 796th rotation to the 799th rotation, from the 790th rotation to the 799th rotation, etc.), the look-ahead effect is not executed for the hold related to the second special symbol generated during the fluctuation. You may. Further, in the high base state after the end of the special game instead of the high base state of the "relief function", the look-ahead effect may be executed from the first variation, that is, one variation in the high base state after the end of the special game. The look-ahead effect may be executed for the hold related to the second special symbol that occurs during the fluctuation of the eyes. Comparing the look-ahead effect in the high base state after the end of the special game with the look-ahead effect in the high base state of the "relief function", even if it has one or more of the following features (A) to (F). good.
(A) In the high base state after the end of the special game, the look-ahead effect is more likely to be executed than in the high base state of the "relief function".
(B) The number of types of look-ahead effects is smaller in the high base state after the special game is completed than in the high base state of the "relief function".
(C) The high base state after the end of the special game has a higher expectation of a big hit when the look-ahead effect is executed than the high base state of the "relief function".
(D) It is more difficult to execute the look-ahead effect in the high base state after the special game is completed than in the high base state of the "relief function".
(E) There are more types of look-ahead effects in the high-base state after the end of the special game than in the high-base state of the "relief function".
(F) The high base state after the end of the special game has a lower expectation of a big hit when the look-ahead effect is executed than the high base state of the "relief function".

In the pachinko gaming machine P in the fourth embodiment, the above-mentioned "ordinary symbol probability variation" is not adopted, and the probability of operating the ordinary electric accessory P770 (the probability of hitting a normal symbol) is low. It is common to both the state and the high base state, and the probability is set to 2/3. As a modification, it may be set to 1/1 (probability of surely winning). In addition, the above-mentioned "shortening the time required for the normal design" and "extending the opening of the ordinary electric accessory" are adopted.

FIG. 52 shows the success / failure, symbols, and fluctuation patterns of the normal symbol lottery for each of the low base state and the high base state (including both the high base state after the end of the special game and the high base state of the “relief function”).

FIG. 52 (a) shows the winning / failing, the symbol, and the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol lottery in the low base state. The hit probability of a normal symbol in the low base state is set to 2/3 as described above. In addition, there are three types of normal symbols in the low base state, specifically, there are three types: hit symbol 1, hit symbol 2, and missed symbol. It should be noted that the hit probabilities are 1/3 each (the hit symbol 1 and the hit symbol 2 are obtained by 1/2 each when the normal symbol is hit by 2/3, and the normal symbol is off by 1/3. In some cases, it will be a misaligned pattern). The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory P770 when the hit symbol 1 is in the low base state is one opening for 0.05 seconds, and the normal electric combination when the hit symbol 2 is in the low base state. The opening pattern of the object P770 is also one opening for 0.05 seconds. Further, the number of types of fluctuation patterns of the normal symbol in the low base state is larger than the number of fluctuation patterns of the normal symbol in the high base state described later (in other words, the number of types of fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the low base state is larger. , More than the number of types of fluctuation display time of normal symbols in the high base state), specifically, there are 18 types of fluctuation patterns 1 to 18 with different fluctuation times, and each fluctuation time. Is 1 to 18 seconds (varies in 1 second increments). The hit probabilities are 1/18 each (the selection probabilities do not differ regardless of whether the symbols are hit or miss).

FIG. 52 (b) shows the winning / failing, the symbol, and the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol lottery in the high base state. The hit probability of a normal symbol in the high base state is set to 2/3 as described above. Further, there are three types of normal symbols in the high base state as in the low base state, and specifically, there are three types of hit symbols 1, hit symbols 2, and missed symbols as in the low base state. It should be noted that the hit probabilities are 1/3 each (the hit symbol 1 and the hit symbol 2 are obtained by 1/2 each when the normal symbol is hit by 2/3, and the normal symbol is off by 1/3. In some cases, it will be a misaligned pattern). When the hit symbol 1 is in the high base state, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is 1.8 seconds of opening three times (there is a 0.6 second closure between openings), and the hit symbol 2 In the case of, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is 2.9 seconds of opening twice (there is a closing of 1 second between opening). Further, the number of types of fluctuation patterns of the normal symbol in the high base state is two types, specifically, there are two types of fluctuation patterns 19 to 20 having different fluctuation times, and the fluctuation time of each is 0. 1 second and 0.2 seconds. The hit probability is 3/4 for the fluctuation pattern 19 and 1/4 for the fluctuation pattern 20 (the selection probability does not differ regardless of whether the symbol is a hit or a missed symbol).

In this way, both the high base state after the end of the special game and the high base state of the "relief function" have the same winning / failing, symbols, and fluctuation patterns related to the normal symbol lottery, so that the high base state after the end of the special game is dedicated. High base state of normal symbol lottery, symbol, fluctuation pattern, "relief function" There is no need to develop a normal symbol lottery, symbol, fluctuation pattern, and there is no "normal symbol probability change", so it is low. It is not necessary to have the hit probability of the normal symbol for each of the base state and the high base state. On top of that, in the low base state where the normal symbol is likely to stop at the hit symbol (in the fourth embodiment, the hit symbol stops at 2/3), by preparing a large number of variable patterns, the normal symbol in the low base state can be stopped. Randomness can be given to the stop timing (opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory P770), and it is possible to make it difficult to enter (aim) the ball into the special figure 2 start port in the low base state (in other words, the low base). It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that try to change the second special symbol, which is not the main body in the state).

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine P in the fourth embodiment, the time of the special game end demo (big hit end demo) when the special game is executed is set to 30 seconds. Since the base state during the execution of the special game is the low base state, when the normal symbol fluctuates, a fluctuation time of up to 18 seconds can be selected. However, since the special game end demo (big hit end demo) continues for 30 seconds, even if the player stops firing the game ball after the final round game just before the special game end demo (big hit end demo) is completed, this By setting such a time value, even if the player enters the normal figure operation port P741 immediately before the player stops launching the game ball and the normal symbol starts to fluctuate, the special game end demo ( Since the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends before the end of the jackpot end demo), the player plays the game after the special game end demo (big hit end demo) ends and the player shifts to the high base state after the end of the special game. When a ball enters the demonstration opening P741 by launching a ball, the fluctuation of the normal symbol (fluctuation of 0.1 seconds or 0.2 seconds) in the high base state can be started immediately. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, in the high base state after the end of the special game, the number of holdings related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a predetermined number (2 to 4) (for example, 4). The shortest fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol is 2 seconds, and the number of reservations related to the 2nd special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a predetermined number (1). In the case of (1 piece, which is reduced from 1 piece to 0 pieces by the pending digestion accompanying the start of fluctuation), the shortest fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 15 seconds. Therefore, in the first 4 fluctuations in the high base state after the end of the special game, the second special symbol when there is no ball entering the special figure 2 starting port (when the normal electric accessory 770 cannot enter the ball without opening). The total time of the shortest fluctuation time of is "the shortest fluctuation time of the second special symbol when it is reduced from 4 to 3 by hold digestion + the 2nd special symbol when it is reduced from 3 to 2 by hold digestion. The shortest fluctuation time + the shortest fluctuation time of the second special symbol when it decreases from 2 to 1 by hold digestion + the shortest fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol when it decreases from 1 to 0 by hold digestion ". It is 21 seconds, which is "2 seconds + 2 seconds + 2 seconds + 15 seconds", which is longer than 18 seconds, which is the longest fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the low base state. Therefore, even if the player stops firing the game ball immediately before the end of the special game end demo (big hit end demo), by setting such a time value, immediately before the player stops firing the game ball. Even if there is a ball entering the normal drawing operation port P741 and the normal symbol starts to fluctuate, the second special in the high base state after the special game ends after the special game end demo (big hit end demo) ends. Since the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends before the 4 fluctuations of the symbol (the situation where 4 holds related to the 2nd special symbol have occurred after the end of the special game) are completed, the special game end demo (big hit end demo) ) Is completed and the player shifts to the high base state after the end of the special game, and then the player launches the game ball to enter the normal drawing operation port P741. Is all (4) digested and all (4 times) second special symbol fluctuations (0.1 seconds or 0.2 seconds fluctuations) in the high base state are completed by the end. Since it can be started immediately, all (4) holds related to the 2nd special symbol are digested, and all (4 times) hold related to the 2nd special symbol is held by the end of the change. Can be caused.

[Fifth Example]
In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine P equipped with the "relief function" has been described, but the pachinko gaming machine P equipped with the "relief function" is not limited to such a mode. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine P equipped with a "relief function" different from that of the fourth embodiment is set as the fifth embodiment, and the differences from the fourth embodiment (including the differences from the prerequisite technology and the present embodiment) are described below. ) Will be described in detail, and the explanation of common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as the prerequisite technology or the elements described in the present embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals.

The pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko gaming machine P in the fourth embodiment, and adopts the above-mentioned "parallel control (parallel digestion)". Therefore, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time. However, during the change in which the winning / failing lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the winning / failing lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit, and the winning / failing lottery result of the second special symbol is the biggest hit. Inside, the result of the lottery for winning or losing the first special symbol will not be a big hit. Further, the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment is configured so that a small hit is won with a high probability (for example, 1/2) as a result of a winning / losing lottery for the second special symbol.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement relationship of the winning device and the like in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment.

An opening is formed in the substantially center of the game area P501 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment so that the effect display device P80 can be visually recognized, and a frame member of a center decoration unit (not shown) is formed in the opening. Attached, it constitutes an inner partition of the gaming area P501.

Below the effect display device P80, a first start winning opening P711A into which a game ball flowing down the game area (left side area P501L) on the left side of the effect display device P80 enters is provided, and further below the effect display device P80 is not shown. An out port P790 is provided. Further, a general winning opening P731 is arranged in the lower region of the left side region P501L of the effect display device P80. That is, when a game ball is launched into the game area on the left side of the effect display device P80, the ball is entered into the first starting winning opening P711A or the general winning opening P731, and it can be expected that a winning will occur. There is. On the other hand, in the game area (right area P501R) on the right side of the effect display device P80, as shown in FIG. 53, the operating port P741, the first starting winning opening P711B related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, and the second starting winning opening 712, the large winning opening P751 is arranged, and the game ball launched toward the game area on the right side of the effect display device P80 can win a prize (Note that the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are available). , Also referred to as the special figure 1 start port and the special figure 2 start port, respectively). As a modification, the ordinary electric accessory P770 may be attached to the first start winning opening P711A without providing the first starting winning opening P711B, or the ordinary electric accessory P770 may be attached directly under the first starting winning opening P711A. The first start winning opening P711B may be arranged.

Here, the first starting winning opening P711A and the first starting winning opening P711B are starting winning openings for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and the second starting winning opening P721 is the first. 2 It is a starting prize opening to acquire the right to the special symbol lottery of special symbols. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the game ball is launched toward either the left side region P501L or the right side region P501R of the game area P501, the first start winning opening P711A and the first starting winning opening It is configured so that the right of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol can be acquired by P711B, but since it is difficult to enter the second starting winning opening P711B unless it is in a high base state, a special game may be executed or Unless the "relief function" is generated, the game based on the entry into the first starting winning opening P711B cannot be substantially advanced (or the progress is difficult). Further, the second start winning opening P712 is arranged in the game area on the right side (right area P501R) like the first starting winning opening P711B, but unlike the first starting winning opening P711B, the ordinary electric accessory P770 is provided. Therefore, regardless of whether the base is in the high base state or the low base state, it is possible to enter the ball by firing the game ball toward the right game area (right side area P501R).

Further, the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment has the following features.
(A) As a result of the winning / failing lottery related to the first special symbol, there are "hits" and "misses".
(B) As a result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the second special symbol, there are "hits", "small hits", and "misses".
(C) The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50, and the small hit probability in the low probability state and the high probability state is 1 / 1.2.
(D) "Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is adopted.
(E) In the low-probability low-base state, the low-probability high-base state, and the high-probability high-base state, the game progresses mainly on the first special symbol. The fluctuation time is relatively shorter than that of the second special symbol (the average fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds on average in the low-probability low-base state, and 3 on average in the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state. Although it is seconds, the average time of the second special symbol is 10 minutes on average in the low-probability low-base state, the low-probability high-base state, and the high-probability high-base state).
(F) In the high-probability low-base state, the game progresses mainly on the second special symbol. Therefore, in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol ((F). The average fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds on average in the high-probability low-base state, but the average time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes on average in the high-probability low-base state).
(G) As the jackpot symbol related to the first special symbol, "10R probability variation jackpot A", which triggers the transition to the high-probability low-base state that is probable until the next time, is 10%, and the probability-variable high-probability high-base state is reached until the next time. The "3R probability variation jackpot B" that triggers the transition is selected at 60%, and the "3R normal jackpot" that triggers the transition to the low-probability high-base state of 100 rotations is selected at 30%.
(H) As the jackpot symbol related to the second special symbol, "10R probability variation jackpot A", which triggers the transition to the high-probability low-base state that is probable until the next time, is 35%, and to the high-probability high-base state that is probable until the next time. The "3R probability variation jackpot B" that triggers the transition is selected at 35%, and the "3R normal jackpot" that triggers the transition to the low-probability high-base state of 100 rotations is selected at 30%.
(I) When the second special symbol stops at the small hit symbol, the large winning opening P751 opens for 1.5 seconds, and on average, 2 game balls can be inserted (30 game balls can be paid out). be.

By providing the above features, in a high-probability low-base state, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol, in which the "small hit" is won with a high probability, is high. It is possible to make small hits frequently, and by opening the big winning opening P751 (small hit game) based on the small hit winning, it is possible to make frequent opportunities to acquire game balls, so while waiting for the next big hit winning However, the number of game balls can be increased by small hits. Such specifications are called "small hit rush". On the other hand, in the low-probability low-base state, the low-probability high-base state, and the high-probability high-base state, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol in which the "small hit" is won with a high probability is low, so the small hit can be made in a short time. It is not possible to make it occur frequently, and the game will proceed mainly with the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol. That is, the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment has a game property aiming at a transition to a high-probability low-base state, triggered by a special game related to the first special game in a game mainly composed of the first special symbol. ..

The number of "relief functions" when the "relief function" is installed in the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment (the number of times in the low-probability high-base state), and the effect mode when the "relief function" occurs. The transition of the (directing stage) will be described below.

Unlike the pachinko gaming machine P in the fourth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment is configured to generate a "relief function" at the start of fluctuation (the pachinko gaming machine P in the fourth embodiment). Is configured to generate a "relief function" when the fluctuation is stopped (when the fixed time of the symbol has elapsed). Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment has a low probability of shifting at the start of fluctuation at the 500th rotation (after the end of the special game related to the "3R normal jackpot", and a low probability after 100 rotations of the high base state. The "relief function" occurs at the start of the next fluctuation in the situation where the low-probability low-base state shifts to the low-base state and the low-probability low-base state has passed 399 rotations), and the low-probability low-base state changes to the low-probability high-base state. Transition. In addition, in the following description, what is described as "○○○ rotation number" is the number of rotations calculated from the end of the special game (after the end of the special game related to "3R normal jackpot"). back.

FIG. 54 shows an effect mode (effect content displayed on the effect display device P80) regarding the state immediately before and the state immediately after the “relief function” is generated. In FIG. 54, unlike the pachinko gaming machine P in the fourth embodiment, the "relief function" is generated at the start of the fluctuation at the 500th rotation, so that the state immediately before the "relief function" is generated is 499 rotations. Whether or not there is a hold related to the first special symbol or a hold related to the second special symbol in a situation where the eyes are stopped does not change the effect mode when the "relief function" occurs.

FIG. 54A shows a situation in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the fluctuation at the 499th rotation, has stopped. It should be noted that the symbol fixing time has already passed. In this situation, the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed before reaching the 499th rotation (for example, from the 497th rotation, the 489th rotation, etc.), and the decorative pattern is displayed. The background of the mountain is displayed behind.

FIG. 54B shows a situation in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the fluctuation at the 500th rotation, has started. From the situation of FIG. 54 (a), the hold of the first special symbol is exhausted, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started at the 500th rotation. By starting the fluctuation, a "relief function" is generated, and from the start of this fluctuation, the state shifts to a low-probability high-base state. Here, at the start of fluctuation (or immediately before the start of fluctuation), the symbol "→" (separation notification C) indicating an arrow is displayed very small in the upper right corner of the screen (displayed smaller than the division notification A described later). , Displayed in an inconspicuous manner). After that (or at the same timing), the "relief function" is occurring, that is, the situation has shifted to the low-probability high-base state, but the production mode (production stage) still corresponds to the low-probability low-base state. The background of the mountain, which is the background of), is displayed.

FIG. 54 (c) shows a situation in which the variation of the first special symbol, which is the variation of the 501st rotation, has started. This is a situation in which the change of the first special symbol is started as the 501st rotation by digesting the hold of the first special symbol after the first special symbol which has been changed from the situation of FIG. 54 (b) is stopped. By starting the fluctuation, a stage change effect suggesting that the background is switched to the sky background, which is the background corresponding to the low-probability high-base state of "SEVEN RUSH" described later, is generated. This stage change effect is a background for stage change in which the screen immediately darkens from the background of the mountain that has been displayed until then, and the white characters of "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on the black background. Approximately at the same time that the background for this stage change is displayed, the sound "SEVEN RUSH rushes!" Is output from the speaker 83. This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability and high base state. Also, almost at the same time as the background for this stage change is displayed, the "→" symbol (separate notification C) indicating the arrow is hidden in the upper right corner of the screen, and instead, "right strike" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The character (typed notification A) is displayed small. Further, at about the same time, the characters "Right-handed" (typed notification B) are displayed in large size. As a modification, after a predetermined time has passed since the background for the stage change is displayed (for example, 2 seconds later) or after the background for the stage change is hidden (in other words, "SEVEN RUSH"). (Approximately at the same time as the corresponding background display is started), the voice "SEVEN RUSH rushes!" May be output from the speaker 83, or the large characters "Right-handed" may be displayed in large size. As a modification, the characters "SEVEN RUSH rush!" May be displayed. In that case, after a predetermined time has passed (for example, 2 seconds) after the background for the stage change is displayed, or for the stage change. It is desirable to display it after the background is hidden. When the variation of the 501st rotation is the variation of the second special symbol, the stage change effect and the striking notifications A and B are not displayed, and the mountain background and the striking notification C are continuously displayed.

FIG. 54 (d) shows the situation during the 501st rotation fluctuation. The background for the stage change at the 501st rotation is hidden, and instead, the sky background, which is the background corresponding to the low-probability high-base state of "SEVEN RUSH", is displayed. At this time, the large characters "Right-handed" may be hidden, but it is desirable that they are continuously displayed from the background for the stage change (or until the 501st rotation stops fluctuating). Or, it is desirable that it is continuously displayed until the 502nd rotation starts). Note that the small "right-handed" characters are always displayed during the low-probability, high-base state, unlike the large "right-handed" characters.

The timing at which the "relief function" ends is when the fluctuation starts at the specified number of times (details will be described later, "first number of times" or "second number of times") (at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol). (It does not matter when the fluctuation starts), and during the fluctuation, it has already shifted to the low-probability low-base state (since the base state changes at the start of the fluctuation, it is already in the low-base state during the fluctuation). Therefore, as the effect mode (effect stage), the sky background, which is the background corresponding to the low-probability high-base state of "SEVEN RUSH", is displayed. However, the character "right-handed" (typed notification A) in the upper right corner of the screen is hidden at the start of fluctuation. At this time, the characters "SEVEN RUSH end ..." may be displayed. When the next fluctuation of the specified number of fluctuations is the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the sky background, which is the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability and high base state, is hidden when the fluctuation starts. At the same time, a stage change effect indicating that the state shifts to a low-probability low-base state occurs instead (in other words, when the next fluctuation of the specified number of fluctuations is the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the background of the sky Will continue to be displayed and no stage change effect will occur). This stage effect is the same effect (background) as the 501st turn stage effect (background for stage change). As a modification, a production (background) different from the stage production (background for stage change) at the 501st rotation may be used. For example, as a background for stage change in which black characters of "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on a white background. Is also good. After that, the background for the stage change is hidden, and instead the background of the mountain, which is the background corresponding to the low probability low base state, is displayed. As a modification, it may be the background of the sea instead of the background of the mountain (it may be different from the background before the "relief function" occurred), and it may be the background of the mountain or the background of the sea. It may be designed so that it may be a background (it may be configured to have a case where it differs from the background before the "relief function" occurs and a case where it does not differ). In addition, in order to clarify that the background of the mountain (or the background of the sea), which is the background corresponding to the low probability and low base state at this time, is not a "relief function", it must be completed within 100 rotations. , It is desirable to switch to a background of a different production mode (production stage) (for example, a background of a grassland or a background of space).

FIG. 55 shows an effect mode (effect content displayed on the effect display device P80) regarding the state immediately before and the state immediately after the “relief function” is generated. In FIG. 55, unlike the pachinko gaming machine P in the fourth embodiment, the "relief function" is generated at the start of the fluctuation at the 500th rotation, so that the state immediately before the "relief function" is generated is 499 rotations. Whether or not there is a hold related to the first special symbol or a hold related to the second special symbol in a situation where the eyes are stopped does not change the effect mode when the "relief function" occurs.

Similar to FIG. 54, FIG. 55 shows an effect mode (effect content displayed on the effect display device P80) relating to the state immediately before and the state immediately after the “relief function” is generated. However, in FIG. 55, unlike FIG. 54, the variation at the 500th rotation is the variation of the second special symbol.

FIG. 55A shows a situation in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the fluctuation at the 499th rotation, has stopped. It should be noted that the symbol fixing time has already passed. In this situation, the background of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability low base state is displayed before reaching the 499th rotation (for example, from the 497th rotation, the 489th rotation, etc.), and the decorative pattern is displayed. The background of the mountain is displayed behind. However, with respect to FIG. 55 (a), the fluctuation may be in progress (during the fluctuation of the first special symbol), not in the situation where the fluctuation is stopped.

FIG. 55B shows a situation in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol, which is the fluctuation at the 500th rotation, has started. This is a situation in which the change of the second special symbol is started as the 501st rotation by digesting the hold of the second special symbol from the situation of FIG. 55 (a). By starting the fluctuation, a "relief function" is generated, and from the start of this fluctuation, the state shifts to a low-probability high-base state. Here, at the start of fluctuation (or immediately before the start of fluctuation), the symbol "→" (separation notification C) indicating an arrow is displayed very small in the upper right corner of the screen (displayed smaller than the division notification A described later). , Displayed in an inconspicuous manner). After that (or at the same timing), the "relief function" is occurring, that is, the situation has shifted to the low-probability high-base state, but the production mode (production stage) still corresponds to the low-probability low-base state. The background of the mountain, which is the background of), is displayed. As described above, when the first special symbol is stopped fluctuating at the 499th rotation, the second special symbol in FIG. 55 (b) is fluctuating independently (it does not fluctuate at the same time as the first special symbol). ), But when the first special symbol is changing at the 499th rotation, the second special symbol in FIG. 55 (b) is changing in parallel (it is changing at the same time as the first special symbol). Further, in FIG. 55 (b), the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol (only the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and stopped). As a modification, the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol may also be configured to be variable display and stop display, and when such a configuration is made, for example, it is configured to be displayed small at the lower left of the effect display device P80. Is also good.

FIG. 55 (c) shows a situation in which the variation of the first special symbol, which is the variation of the 501st rotation, has started. When the second special symbol that had changed from the situation of FIG. 55 (b) is still changing, the hold of the first special symbol is exhausted, and the change of the first special symbol starts as the 501st rotation. The situation. By starting the fluctuation, a stage change effect suggesting that the background is switched to the sky background, which is the background corresponding to the low-probability high-base state of "SEVEN RUSH" described later, is generated. This stage change effect is a background for stage change in which the screen immediately darkens from the background of the mountain that has been displayed until then, and the white characters of "STAGE CHANGE" are displayed on the black background. Approximately at the same time that the background for this stage change is displayed, the sound "SEVEN RUSH rushes!" Is output from the speaker 83. This "SEVEN RUSH" is the name of the production mode (production stage) corresponding to the low probability and high base state. Also, almost at the same time as the background for this stage change is displayed, the "→" symbol (separate notification C) indicating the arrow is hidden in the upper right corner of the screen, and instead, "right strike" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The character (typed notification A) is displayed small. Further, at about the same time, the characters "Right-handed" (typed notification B) are displayed in large size. As a modification, after a predetermined time has passed since the background for the stage change is displayed (for example, 2 seconds later) or after the background for the stage change is hidden (in other words, "SEVEN RUSH"). (Approximately at the same time as the corresponding background display is started), the voice "SEVEN RUSH rushes!" May be output from the speaker 83, or the large characters "Right-handed" may be displayed in large size. As a modification, the characters "SEVEN RUSH rush!" May be displayed. In that case, after a predetermined time has passed (for example, 2 seconds) after the background for the stage change is displayed, or for the stage change. It is desirable to display it after the background is hidden. Regarding the stage change effect and the display of the hitting notifications A and B (the hitting notification C is not displayed) when the first special symbol starts to change as described above, the second special symbol is stopped changing. Is done even during fluctuations. When the variation of the 501st rotation is the variation of the second special symbol, the stage change effect and the striking notifications A and B are not displayed, and the mountain background and the striking notification C are continuously displayed.

FIG. 55 (d) shows the situation during the 501st rotation fluctuation. The background for the stage change at the 501st rotation is hidden, and instead, the sky background, which is the background corresponding to the low-probability high-base state of "SEVEN RUSH", is displayed. At this time, the large characters "Right-handed" may be hidden, but it is desirable that they are continuously displayed from the background for the stage change (or until the 501st rotation stops fluctuating). Or, it is desirable that it is continuously displayed until the 502nd rotation starts). Note that the small "right-handed" characters are always displayed during the low-probability, high-base state, unlike the large "right-handed" characters. The timing at which the "relief function" ends and the display mode of the effect (effect transition) are the same as those described above, and are omitted here.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine P shifts to the low-probability high-base state, which is the high-base state even after the end of the special game. This low-probability high-base state continues for 100 revolutions. In the high base state after the end of the special game, the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, the 100th rotation) and the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state (for example, the first rotation to 99 rotations). It is configured to be different from the fluctuation pattern table referred to in (Eye), and in the high base state of the "relief function", the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the final fluctuation of the high base state and the fluctuation pattern table before the final fluctuation of the high base state are obtained. The fluctuation pattern table referred to in the fluctuation is configured to be the same. The fluctuation pattern table referred to in the high base state of the "relief function" is before the final fluctuation in both (1) the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation). The fluctuation pattern table may be different from the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the fluctuation of (for example, the 1st rotation to the 99th rotation), and (2) the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (2) For example, it may be the same as the fluctuation pattern referred to in the 1st to 99th rotations).

Here, the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation) is referred to as "variation pattern table A", and the fluctuation before the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game. Assuming that the fluctuation pattern table referred to in (for example, the 1st rotation to the 99th rotation) is "variation pattern table B" and the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the high base state of the "relief function" is "variation pattern table C", "variation". Regarding "Pattern Table A", when the number of holdings related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a predetermined number (for example, when the number is 4, and the number is reduced from 4 to 3 due to the holding digestion accompanying the start of fluctuation). , When the number of holdings related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a specific number (for example, when it is 1 and it decreases from 1 to 0 due to the holding digestion accompanying the start of fluctuation), there is a tendency to select a fluctuation pattern. In the case of "variation pattern table B" and "variation pattern table C", when the number of reservations related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a predetermined number (for example, four, and the fluctuation starts. When the number of holdings related to the second special symbol at the start of fluctuation is a specific number (for example, 1 when the number is reduced from 4 to 3 due to the accompanying hold digestion) and 1 when the holding digestion is accompanied by the start of fluctuation. The selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is the same as that of (when the number decreases from to 0). The details of the fluctuation pattern table are shown in FIG. 55, but in FIG. 55 (a), when the “variation pattern table B” and the “variation pattern table C” are set in different fluctuation pattern tables, FIG. 55 Regarding (b), the case where the “variation pattern table B” and the “variation pattern table C” are set in the same fluctuation pattern table is shown. When referring to the "variation pattern table A", that is, in the final variation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation), the above-mentioned "result display effect" is executed. However, even if the final fluctuation is in the same high base state, it is preferable not to execute the "result display effect" in the final fluctuation in the high base state of the "relief function".

As a modification, all the high base states after the end of the special game (for example, for 100 rotations) refer to "variation pattern table B", and all the high base states of the "relief function" refer to "variation pattern table C". It may be configured so that the symbol fixing time is set to a long time only for the final fluctuation (for example, the 100th rotation) of the high base state after the end of the special game. Specifically, the symbol fixing time is set to 10 seconds only for the final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game (for example, the 100th rotation), and the fluctuation of the other high base state (final fluctuation of the high base state after the end of the special game). Other than that, all fluctuations in the high base state of the "relief function") set the symbol fixing time to 0.5 seconds. With this configuration, the number of variable pattern tables can be reduced, the development burden can be reduced, and the "result display effect" can be executed with a fixed symbol time of 10 seconds.

With the above configuration, the pachinko gaming machine P, which adopts "parallel control (parallel digestion)" and generates a "relief function" at the start of fluctuation, informs the player that the "relief function" has occurred. In addition to being able to clearly indicate, the change in the base state and the change in the effect mode (effect stage) will be performed smoothly, and the player will recognize the change in the base state without any discomfort in the effect. Can be done. In addition, since the type of starting port that the player aims at will be different due to the switching of the base state (because the first starting winning opening P711A will be switched to the first starting winning opening P711B), there will be a separate notification for that. , Regardless of whether the symbol that triggers the switching of the base state is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the striking notification C is displayed at the same time as the base state is switched, but is displayed inconspicuously thereafter. At the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol corresponding to the progress of the game, which is the main body of the high base state), the hitting notification A is immediately and continuously displayed, and the hitting notification B is displayed. By displaying prominently along with the stage change, it is possible to notify the appropriate and emphasized distinction (aiming at the starting port of Special Figure 2) when the base state is switched, and in the subsequent high base state. Since it is possible to continuously notify the player (aiming at the starting port of Special Figure 2), the player is notified of the appropriate hitting.

Further, the number of times of the "relief function" in the pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment is the first number of times only for the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol. It has a second number of times for the total. Specifically, 300 times is set as the first number of times, and 759 times is set as the second number of times. The pachinko gaming machine P in the fifth embodiment employs "parallel control (parallel digestion)", and the first start related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 in the game area (right area P501R) on the right side of the effect display device P80. Since both the winning opening P711B and the second starting winning opening 712 are arranged, if a right-handed hit is aimed at the first starting winning opening P711B in a high base state, there is a possibility of entering both starting winning openings. Furthermore, there is a possibility that the first special symbol and the second special symbol may change at the same time in the high base state of the "relief function". Then, although it is desirable to digest the high base state by the change of the first special symbol which is the main body of the game progress in the high base state, the change of the second special symbol interrupts. If this happens, it is not possible to execute the expected number of fluctuations in the high base state (300 times in the fifth embodiment) related to the first special symbol (which was originally assumed). Therefore, as described above, by setting not only the first number of times but also the second number of times, it is possible to almost certainly guarantee the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first number of times.

While the "relief function" is being generated, a notification effect for notifying the remaining number of times of the "relief function" may be executed. In that case, the effect display device P80 displays "remaining XX times". Is configured to be displayed. This notification effect basically targets the first number of times (for example, if the remaining number of times of the first number is 120 times, it is displayed as "120 times remaining"), but the remaining number of times of the second number is 300. If the number of times is less than or equal to the number of times, the second number of times may also be the target. For example, the remaining number of times of the first number is 290 times (the remaining number of times becomes 290 times when the first special symbol is changed 10 times after the "relief function" is generated), and the remaining number of times is 290 times. When the number of remaining times is 100 (for example, since the "relief function" is generated, the first special symbol is changed 10 times and the second special symbol is changed 649 times, so that the remaining number is 100 times). In some cases, the first special symbol has changed only 10 times, and normally it is displayed as "290 times remaining", but since the remaining number of times of the second time is 100 times, "100 times remaining". Will be displayed. That is, when the remaining number of times of the second number exceeds the remaining number of times of the first number, the remaining number of times of the second number is the target of the notification of the notification effect, and in that case, only the number of changes of the first special symbol is until then. Although it was the target of subtraction in the notification effect (every time the first special symbol is changed once, the display of "remaining XX times" is subtracted by 1), but after that, only the first special symbol is subtracted. However, the number of changes in the second special symbol is also subject to subtraction in the notification effect (every time the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed once, the display of "remaining XX times" is subtracted by one. Will be).

[Sixth Example]
As the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine P having various game characteristics has been described, but for the purpose of further improving the game performance, the end condition of the high base state (time saving end condition). As the sixth embodiment, an example of further ingenuity or incorporating a "relief function" into a new game playability is taken as the sixth embodiment. The explanation of is omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as the prerequisite technology or the elements described in the present embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals.

[Example 6-1]
The pachinko gaming machine P in the 6-1 embodiment adopts the above-mentioned "small hit V" specification. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 6-1st embodiment has the following features.
(A) As a result of the winning / failing lottery related to the first special symbol, there are "hits", "small hits", and "misses".
(B) As a result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the second special symbol, there are "hits", "small hits", and "misses".
(C) The jackpot probability is 1/300 (it does not have a high probability state), the small hit probability is 1/50 for the first special symbol, 1/10 for the second special symbol, and the first special symbol. The number of holdings is 4, and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 4.
(D) "Second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" is adopted.
(E) Neither the small hit game of the first special symbol nor the small hit game of the second special symbol is a small hit game in which it is easy to win a V in a specific area (there is no small hit game in which it is difficult to win a V). ). That is, if the ball is entered into the large winning device P750 during the execution of the small hit game, the entry into the specific area becomes substantially definite, which is also referred to as the big hit game (small hit V big hit or small hit V big hit game). ) Is executed.
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state.
(G) After the small hit V big hit of the first special symbol executed by winning the small hit of the first special symbol in the low base state (after the special game), the state shifts to the low base state again, but it is high. It is executed by winning the small hit of the first special symbol in the base state. It is executed after the small hit of the first special symbol V after the big hit (after the special game) or by winning the small hit of the second special symbol. After the small hit V big hit of the second special symbol (after the special game), the game shifts to the high base state of 15 rotations (at least, the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol fluctuates 15 times).
(H) After the jackpot game of the first special symbol (after the special game), which is executed by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the low base state, the game shifts to the high base state of one rotation (at least, the first). 2 The high base state is maintained until the special symbol fluctuates once), but after the jackpot game of the first special symbol executed by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the high base state (special game) After the jackpot game of the second special symbol executed by winning the jackpot of the second special symbol (after) or after the jackpot game of the second special symbol (after the special game), the state shifts to the high base state of 15 rotations (at least, the second special symbol is 15). The high base state is maintained until it fluctuates once).
(I) The big hit of the first special symbol (special game) executed by winning the big hit of the first special symbol and the small hit of the first special symbol executed by winning the small hit of the first special symbol. The V jackpot (special game) is a 3R special game, and by winning the jackpot of the second special symbol (special game) and the small hit of the second special symbol, which is executed by winning the jackpot of the second special symbol. The small hit V big hit (special game) of the second special symbol to be executed is a 10R special game.
(J) Equipped with a "relief function", it occurs at the end of the special game (after the small hit V big hit or after the big hit game) when the fluctuation of the 600th rotation stops (when the symbol fixed time elapses), and up to the 700th rotation. The high base state continues (as a modification, the "relief function" may occur when 600 rotations have passed since the end of the high base state after the end of the special game).

By having the above characteristics, (1) the ball is entered into a specific area during the execution of the small hit game of the first special symbol, which is executed by winning the small hit of the first special symbol in the low base state. By doing so, you can get 3R worth of balls, or (2) you can't get 3R worth of balls by not letting the ball enter a specific area, but you can get closer to the "relief function" (small hit V big hit). Then, the execution of the special game resets the generation condition of the "relief function", in other words, the generation condition of the "relief function" is reset to the 600th rotation after the end of the special game, so it is intentionally specified. If the ball is not entered into the area, it will not be reset, so the player can select to approach the "relief function"). As a modification, a high base state is achieved by entering a specific area during the execution of the small hit game of the first special symbol, which is executed by winning the small hit of the first special symbol in the low base state. It may be configured so that it can be acquired once. Further, as a further modification, during the execution of the small hit game of the first special symbol, which is executed by winning the small hit of the first special symbol in the low base state, a large prize device is given to the player. The effect of notifying that the game ball is to be launched aiming at P750 (aiming at a specific area) is not executed (to leave it to the player's arbitrary selectivity), and the second special symbol is displayed in a high base state. During the execution of the small hit game of the second special symbol executed by winning the small hit, the player is asked to shoot the game ball aiming at the large prize device P750 (aiming at a specific area). It may be configured to execute an effect of notifying the prompting.

[Example 6-2]
The pachinko gaming machine P in the 6-2 embodiment adopts the above-mentioned "small hit V" specification. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 6-1st embodiment has the following features.
(A) As a result of the winning / failing lottery related to the first special symbol, there are "hits" and "misses".
(B) As a result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the second special symbol, there are "hits", "small hits", and "misses".
(C) The jackpot probability is 1/300 (it does not have a high probability state), the small hit probability is 1/3, the number of hold of the first special symbol is 4, and the hold of the second special symbol is held. The number is four.
(D) "Second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" is adopted.
(E) The small hit game is a small hit game in which it is easy to win a V in a specific area (there is no small hit game in which it is difficult to win a V). That is, if the ball is entered into the large winning device P750 during the execution of the small hit game, the entry into the specific area becomes substantially definite, which is also referred to as the big hit game (small hit V big hit or small hit V big hit game). ) Is executed.
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is 1/1, the number of holdings of the normal symbol is 4, and the normal electric combination corresponding to the hit symbol of the normal symbol. Opening pattern of the object P770 (an operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 triggered by the normal symbol stopping at the hit symbol, that is, "one operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770" = "Execute one set of opening patterns that open one or more of the ordinary electric accessory P770") is 0.01 seconds x 1 in the low base state and 1.5 seconds x 3 in the high base state. However, in any of the opening patterns, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is forcibly terminated by entering one ball into the ordinary electric accessory P770 (for example, the second 1 in the opening of 1.5 seconds × 3). If one ball is detected during the opening for 5 seconds, the remaining time of the second opening, which is the subsequent opening, is forcibly terminated and the third opening is not performed).
(G) After the jackpot game of the first special symbol (after the special game), which is executed by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the low base state, the state shifts to the high base state, and the second special symbol is 1 The high base state is maintained until it fluctuates once or until the ordinary electric accessory P770 operates twice (as a modification, until the second special symbol fluctuates once, or the ordinary electric accessory P770 is 2). The high base state may be maintained until the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate a total of 10 times). ..
(H) After the big hit game of the second special symbol executed by winning the big hit of the second special symbol in the low base state (after the special game), the small hit of the second special symbol is won in the low base state. After the small hit V big hit of the second special symbol (after the special game), it shifts to the high base state until the second special symbol fluctuates once, or the ordinary electric accessory P770 is 10,000. The high base state is maintained until it is operated once (as a modification, until the second special symbol fluctuates once, or until the ordinary electric accessory P770 operates 10,000 times, or the first special symbol operates 10 times. The high base state may be maintained until it fluctuates, or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate a total of 10 times).
(I) After the jackpot game of the first special symbol executed by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the high base state (after the special game), the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in the high base state. After the big hit game of the 2nd special symbol executed by (after the special game), after the small hit V big hit of the 2nd special symbol executed by winning the small hit of the 2nd special symbol in the high base state (after the special game) After the special game), the state shifts to the high base state, and the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol fluctuates 99 times or the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10,000 times (as a modification, the first). 2 Until the special symbol fluctuates 99 times, or until the ordinary electric accessory P770 operates 10,000 times, or until the first special symbol fluctuates 99 times, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol are totaled. It may be configured to maintain a high base state until it fluctuates 99 times). However, if the big hit game or the small hit V big hit in the high base state is repeated three times in a row, the player is forced to shift to the low base state after the third big hit game or the small hit V big hit is completed (the third big hit game). Or, if the number of holds of the second special symbol is stored four before the small hit V big hit is executed, the big hit game or the small hit is again within the four holds after shifting to the low base state. There is a possibility that you can win a V jackpot).

By having the above characteristics, it is possible to limit the number of times of the second special symbol that can be changed in the high base state after the first hit (big hit game related to the first special symbol in the low base state or small hit V big hit). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuous villa property after the first hit, and in the big hit game in the high base state after the first hit or the small hit V big hit, the end condition of the subsequent high base state is set to the high base after the first hit. Since it is possible to enhance the villa property by relaxing the condition rather than the end condition of the state, it is possible to realize a sharp playability. More specifically, after the first hit, the high base state ends when the normal electric accessory P770 operates twice, and as described above, one ball is forced into the ordinary electric accessory P770. Since the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is completed, if the high base state starts from the situation where the second special symbol is not held after the first hit, the second special symbol starts twice (the high base state starts). The change of the second special symbol due to the first entry into the ordinary electric accessory P770 and the change related to the hold of the second special symbol due to the entry into the ordinary electric accessory P770 during the change) are changed. It is configured so that it cannot be done. On the other hand, after the big hit game of the second special symbol executed by winning the big hit of the second special symbol in the low base state (after the special game), the small hit of the second special symbol is won in the low base state. After the small hit V big hit of the second special symbol (after the special game), the high base state ends when the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10,000 times, so it is the first time after the high base state starts. It is possible to cause the holding of four second special symbols during the fluctuation caused by entering the ordinary electric accessory P770 (however, even if the second special symbol fluctuates once, the high base state can be achieved. Since it ends, it is possible to make a total of 5 second special symbol fluctuations, which is a total of 5 fluctuations of this first 1 fluctuation and 4 fluctuations of the 4 holdings that are digested after the end of the high base state). In addition, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol executed by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the high base state (after the special game), the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in the high base state. After the big hit game of the 2nd special symbol executed in (after the special game), after the small hit V big hit of the 2nd special symbol executed by winning the small hit of the 2nd special symbol in the high base state (special) After the game), the high base state is maintained until the second special symbol fluctuates 99 times, or until the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10,000 times, and the small hit probability is 1/3, so the high base You can get a small hit V big hit with a high probability during the state.

[Example 6-3]
The pachinko gaming machine P in the sixth to third embodiments adopts the above-mentioned "small hit V" spec. The pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth to third embodiments has the following features.
(A) As a result of the winning / failing lottery related to the first special symbol, there are "hits" and "misses".
(B) As a result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the second special symbol, there are "hits", "small hits", and "misses".
(C) The jackpot probability is 1/300 (it does not have a high probability state), the small hit probability is 1/1 (approximately 1/1), and the number of reserved 1st special symbols is 4. The number of reserved second special symbols is four.
(D) "Second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" is adopted.
(E) The small hit game is a small hit game in which it is easy to win a V in a specific area (there is no small hit game in which it is difficult to win a V). That is, if the ball is entered into the large winning device P750 during the execution of the small hit game, the entry into the specific area becomes substantially definite, which is also referred to as the big hit game (small hit V big hit or small hit V big hit game). ) Is executed.
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is 1/1, the number of reserved normal symbols is 4, and the hit symbol of the normal symbol hits the hit symbol A. It has a symbol B (selection ratio is 3: 1), and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 corresponding to the hit symbol A and the hit symbol B in the low base state is 0.01 seconds × 1 time. The opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 corresponding to the hit symbol A in the high base state is 0.01 seconds × 1 time, and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 corresponding to the hit symbol B in the high base state is 1. Although it is 5 seconds x 3, in any of the opening patterns, the opening is forcibly completed by entering one ball into the ordinary electric accessory P770 (for example, the second 1 in the opening of 1.5 seconds x 3). If one ball is detected during the opening for 5 seconds, the remaining time of the second opening, which is the subsequent opening, is forcibly terminated and the third opening is not performed).
(G) In the low base state or the high base state, after the big hit game of the first special symbol (after the special game) executed by winning the big hit of the first special symbol, the big hit of the second special symbol is won. After the big hit game of the 2nd special symbol (after the special game), and after the small hit V big hit of the 2nd special symbol executed by winning the small hit of the 2nd special symbol (after the special game) , The high base state is maintained until the second special symbol fluctuates once or the normal electric accessory P770 operates four times (as a modification, the second special symbol is 1). Until it fluctuates four times, or until the ordinary electric accessory P770 operates four times, or until the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate a total of 10 times. It may be configured to maintain a high base state).

By having the above characteristics, it is possible to realize the playability of whether or not the winning symbol B can be won while the ordinary electric accessory P770 operates four times (in other words, while the ordinary symbol wins four times). (By winning the winning symbol B, it is possible to enter the normal electric accessory P770, one second special symbol is held, and the second special symbol wins almost a small hit. Therefore, winning the winning symbol B is almost the same as winning the small hit V big hit). Further, even if the winning symbol B is won once, if the number of times the normal electric accessory P770 is opened still remains after that, the winning symbol B may be further won, and if the winning symbol B is further won, the winning symbol B may be won. , Since the second special symbol will be held further, a plurality of consecutive small hits V big hits will be obtained.

[Example 6-4]
The pachinko gaming machine P in the sixth-4th embodiment adopts the above-mentioned "small hit V" spec. The pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth-4th embodiment has the following features.
(A) As a result of the winning / failing lottery related to the first special symbol, there are "hits" and "misses".
(B) As a result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the second special symbol, there are "hits", "small hits", and "misses".
(C) The jackpot probability is 1/300 (it does not have a high probability state), the small hit probability is 1/3, the number of hold of the first special symbol is 4, and the hold of the second special symbol is held. The number is four.
(D) "Second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" is adopted.
(E) The small hit game is a small hit game in which it is easy to win a V in a specific area (there is no small hit game in which it is difficult to win a V). That is, if the ball is entered into the large winning device P750 during the execution of the small hit game, the entry into the specific area becomes substantially definite, which is also referred to as the big hit game (small hit V big hit or small hit V big hit game). ) Is executed.
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is 1/1, the number of holdings of the normal symbol is 4, and the normal electric combination corresponding to the hit symbol of the normal symbol. Opening pattern of the object P770 (an operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 triggered by the normal symbol stopping at the hit symbol, that is, "one operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770" = "Execute one set of opening patterns that open one or more of the ordinary electric accessory P770") is 0.01 seconds x 1 in the low base state and 1.5 seconds x 3 in the high base state. However, in any of the opening patterns, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is forcibly terminated by entering one ball into the ordinary electric accessory P770 (for example, the second 1 in the opening of 1.5 seconds × 3). If one ball is detected during the opening for 5 seconds, the remaining time of the second opening, which is the subsequent opening, is forcibly terminated and the third opening is not performed).
(G) In the low base state or the high base state, after the big hit game of the first special symbol (after the special game) executed by winning the big hit of the first special symbol, the big hit of the second special symbol is won. After the big hit game of the 2nd special symbol (after the special game), and after the small hit V big hit of the 2nd special symbol executed by winning the small hit of the 2nd special symbol (after the special game) , The high base state is maintained until the second special symbol fluctuates once or the normal electric accessory P770 operates N times (as a modification, the second special symbol is 1). Until the number of times fluctuates, or until the ordinary electric accessory P770 operates N times, or until the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate a total of 10 times. It may be configured to maintain a high base state). Here, N = 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the game is configured to be different depending on the type of special game (type of big hit symbol or small hit symbol).

By having the above-mentioned characteristics, it is possible to make the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the hold related to the small hit of the second special symbol different depending on the type of the big hit symbol or the type of the small hit symbol. That is, the expected value of the small hit V jackpot and the expected number of small hit V jackpots can be made different depending on the type of the jackpot symbol or the type of the small hit symbol. As a modification, the high base state is maintained (or the second special symbol is maintained until the second special symbol fluctuates 99 times or the normal electric accessory P770 operates 10,000 times). Until it fluctuates 99 times, or until the ordinary electric accessory P770 operates 10,000 times, or until the first special symbol fluctuates 99 times, or until the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate 99 times in total. It may have a special game (big hit symbol or small hit symbol) such that the high base state is maintained until.

As a modification, when a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol having "1 fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol or 12 times of operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770" is provided as the end condition of the high base state, the 2nd special symbol is provided. The fluctuation of the symbol is set to 300 seconds, and the effect of urging the player to stop the firing of the game ball every time the normal electric accessory P770 is operated three times (in other words, the ordinary electric accessory P770 is used. (Prompt to prevent the game ball from entering) is executed. By doing so, the "number of operations of the ordinary electric accessory P770", which is one of the time saving end conditions by entering the ball into the ordinary electric accessory P770 in the situation where the number of reserved symbols is 4, is wasted. It is possible to prevent the count up. More specifically, even if the ball is put into the ordinary electric accessory P770 in the situation where the ordinary symbol is held for 4, the number of ordinary symbols held is already 4, so it does not increase, and it is simply in a high base state. Since the end of the game is just approaching, it is disadvantageous to the player, but by configuring as described above, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage.

[6-5 Examples]
The pachinko gaming machine P in the sixth-5th embodiment adopts the above-mentioned "small hit V" spec. The pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth-5th embodiment has the following features.
(A) As a result of the winning / failing lottery related to the first special symbol, there are "hits" and "misses".
(B) As a result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the second special symbol, there are "hits", "small hits", and "misses".
(C) The jackpot probability is 1/300 (it does not have a high probability state), and the small hit probability is 1/5 (small hit symbol A is 1/6, small hit symbol B is 1/30). The number of holdings of the first special symbol is four, and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is four.
(D) "Second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" is adopted.
(E) The small hit game is a small hit game A in which it is easy to win a V in a specific area (a small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol A) and a small hit game B in which it is difficult to win a V (corresponding to the small hit symbol B). It has a small hit game). That is, if the ball is entered into the large winning device P750 during the execution of the small hit game A, the entry into the specific area becomes almost definite, and the big hit game (small hit V big hit or small hit V big hit game) is triggered by this. (Referred to as) is executed, but even if the ball is entered into the large prize device P750 during the execution of the small hit game B, the ball does not enter the specific area, and the big hit game (small hit V big hit or small hit) triggered by the ball is executed. V jackpot game) is not executed.
(F) It has a low base state and a high base state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is 1/1, the number of holdings of the normal symbol is 4, and the normal electric combination corresponding to the hit symbol of the normal symbol. Opening pattern of the object P770 (an operation pattern corresponding to one operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 triggered by the normal symbol stopping at the hit symbol, that is, "one operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770" = "Execute one set of opening patterns that open one or more of the ordinary electric accessory P770") is 0.01 seconds x 1 in the low base state and 1.5 seconds x 3 in the high base state. However, in any of the opening patterns, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is forcibly terminated by entering one ball into the ordinary electric accessory P770 (for example, the second 1 in the opening of 1.5 seconds × 3). If one ball is detected during the opening for 5 seconds, the remaining time of the second opening, which is the subsequent opening, is forcibly terminated and the third opening is not performed).
(G) After the jackpot game of the first special symbol (after the special game), which is executed by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the low base state, the game shifts to the high base state and the second special symbol fluctuates. Is performed once, or the high base state is maintained until the small hit symbol A or the small hit symbol B is won five times.
(H) After the big hit game of the second special symbol executed by winning the big hit of the second special symbol in the low base state (after the special game), the small hit of the second special symbol is won in the low base state. After the small hit V big hit of the second special symbol (after the special game), the second special symbol is changed to the high base state five times, or the small hit symbol A or the small hit is executed. The high base state is maintained until the symbol B is won 5 times.
(I) After the jackpot game of the first special symbol executed by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the high base state (after the special game), the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in the high base state. After the big hit game of the 2nd special symbol executed by (after the special game), after the small hit V big hit of the 2nd special symbol executed by winning the small hit of the 2nd special symbol in the high base state (after the special game) After the special game), the game shifts to the high base state, shifts to the high base state, and until the second special symbol is changed 99 times or the small hit symbol A or the small hit symbol B is won once. High base condition is maintained.

By having the above characteristics, the first hit (big hit game related to the first special symbol in the low base state) is triggered to shift to one high base state, while the big hit game or small hit in the high base state. The V jackpot is used as an opportunity to shift to the high base state 99 times, and the jackpot game or the small hit V jackpot related to the second special symbol in the low base state (the second remaining when shifting from the high base state to the low base state). It is possible to create a playability such as shifting to a high base state of 5 times, that is, a high base state having a plurality of consecutive villa expectations, triggered by a big hit or a small hit that is won by holding a special symbol. In addition to that, if the high base state of 99 times is given, 1/6 of the small hit symbol A will be won with a high probability within 99 times, so "99 times high base state → small hit symbol A" Small hit V big hit → 99 times high base state → Small hit V big hit related to small hit symbol A → ... ”, it seems that the expectation of consecutive villas is very high, but small hit V is difficult Since it is equipped with a (substantially impossible) small hit symbol B and the high base state ends when the small hit symbol is won, extreme consecutive villas are suppressed, and by the time the small hit symbol B is won, it is small. It is possible to realize the playability of how many times the winning symbol A is won. In addition, in the case of the high base state of 5 times, even if the small hit symbol is won once (the small hit symbol B is won once) so that the high base state of 5 times can be surely executed. Even if it is configured so that it does not end the high base state.

[6th-6th Examples]
The pachinko gaming machine P in the sixth to sixth embodiments has the same board structure as that of FIG. 53, and adopts the specification of "small hit rush". However, unlike the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, the purpose is not to increase the number of balls to be played by making small hits occur frequently, so even when the small hit is won, the large winning opening P751 is used. It is very difficult to enter a game ball because it opens only for 0.01 seconds. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 6th-6th embodiment has the following features.
(A) As a result of the winning / failing lottery related to the first special symbol, there are "hits" and "misses".
(B) As a result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the second special symbol, there are "hits", "small hits", and "misses".
(C) The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50, and the small hit probability in the low probability state and the high probability state is 1 / 1.2.
(D) "Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is adopted, and "V probability variation" is adopted ("10R probability variation jackpot A" and "10R probability variation jackpot B" described later are easy to enter a specific area. It is a big hit symbol, and "10R normal big hit" is a big hit symbol that is difficult to enter a specific area and is practically impossible).
(E) In the low-probability low-base state, the low-probability high-base state, and the high-probability high-base state, the game progresses mainly on the first special symbol. The fluctuation time is relatively shorter than that of the second special symbol (the average fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds on average in the low-probability low-base state, and 3 on average in the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state. Although it is seconds, the average time of the second special symbol is 10 minutes on average in the low-probability low-base state, the low-probability high-base state, and the high-probability high-base state).
(F) In the high-probability low-base state, the game progresses mainly on the second special symbol. Therefore, in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol ((F). The average fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds on average in the high-probability low-base state, but the average time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes on average in the high-probability low-base state).
(G) As the jackpot symbol related to the first special symbol, "10R probability variation jackpot A", which triggers the transition to the high-probability low-base state that is probable until the next time, is 40%, and the transition to the low-probability high-base state of 100 rotations. The trigger "10R normal jackpot" is selected at 60%.
(H) As the jackpot symbol related to the second special symbol, "10R probability variation jackpot A", which triggers the transition to the high-probability low-base state that is probable until the next time, is 40%, and to the high-probability high-base state that is probable until the next time. "10R Probability Change Big Hit B", which is the trigger for the transition, is selected at 60%.

By having the above characteristics, if the game shifts to the high probability low base state after the first hit (big hit game related to the first special symbol in the low base state), the game progresses mainly with the second special symbol, and the second 2 If the result of the lottery for winning or failing the special symbol is a big hit, all of them are "probability change big hits", so that the special game is guaranteed to be executed at least two more times. Specifically, when the second special symbol wins "10R probability variation jackpot A", it shifts to the high probability low base state again, and the execution of two more special games is guaranteed again, and it becomes "10R probability variation jackpot B". By winning, the game progresses mainly with the first special symbol by shifting to the high probability and high base state. Furthermore, after switching to the high-probability high-base state and switching to the game progress centered on the first special symbol, the first special symbol wins the "10R probability variation jackpot A", and the high-probability low base again. It will be a novel game that shifts to the state and guarantees the execution of two more special games again.

[Examples 6-7]
The pachinko gaming machine P in the sixth-7th embodiment has the same board structure as that of FIG. 53, and adopts the specification of "small hit rush". However, unlike the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, the purpose is not to increase the number of balls to be played by making small hits occur frequently, so even when the small hit is won, the large winning opening P751 is used. It is very difficult to enter a game ball because it opens only for 0.01 seconds. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 6th-6th embodiment has the following features.
(A) As a result of the winning / failing lottery related to the first special symbol, there are "hits" and "misses".
(B) As a result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the second special symbol, there are "hits", "small hits", and "misses".
(C) The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50, and the small hit probability in the low probability state and the high probability state is 1 / 1.2.
(D) "Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is adopted, and "V probability variation" is adopted ("10R probability variation jackpot" described later is a jackpot symbol that makes it easy to enter a specific area, and "10R normal". "Big hit" is a big hit symbol that makes it difficult to enter a specific area and is virtually impossible).
(E) In the low-probability low-base state, the low-probability high-base state, and the high-probability high-base state, the game progresses mainly on the first special symbol. The fluctuation time is relatively shorter than that of the second special symbol (the average fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds on average in the low-probability low-base state, and 3 on average in the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state. Although it is seconds, the average time of the second special symbol is 10 minutes on average in the low-probability low-base state, the low-probability high-base state, and the high-probability high-base state).
(F) In the high-probability low-base state, the game progresses mainly on the second special symbol. Therefore, in this game state, the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol ((F). The average fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 2 seconds on average in the high-probability low-base state, but the average time of the first special symbol is 5 minutes on average in the high-probability low-base state).
(G) As the jackpot symbol related to the first special symbol, "10R probability variation jackpot", which triggers the transition to the high-probability high-base state that is probable until the next time, is selected at 100%, but the high-base state has passed 50 times. Then, it shifts to the low base state and switches to the high probability low base state.
(H) As a jackpot symbol related to the second special symbol, "10R probability variation jackpot", which is a trigger for transition to a high-probability high-base state that is probable until the next time, is 50%, and a transition to a low-probability high-base state of 100 rotations. "10R normal jackpot" is selected at 50%.

By having the above characteristics, the first hit (the big hit game related to the first special symbol in the low base state) always shifts to the high probability state, so that the execution of the special game again is guaranteed and 50 times. In the high-probability high-base state, the game progresses mainly with the first special symbol, so if a big hit is made within 50 times (with the first special symbol), it is possible to create a game property in which the player always shifts to the high-probability state again.

The present invention has been described above based on the present embodiment, the second embodiment, the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment, and the sixth embodiment. Each embodiment is merely an example, and it is understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications are possible for each of these components and combinations of each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. be.

P pachinko game machine, P1 outer frame, P2 front frame, P3 glass frame,
P4 back set unit, P5 game board, P40 main control board,
P41 effect control board, P42 image control board, P43 payout control board,
P44 power board, P47 power switch, P48 ram clear switch,
P49 setting key switch, P50 main control display device,
P51 1st special symbol display device, P52 2nd special symbol display device,
P80 effect display device, P81 effect operation means (P380 effect operation unit,
P381 production button, P382 lever, P383 cross key),
P82 production lamp (P350 frame lamp, P550 board lamp),
P83 speaker (P141 curtain plate speaker, P371 upper speaker),
P560 directing accessory, P710 1st start winning device,
P720 2nd start winning device, P730 general winning device,
P740 Normal electric accessory, P750 Large winning opening device P755 Special electric accessory, P770 Ordinary electric accessory

Claims (1)

The first start winning opening where the game ball can enter, and
The second start winning opening where the game ball can enter, and
A big winning opening that can be open and closed,
A variable member that is attached to the first start winning opening and can take an open state and a closed state,
The first special symbol display unit that can display the first special symbol,
The second special symbol display unit that can display the second special symbol,
An ordinary symbol display unit that can display ordinary symbols, and
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production,
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
It is configured so that the first random number can be obtained based on the ball entering the first start winning opening.
When the first random number is acquired, the first random number is configured to be memorable as the first hold.
The winning / failing lottery is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol can be determined based on the result of the winning / failing lottery.
Based on the determined variation pattern of the first special symbol, the first special symbol can be stopped and displayed after the first special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit.
It is configured so that the second random number can be obtained based on the ball entering the second start winning opening.
When the second random number is acquired, the second random number is configured to be memorable as the second hold.
The winning / failing lottery is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol can be determined based on the result of the winning / failing lottery.
Based on the determined variation pattern of the second special symbol, the second special symbol can be stopped and displayed after the second special symbol is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display unit.
After the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the first random number is winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the second random number is winning and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. , It is configured to be able to perform special games that can put the big prize opening in an advantageous state for the player.
By displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner on the normal symbol display unit and then stopping and displaying it in a predetermined mode, it is possible to execute an auxiliary game in which the variable member can be in an advantageous state for the player.
As a gaming state related to the ease of entering the first starting winning opening, there is a low base state and a high base state in which the ease of entering the first starting winning opening is higher than the low base state, and a predetermined transition It is configured to be able to shift to a high base state by satisfying the conditions.
When the execution of the special game is completed, it is possible to shift from the low base state to the high base state, and the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display number of the second special symbol in the low base state is Even if it reaches a certain number of times, it is configured to be able to shift from the low base state to the high base state.
By starting the fluctuation display in which the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display number of the second special symbol in the low base state reaches a specific number, it is possible to shift from the low base state to the high base state. A pachinko game machine that is characterized by being

Images